Basic Reporting Guide

Version: 8.0.3
Document Number: 09490803

Thirteenth Edition, November 2006, version 8.0.3
To ensure that you are using the documentation that corresponds to the software you are licensed to use, compare this version number with the software version shown in “About MicroStrategy...” in the Help menu of your software. Document number: 09490803 Copyright © 2006 by MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved. If you have not executed a written or electronic agreement with MicroStrategy or any authorized MicroStrategy distributor, the following terms apply: This software and documentation are the proprietary and confidential information of MicroStrategy Incorporated and may not be provided to any other person. Copyright © 2001-2006 by MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved. THIS SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR LIMITED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER MICROSTRATEGY INCORPORATED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE AND NONINFRINGMENT, QUALITY OR ACCURACY. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT MICROSTRATEGY, INC. OR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED WITH THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event will MicroStrategy, Inc. or any other person involved with the creation, production, or distribution of the Software be liable to you on account of any claim for damage, including any lost profits, lost savings, or other special, incidental, consequential, or exemplary damages, including but not limited to any damages assessed against or paid by you to any third party, arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Software and Documentation, even if MicroStrategy, Inc. or any such other person or entity has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for the claim by any other party. In addition, MicroStrategy, Inc. or any other person involved in the creation, production, or distribution of the Software shall not be liable for any claim by you or any other party for damages arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Software and Documentation, based upon principles of contract warranty, negligence, strict liability for the negligence of indemnity or contribution, the failure of any remedy to achieve its essential purpose, or otherwise. The entire liability of MicroStrategy, Inc. and your exclusive remedy shall not exceed, at the option of MicroStrategy, Inc., either a full refund of the price paid, or replacement of the Software. No oral or written information given out expands the liability of MicroStrategy, Inc. beyond that specified in the above limitation of liability. Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you. The information contained in this manual (the Documentation) and the Software are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by MicroStrategy, Inc. MicroStrategy, Inc. reserves the right to make periodic modifications to the Software or the Documentation without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revision. Copying, duplicating, selling, or otherwise distributing any part of the Software or Documentation without prior written consent of an authorized representative of MicroStrategy, Inc. are prohibited. U.S. Government Restricted Rights. It is acknowledged that the Software and Documentation were developed at private expense, that no part is public domain, and that the Software and Documentation are Commercial Computer Software provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS under Federal Acquisition Regulations and agency supplements to them. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFAR 252.227-7013 et. seq. or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software—Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. Contractor is MicroStrategy, Inc., 1861 International Drive, McLean, Virginia 22102. Rights are reserved under copyright laws of the United States with respect to unpublished portions of the Software. The following are either trademarks or registered trademarks of MicroStrategy Incorporated in the United States and certain other countries:
MicroStrategy, MicroStrategy 6, MicroStrategy 7, MicroStrategy 7i, MicroStrategy 7i Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy 7i Olap Services, MicroStrategy 8, MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy Administrator, MicroStrategy Agent, MicroStrategy Architect, MicroStrategy BI Developer Kit, MicroStrategy Broadcast Server, MicroStrategy Broadcaster, MicroStrategy Broadcaster Server, MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Platform, MicroStrategy Consulting, MicroStrategy CRM Applications, MicroStrategy Customer Analyzer, MicroStrategy Desktop, MicroStrategy Desktop Analyst, MicroStrategy Desktop Designer, MicroStrategy eCRM 7, MicroStrategy Education, MicroStrategy eTrainer, MicroStrategy Executive, MicroStrategy Infocenter, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal Edition, MicroStrategy MDX Adapter, MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server, MicroStrategy Objects, MicroStrategy OLAP Provider, MicroStrategy SDK, MicroStrategy Support, MicroStrategy Telecaster, MicroStrategy Transactor, MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Web Business Analyzer, MicroStrategy World, Alarm, Alarm.com, Alert.com, Angel, Angel.com, Application Development and Sophisticated Analysis, Best In Business Intelligence, Centralized Application Management, Changing The Way Government Looks At Information, DSSArchitect, DSS Broadcaster, DSS Broadcaster Server, DSS Office, DSSServer, DSS Subscriber, DSS Telecaster, DSSWeb, eBroadcaster, eCaster, eStrategy, eTelecaster, Information Like Water, Insight Is Everything, Intelligence Through Every Phone, Your Telephone Just Got Smarter, Intelligence To Every Decision Maker, Intelligent E-Business, IWAPU, Personal Intelligence Network, Personalized Intelligence Portal, Query Tone, Quickstrike, Rapid Application Development, Strategy.com, Telepath, Telepath Intelligence, Telepath Intelligence (and Design), The E-Business Intelligence Platform, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence Platform Built For The Enterprise, The Intelligence Company, The Platform For Intelligent E-Business, The Power Of Intelligent eBusiness, The Power Of Intelligent E-Business, The Scalable Business Intelligence Platform Built For The Internet, Industrial-Strength Business Intelligence, Office Intelligence, MicroStrategy Office, MicroStrategy Report Services, MicroStrategy Web MMT, MicroStrategy Web Services and Pixel Perfect are all registered trademarks or trademarks of MicroStrategy Incorporated. All other products are trademarks of their respective holders. Specifications subject to change without notice. MicroStrategy is not responsible for errors or omissions. MicroStrategy makes no warranties or commitments concerning the availability of future products or versions that may be planned or under development.

Patent Information
This product is patented. One or more of the following patents may apply to the product sold herein: U.S. Patent Nos. 6,154,766, 6,173,310, 6,260,050, 6,263,051, 6,269,393, 6,279,033, 6,501,832, 6,567,796, 6,587,547, 6,606,596, 6,658,093, 6,658,432, 6,662,195, 6,671,715, 6,691,100, 6,694,316, 6,697,808, 6,704,723, 6,707,889, 6,741,980, 6,765,997, 6,768,788, 6,772,137, 6,788,768, 6,792,086, 6,798,867, 6,801,910, 6,820,073, 6,829,334, 6,836,537, 6,850,603, 6,859,798, 6,873,693, 6,885,734, 6,888,929, 6,895,084, 6,940,953, 6,964,012, 6,977,992, 6,996,568, 6,996,569, 7,003,512, 7,010,518, 7,016,480, 7,020,251, 7,039,165, 7,082,422 and 7,113,993. Other patent applications are pending.

Various MicroStrategy products contain the copyrighted technology of third parties. This product may contain one or more of the following copyrighted technologies: Graph Generation Engine Copyright © 1998-2006. Three D Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. Actuate® Formula One. Copyright © 1993-2006 Actuate Corporation. All rights reserved. XML parser Copyright © 2003-2006 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Xalan XSLT processor. Copyright © 1999-2006. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. Xerces XML parser. Copyright © 1999-2006. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. FOP XSL formatting objects. Copyright © 2004-2006. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. Portions of Intelligence Server memory management Copyright 1991-2006 Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved. International Components for Unicode Copyright © 1999-2006 Compaq Computer Corporation Copyright © 1999-2006 Hewlett-Packard Company Copyright © 1999-2006 IBM Corporation Copyright © 1999-2006 Hummingbird Communications Ltd. Copyright © 1999-2006 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright © 1999-2006 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Copyright © 1999-2006 The Open Group All rights reserved. Real Player and RealJukebox are included under license from Real Networks, Inc. Copyright © 1999-2006. All rights reserved.

CONTENTS
Description of Guide .................................................................. xi About this book ............................................................................. xii How to find business scenarios and examples ....................... xii Prerequisites .......................................................................... xiii Who should use this guide - report designers vs. report analysts xiii Resources.................................................................................... xiv Documentation....................................................................... xiv Education ................................................................................xx Consulting ...............................................................................xx International support .............................................................. xxi Technical Support .................................................................. xxi Feedback ................................................................................... xxvi

1. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting

Introduction.................................................................................. 1 Starting MicroStrategy ................................................................... 2 Starting MicroStrategy Desktop ............................................... 2 Starting MicroStrategy Web ..................................................... 3 About passwords ..................................................................... 4 Security privileges.................................................................... 5 About sample data ................................................................... 5 Opening a report............................................................................ 7 Components of a report ................................................................. 9 Rows and columns .................................................................. 9 Cells ....................................................................................... 10 Report types ................................................................................ 10

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

v

Contents

Basic Reporting Guide

Grids ...................................................................................... 11 Graphs ................................................................................... 11 Grid/Graphs ........................................................................... 13 SQL View ............................................................................... 13 Alternatives to standard reports................................................... 14 Report Services documents................................................... 15 HTML documents .................................................................. 16 OLAP Services ............................................................................ 18 Determining whether you have OLAP Services..................... 18 View filters ............................................................................. 18 Derived metrics ...................................................................... 19 Dynamic aggregation ............................................................. 19 Printing and exporting report data ............................................... 19 Printing a report ..................................................................... 19 Exporting data........................................................................ 21

2. Formatting a Report

Introduction................................................................................ 25 Ideas for formatting...................................................................... 26 Formatting a grid report ............................................................... 27 Formatting conditional values: Thresholds ............................ 27 Formatting null values and blank cells ................................... 34 Renaming row and column headers ...................................... 35 Expanding or collapsing attribute element groupings ............ 39 Hiding a metric column .......................................................... 41 Formatting groups of report rows or columns: Banding ......... 43 Formatting report borders ...................................................... 47 Formatting a combined grid and graph report ............................. 50 Formatting a graph report ............................................................ 52 Viewing a graph report........................................................... 52 Understanding a graph report ................................................ 53 Choosing a graph style .......................................................... 53 Changing the color scheme of a graph .................................. 56 Moving and resizing graph objects ........................................ 58 Undoing and redoing graph manipulations ............................ 58 Formatting metric data in a report.......................................... 61 Autostyles .................................................................................... 62

3. Analyzing Data

Introduction................................................................................ 65 Sorting data ................................................................................. 66

vi

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Contents

Quick sort............................................................................... 69 Finding values.............................................................................. 70 Narrowing a search for report data ........................................ 71 Narrowing a search for SQL syntax ....................................... 72 Summary/detail of data................................................................ 72 Outlining data......................................................................... 73 Grouping data by page .......................................................... 79 Pivoting data ................................................................................ 83 Methods for pivoting data ...................................................... 85 Specifying maximum and minimum values: Report limits............ 86 Calculating data ........................................................................... 88 Determining how metric data is combined: Metric join types . 89 Evaluation order of calculations ............................................. 95 Subtotals .............................................................................. 100

4. Answering Questions about Data

Introduction.............................................................................. 103 Filtering data .............................................................................. 104 Viewing a filter’s definition.................................................... 107 Customizing the Report Details pane .................................. 108 Understanding hierarchies......................................................... 110 Business attributes .............................................................. 111 Hierarchies........................................................................... 112 How data is aggregated on a report: metric level ................ 115 Drilling into related data ............................................................. 115 Methods for drilling on a report ............................................ 116 Tracking your drill path and naming the drilled-to report...... 119 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results.................... 121 Troubleshooting drilling behavior ......................................... 122 Enabling drilling down or drilling anywhere.......................... 122 Keeping or removing the drilled-from attribute in the new report 124 Drilling on a report with threshold formatting ....................... 126 Drilling on a report grouped by page-by fields ..................... 130 Calculating data on drilled-to reports: Attribute join types.... 146

5. Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data

Introduction.............................................................................. 147 Refreshing a report .................................................................... 148 Understanding your data sources ........................................ 148 Refreshing the data displayed on a report ........................... 149

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

vii

Contents

Basic Reporting Guide

Report caches...................................................................... 150 Answering report prompts.......................................................... 154 Saving reports with prompts ................................................ 170

6. Building a Quick Query for Analysis

Introduction.............................................................................. 179 Prerequisites ........................................................................ 179 Quick report creation: Building a new report.............................. 181 Quick object access: Creating shortcuts to objects ............. 181 Creating a report for analysis............................................... 182

7. Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

Introduction.............................................................................. 189 Before you begin........................................................................ 190 Report designer role ............................................................ 190 Developing a business query: Best practices ...................... 192 MicroStrategy objects ................................................................ 197 MicroStrategy projects ......................................................... 199 Creating and saving objects ................................................ 202 Quick object creation ........................................................... 205 Providing business context to a report: Attributes ..................... 206 Adding attributes to a report ................................................ 207 Calculating data on a report: Metrics ......................................... 208 Viewing and working with metrics: The Metric Editor........... 209 Components of a metric....................................................... 210 Metrics made up of metrics: Compound metrics.................. 226 Creating a metric ................................................................. 229 Totals and subtotals............................................................. 237 Formatting a metric .............................................................. 242 Asking for user input into a metric’s definition...................... 245 Editing a metric .................................................................... 245 Adding a metric to a report .................................................. 246 Additional metric functionality .............................................. 246 Filtering data on a report: Filters................................................ 247 Creating or editing filters: The Filter Editor .......................... 249 Types of filters ..................................................................... 251 Filtering data based on business attributes: Attribute qualifications ........................................................................ 253 Filtering data based on attribute relationships or metrics: Set qualifications ........................................................................ 266 Filtering data based on existing filters or report results: Shortcut qualifications ........................................................................ 273

viii

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Contents

Joining filter qualifications with operators ............................ 281 Asking for user input into a filter’s definition......................... 290 Editing a filter ....................................................................... 291 Adding a filter to a report ..................................................... 291 Additional filtering functionality............................................. 292 Asking for user input: Prompts................................................... 292 Components of a prompt ..................................................... 296 Creating a prompt ................................................................ 299 Types of prompts ................................................................. 301 Filtering data on an attribute, attribute form, attribute element, or metric: Filter definition prompts............................................ 305 Filtering data based on metrics, attributes, or other objects: Object prompts .................................................................... 322 Filtering data based on a single value or string: Value prompts 326 Editing a prompt................................................................... 331 Adding a prompt to a report ................................................. 331 Additional prompt functionality ............................................. 331 Designing a report’s structure: Templates ................................. 332 Creating a grid report................................................................. 334 Prerequisites ........................................................................ 335 Creating a report with the Report Editor .............................. 337 Reports: Adding attributes to a report .................................. 341 Reports: Adding metrics to a report ..................................... 344 Reports: Adding a filter to a report ....................................... 346 Reports: Adding prompts to a report.................................... 351 Saving a report .................................................................... 366 Example for creating a new report ....................................... 367 Adding features for users........................................................... 371 Formatting for easier data analysis...................................... 372 Letting users choose their own report filter .......................... 377 Adding usability to a Report Services document ................. 377 Confirming your choice of graph style.................................. 378 Customizing drill maps......................................................... 378 Including totals and subtotals .............................................. 379 Including sorted data ........................................................... 379 Hierarchical display of grouped attribute elements .............. 380 Grouping data by page: Adding page-by fields to a report .. 380 Adding consolidations and custom groups .......................... 381 Specifying maximum and minimum values: Report limits.... 382 Determining evaluation order of calculations ....................... 383 Modifying an existing report....................................................... 384

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

ix

......................................................... 398 Adding and removing shortcuts from the Shortcut Bar ................................................................................ 404 MicroStrategy Web interface ........ 395 Freeform SQL ................................................................................................................................................ 389 Creating a Report Services document ................ 389 Creating a graph report................ 389 Creating an HTML document............ 394 Dynamic aggregation ........................... 392 Designing reports that use OLAP Services ........................ 415 Index ................................................ 395 Query Builder .................... 397 MicroStrategy Desktop interface..................... 394 Building a query using alternative data access methods........................ 425 x © 2006 MicroStrategy............................................ 407 Navigating the report interface in MicroStrategy Web ............................................. 402 MicroStrategy Desktop Report Editor interface.................... Inc.................................... ......... 407 MicroStrategy Web Report Editor interface ... 411 Glossary ....................................................................................................... 393 Derived metrics . 395 A. 398 Navigating through Desktop ...................................................................................Contents Basic Reporting Guide Creating other types of reports .............. Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy Introduction...................................... 392 View filters and view reports ...................................................................................................................

Chapter 4. It also provides the information necessary for report designers to design. Formatting a Report. create. shows you how to log in and get started with MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. Chapter 2. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting.PREFACE Description of Guide The MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide describes the steps for a business analyst to execute and analyze a business report in MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. Analyzing Data. Specifically. shows you how to refresh your report data and how to answer report prompts. explains how to format a report. this guide provides the following information: • Chapter 1. Inc. and modify simple business reports and reporting objects using the MicroStrategy platform. describes common methods you can use to better understand and present the data that appears in a report. explains how to expose additional data related to your original report. xi . Chapter 3. • • • • © 2006 MicroStrategy. Chapter 5. Answering Questions about Data. Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data.

It describes MicroStrategy objects and how to use them in creating new reports. Chapter 7. and describe the user roles the information in this book was designed for. list prerequisites for using this book. The following sections provide the location of additional examples. The MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide presents more advanced product functionality and is a logical “next step” when you have mastered the information in this manual. How to find business scenarios and examples Within this guide. and project with reports. • Technical terms that need more clarification are defined in the glossary section of this guide. and other topics. Introduction to Reporting in this book. Most MicroStrategy manuals assume you have read and mastered all topics covered in this guide. About this book This book is divided into chapters that begin with a brief overview of the chapter’s content. many of the concepts discussed are accompanied by business scenarios or other descriptive examples. system administration. metadata. Detailed steps for all functionality in the MicroStrategy system is available in the online help. for Designers. Other MicroStrategy manuals cover installation. which is MicroStrategy’s sample warehouse.Preface Basic Reporting Guide • Chapter 6 is for report analysts. Many of the examples use the MicroStrategy Tutorial. Inc. is for report designers. Information about the MicroStrategy Tutorial can be found in Chapter 1. Building Query Objects and Queries. . xii About this book © 2006 MicroStrategy. It shows you how to create a simple report using MicroStrategy’s Report Builder tool.

and so on. and customer analysis. this role is made available only to a group of advanced users who can design © 2006 MicroStrategy. and modify simple business reports using MicroStrategy software. each from a different business area.Basic Reporting Guide Preface Other examples in this book use the Analytics Modules. Inc. drill maps. About this book xiii . as well as how to design. before working with this manual you should be familiar with: • • the nature and structure of your company’s data that you will use for your business intelligence reports the information provided in the Introduction to MicroStrategy Guide Who should use this guide . filters. or objects. report analysts This document is designed for all users who require a basic understanding of how to manipulate the data in a report to analyze business information. In general. Prerequisites If you are a report designer. human resources. Example analysis includes such business areas as financial reporting. Report design is the process of building reports from basic report components. create.report designers vs. As a report designer. Each module comes with a sample data model and a collection of packaged reports that allow dozens of analytical variations. To design reports you use the Report Editor in either MicroStrategy Desktop or Web. you can set up a controlled. Detailed examples of advanced reporting functionality can be found in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. metrics. The Report Editor also allows you to create report objects such as templates. which are a set of pre-created sample reports. user-friendly environment for report analysts. The Analytics Modules are part of a product bundle called the MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Developer Kit (BIDK).

using the Report Builder and Report Wizard tools. Inc. and should use chapter 6 as their primary reference to begin creating reports.Preface Basic Reporting Guide reports. Report analysts can explore report data with the wide range of powerful reporting functionality that report designers can make available to them. report analysts can create quick and easy reports of their own to answer simple business questions. Report analysts can also save new reports that result as they explore and manipulate data. The Desktop Designer and Web Professional user roles in MicroStrategy include the set of privileges required to create reports and report objects. Resources Documentation MicroStrategy provides both manuals and online help. Report designers should review chapters 1 through 5 as an introduction. these two information sources provide different types of information. Manuals: MicroStrategy manuals provide • • • introductory information concepts checklists xiv Resources © 2006 MicroStrategy. as described below. for each respective product. making further analysis quicker and more direct. . Report analysis is the process of analyzing business data displayed in existing reports either in MicroStrategy Desktop or Web. for each respective product. The Desktop Analyst and Web Analyst user roles in MicroStrategy include the set of privileges required to analyze reports and use related functionality. Report analysts should use chapters 1 through 5 as their primary reference to begin analyzing report data and working with various report functionality to manipulate that data. Finally.

and using the MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition of the software. you can download it from www.Basic Reporting Guide Preface • • examples high-level procedures to get started Online help: MicroStrategy online help provides • • detailed steps to perform procedures descriptions of each option on every software screen Manuals The following manuals are available from your CD-ROM or the machine where MicroStrategy was installed.adobe. Resources xv . © 2006 MicroStrategy. If you do not have Acrobat Reader installed on your computer. UNIX. • MicroStrategy Quick Start Guide Overview of the installation and evaluation process. Inc. and additional resources. MicroStrategy Overview • Introduction to MicroStrategy: Evaluation Guide Instructions for installing. Adobe Acrobat Reader 4. configuring. Manuals for Query. Reporting. • MicroStrategy Upgrade Guide Instructions to upgrade existing MicroStrategy products. The procedure to access them is below. and Analysis Products • MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide Information to install and configure MicroStrategy products on Windows. as well as basic maintenance guidelines.com.0 or higher is required to view these documents. and HP platforms. Linux.

hierarchies. configure. • MicroStrategy Analytical Functions Reference Function syntax and formula components. Topics include reports. attribute forms. • MicroStrategy Document Creation Guide Instructions to design and create Report Services documents. building on information in the Basic Reporting Guide and Advanced Reporting Guide. deploy. metrics. filters. transformations. Inc. and troubleshoot MicroStrategy Web Services. and prompts. maintain. custom groups. advanced schemas. xvi Resources © 2006 MicroStrategy. • MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide Instructions to get started with MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. and troubleshoot a MicroStrategy business intelligence system. and prompts. filters. OLAP Cube reports. and project optimization. metrics. tune. • MicroStrategy System Administration Guide Concepts and high-level steps to implement.Preface Basic Reporting Guide • MicroStrategy Project Design Guide Information to create and modify MicroStrategy projects. • MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide Instructions for advanced topics in the MicroStrategy system. instructions to use functions in metrics. • MicroStrategy Web Services Administration Guide Concepts and tasks to install. consolidations. Includes the basics of reports. Freeform SQL reports. building on information in the Basic Reporting Guide. . examples of functions in business scenarios. attributes. filters. Data Mining Services. tune. and understand facts. Query Builder reports.

• MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server System Administrator Guide Concepts and high-level steps to implement. Resources xvii . • MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Installation and Configuration Guide Information to install and configure Narrowcast Server. tune. Inc. maintain. • MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Application Designer Guide Fundamentals of designing Narrowcast Server applications. and troubleshoot Narrowcast Server. Manuals for Analytics Modules • • • • • • • Business Intelligence Developer Kit (BIDK) Installation and Porting Guide Customer Analysis Module Reference Sales Force Analysis Module Reference Web Traffic Analysis Module Reference Financial Reporting Analysis Module Reference Sales and Distribution Analysis Module Reference Human Resources Analysis Module Reference © 2006 MicroStrategy.Basic Reporting Guide Preface Manuals for Information Delivery and Alerting Products • MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Getting Started Guide Instructions to work with the tutorial to learn Narrowcast Server interfaces and features. • MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Upgrade Guide Instructions to upgrade an existing Narrowcast Server.

and click OK. code samples. xviii Resources © 2006 MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy. When you select one of these guides. 2 Click the link for the desired manual. including details about architecture. To access installed online documentation 1 From the Windows Start menu. and so on. Documents the Narrowcast Server Delivery Engine and Subscription Portal APIs. Select Open this file from its current location. customization scenarios. which is sold as part of the MicroStrategy SDK. click the Bookmarks and Page from the View menu. integrate Narrowcast Server with other systems. and the Narrowcast Server SPI. choose Programs. the File Download dialog box opens. 3 Some documentation is provided in HTML help format. If bookmarks are not visible on the left side of an Acrobat (PDF) document. • Narrowcast Server SDK Guide Instructions to customize Narrowcast Server functionality.Preface Basic Reporting Guide Software Development Kits • MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL) Information to understand the MicroStrategy SDK. Inc. . object models. • MicroStrategy Web SDK The Web SDK is available in the MicroStrategy Developer Library. A Web page opens with a list of available manuals in PDF format. then Product Manuals. and embed Narrowcast Server functionality within other applications.

check boxes. Documentation standards MicroStrategy online help and PDF manuals (available both online and in printed format) provides standards to help you identify concepts and procedures. options. italic • new terms defined within the text and in the glossary • names of other product manuals • when part of a command syntax.scp and press ENTER. and menus that are the focus of actions or part of a list of such GUI elements and their definitions • text to be entered by the user Example: Click Select Warehouse. Type bold Indicates • button names. Resources xix . Example: Type cmdmgr -f scriptfile. Inc. indicates variable information to be replaced by the user Example: The metric level is the level of calculation for the metric. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Example: Type copy c:\filename d:\foldername\filename Courier font • • • • • • calculations code samples registry keys path and file names URLs messages displayed in the screen Example: Sum(revenue)/number of months.Basic Reporting Guide Preface Online help MicroStrategy provides several ways to access online help: • • • Help button: Use the Help button at the bottom of most software screens to see context-sensitive help. Help menu: Select Contents and Index to see the main table of contents for the help system. F1 key: Press F1 to see context-sensitive help addressing the function or task you are currently performing. The following table lists these conventions. dialog boxes. lists.

visit www.microstrategy. press CTRL+B. SHIFT+F1) A note icon indicates helpful information for specific situations. visit www.com/Consulting. project and testing strategies and recommendations. A warning icon alerts you to important information such as potential security risks.com/Education.Preface Basic Reporting Guide Type UPPERCASE Indicates • keyboard command key (such as ENTER) • shortcut key (such as CTRL+V) Example: To bold the selected text. Inc. Education MicroStrategy Education Services provides a comprehensive curriculum and highly skilled education consultants. these should be read before continuing. Offerings include complex security architecture designs. Consulting MicroStrategy Consulting Services provides proven methods for delivering leading-edge technology solutions. xx Resources © 2006 MicroStrategy. strategic planning. . Many customers and partners from over 800 different organizations have benefited from MicroStrategy instruction.microstrategy. For a detailed description of education offerings and course curriculums. performance and tuning. For a detailed description of consulting offerings. + A keyboard command that calls for the use of more than one key (for example. and more.

see the MicroStrategy readme. currency symbols. support for date formats. and release notes. MicroStrategy also provides limited support for heterogeneous configurations (where some of the components may lie in different locales). Resources xxi . and availability of translated interfaces and certain documentation.Basic Reporting Guide Preface International support MicroStrategy supports several locales. Please contact MicroStrategy Technical Support for more details. French. Portuguese (Brazilian). you should: 1 Consult the product guides. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Technical Support If you have questions about a specific MicroStrategy product. 2 Consult the MicroStrategy Knowledge Base online at http://www. Paths to access each are described above. German. and Swedish. For information on specific languages supported by individual MicroStrategy system components. MicroStrategy is certified in homogeneous configurations (where all the components lie in the same locale) in the following languages—English (US). Chinese (simplified). A translated user interface is available in each of the above languages.microstrategy.com/support/ k_base/index. online help.asp A technical administrator in your organization may be able to help you resolve some of your issues immediately. Japanese. Italian. Inc. Spanish. Korean. readme files. decimal formats. Support for a locale typically includes native database and operating system support.

4 Minimize the complexity of the system or project object definition to isolate the cause.com/Support/ Expiration. contact MicroStrategy Technical Support directly. Inc.microstrategy.com/Support/ Policies. All customer inquiries and case communications must come through these named individuals.asp. Your company may request to change their Support Liaisons two times per year with prior written notice to MicroStrategy Technical Support. Please refer to the terms of your purchase agreement to determine the type of support available to you. To ensure the most effective and productive relationship with MicroStrategy Technical Support. MicroStrategy Technical Support may be contacted by your company’s Support Liaison. review the Policies and Procedures document posted at http://www. 5 Determine whether the issue occurs on a local machine or on multiple machines in the customer environment. xxii Resources © 2006 MicroStrategy. 2 Verify that the system is using a currently supported version of MicroStrategy software by checking the Product Support Expiration Schedule at http://www. 3 Attempt to reproduce the issue and determine whether it occurs consistently. the Support Liaison may follow the steps below to ensure that issues are resolved quickly: 1 Verify that the issue is with MicroStrategy software and not a third party software.Preface Basic Reporting Guide 3 If the resources listed in the steps above do not provide you with a solution.microstrategy. A Support Liaison is a person whom your company has designated as a point-of-contact with MicroStrategy’s support personnel. Ensure issues are resolved quickly Before logging a case with MicroStrategy Technical Support. . Your company may designate two employees to serve as their Support Liaisons.

M.com Web: https://support.M.Basic Reporting Guide Preface 6 Discuss the issue with other users by posting a question about the issue on the MicroStrategy Customer Forum at https://forum. when.microstrategy. GMT.M.M. Monday-Friday except holidays • Mainland Europe: 9:00 A.com Fax: +81 3 5456 5464 Phone: • APAC (except Korea): +81 3 5456 5618 • Korea: +82 2 565 2525 Hours: 9:00 A. These holidays reflect the national public holidays in each country.M.com.–6:00 P.com Web: https://support.–7:00 P. Monday-Friday except holidays E-mail: latamsupport@microstrategy.microstrategy. send e-mail or fax. North America E-mail: support@microstrategy.com Web: https://support.microstrategy. CET.M. If your Support Liaison is unable to reach MicroStrategy Technical Support by phone during the hours of operation. or log a case using the Online Support Interface.M. Monday–Friday except holidays E-mail: eurosupp@microstrategy. Phone: • United Kingdom: +44 (0) 208 396 0085 • Benelux: +31 20 346 9210 • Finland: +35 8 9 6937 9620 • France: +33 1 41 91 86 49 • Germany: +49 69 95096206 • Ireland: +35 3 1242 1522 • Italy: +39 02696 33 456 • Spain: +34 91 406 90 10 • International distributors: +44 (0) 208 396 0080 Hours: • United Kingdom: 9:00 A. they can leave a voicemail message.–6:00 P. the Middle East. Eastern Time (1400–0000 GMT).com Fax: +55 11 3044 4088 Phone: LATAM (except Argentina): +55 11 3054 1010 Argentina: 0 800 444 MSTR Hours: 9:00 A. and Africa (EMEA) Asia Pacific Latin America © 2006 MicroStrategy.M.–6:00 P. The table on the following page shows where.microstrategy.com Web: https://support. Resources xxiii .M.com Fax: (703) 848–8710 Phone: (703) 848–8700 Hours: 9:00 A. Inc. Monday–Friday except holidays Europe.M. (San Paulo).com Fax: +44 (0) 208 396 0001 The European Technical Support Centre is closed on certain public holidays. and how to contact MicroStrategy Technical Support.–6:00 P. JST (Tokyo).microstrategy. Monday-Friday except holidays E-mail: apsupport@microstrategy.

national holidays. Although not a requirement. Required information when calling When contacting MicroStrategy Technical Support. e-mail addresses) • Case details: Configuration information.Preface Basic Reporting Guide Support Liaisons should contact the Technical Support Center from which they obtained their MicroStrategy software licenses or the Technical Support Center to which they have been designated. During the course of troubleshooting and researching issues. or that assume that the designated Support Liaison has a security level that permits them to fully manipulate the MicroStrategy projects and has access to potentially sensitive project data such as security filter definitions. these holidays reflect many U. we recommend you designate Support Liaisons who have permissions to be MicroStrategy project administrators. The individual Technical Support Centers are closed on certain public holidays.S. . MicroStrategy Technical Support personnel may make recommendations that require administrative privileges on the MicroStrategy projects. Inc. and Latin America. Asia Pacific. and steps taken to troubleshoot the case thus far xxiv Resources © 2006 MicroStrategy. error messages(s). including MicroStrategy software product(s) and versions Full description of the case including symptoms. In Europe. This can eliminate security conflicts and improve case resolution time. In North America. these holidays reflect the national public holidays in each country. please provide the following information: • Personal information: Name (first and last) Company and customer site (if different from company) Contact information (phone and fax numbers.

and be ready to provide it when inquiring about an existing case software version and product registration numbers of the MicroStrategy software products you are using case description: What causes the condition to occur? Does the condition occur sporadically or each time a certain action is performed? Does the condition occur on all machines or just on one? When did the condition first occur? What events took place immediately prior to the first occurrence of the condition (for example. a database move. a major database load. or a software upgrade)? If there was an error message. they should also be prepared to provide the following: • • • • street address phone number fax number e-mail address To help the Technical Support representative work to resolve the problem promptly and effectively. be prepared to provide the following additional information: • case number: Please keep a record of the number assigned to each case logged with MicroStrategy Technical Support. what was its exact wording? What steps have you taken to isolate and resolve the issue? What were the results? • • © 2006 MicroStrategy. Resources xxv . Inc.Basic Reporting Guide Preface • Business/system impact If this is the Support Liaison’s first call.

com When you provide feedback to us.com Send suggestions for product enhancements to: support@microstrategy. . Inc. RAM. and so on) network protocol used ODBC driver manufacturer and version database gateway software version (for MicroStrategy Web-related problems) browser manufacturer and version (for MicroStrategy Web-related problems) Web server manufacturer and version If the issue requires additional investigation or testing. please include the name and version of the products you are currently using. The Support Liaison may call MicroStrategy Technical Support at any time to inquire about the status of the issue. If the Technical Support representative is responsible for an action item. not all items listed below may be necessary): computer hardware specifications (processor speed. the Support Liaison and the MicroStrategy Technical Support representative should agree on certain action items to be performed. xxvi Feedback © 2006 MicroStrategy. The Support Liaison should perform any agreed-upon actions before contacting MicroStrategy Technical Support again regarding the issue. Your feedback is important to us as we prepare for future releases. Feedback Please send any comments or suggestions about user documentation for MicroStrategy products to: documents@microstrategy.Preface Basic Reporting Guide • system configuration (the information needed depends on the nature of the problem. disk space.

MicroStrategy Desktop enables project designers. Desktop has two editions: © 2006 MicroStrategy. GETTING STARTED WITH MICROSTRATEGY REPORTING Logging In and Finding Your Way Around MicroStrategy Introduction This chapter shows you how to log in and get started using MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. and system administrators to design. Inc. report designers. It gives you an opportunity to familiarize yourself with the Desktop and Web interfaces and learn some basic functionality. It brings integrated query and reporting. powerful collaborative analytics. and maintain an entire business intelligence system from a single interface. and investigative workflow to every desktop. create. MicroStrategy Desktop is a business intelligence environment designed to meet today’s sophisticated business intelligence requirements. 1 . It also describes the sample Tutorial project that comes with MicroStrategy.1 1.

• MicroStrategy Web is a user-friendly environment for interactive analysis.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide • MicroStrategy Desktop Designer is a full-featured version of MicroStrategy’s business reporting environment that enables report designers to develop complex and sophisticated reports and documents. 2 Starting MicroStrategy © 2006 MicroStrategy. this may be the same login and password you use to access your computer. To start MicroStrategy Desktop 1 From your computer’s Start menu. Depending on how your administrator set up your user account. drilling. Inc. 2 In the User Login window. MicroStrategy Analyst is a simplified version of Desktop Designer that provides functionality that lets users format and reorganize report data for easier analysis. MicroStrategy. select Programs. Desktop. A full set of data browsing. . Starting MicroStrategy Use the appropriate procedure below. enter your Login ID and Password. or it may be a MicroStrategy-specific login and password. Starting MicroStrategy Desktop You can access MicroStrategy Desktop from any computer on which Desktop has been installed. depending on whether you are starting MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. Boardroom-quality reports can be generated using a wide range of charting and formatting options. 3 Click OK. and select Desktop again. and reporting development capabilities enable stream-of-consciousness navigation.

) The Login screen appears. where you can open folders containing existing reports. enter the URL of your company’s MicroStrategy Web site. 2 Click the project you want to log in to. Depending on how your administrator set up your user account. page 4 below for steps to do this. • To explore the sample project data. the History List which contains reports you may have scheduled. The Home page appears. as well as any projects your organization may have created. see About passwords. displaying the MicroStrategy Tutorial project as well as any other projects you have permissions to access. in the Folder List select MicroStrategy Tutorial. displaying the Folder List where the MicroStrategy Tutorial project appears.Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 If you are prompted to change your password. Starting MicroStrategy Web You can access MicroStrategy Web from any computer that can run a browser. MicroStrategy Desktop opens. and other features to view and work with reports. MicroStrategy Web opens. If you are prompted to change your password. 3 Enter your User Name and Password. (To follow the examples in this guide. Starting MicroStrategy 3 . page 4 for steps to do this. see About passwords. this may be the same login and password you use to access your computer. 4 Click Login. or it may be a MicroStrategy-specific login and password. click Tutorial. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. To start MicroStrategy Web 1 In a browser.

) 2 In the Change Password dialog box. and click OK. To change your password on first login to Desktop 1 When you are prompted to change your password. Inc. . you will not be allowed to access any MicroStrategy projects until you return to this screen and change your password.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide 5 Select Shared Reports. enter your current password in the Old password field. • To explore the sample project data in MicroStrategy Tutorial. To change your password on first login to Web 1 You are prompted to change your password with the Change Password page. follow the procedure below. enter your current password in the Old password field. 3 Enter a new password in the New password and Confirm password fields. (If you click Cancel. About passwords Your administrator may have set up MicroStrategy to prompt you to change your password when you log into the software for the first time. (If you click No. If you are prompted to change your password. you will not be allowed to access any MicroStrategy projects until you return to this screen and change your password. 4 Starting MicroStrategy © 2006 MicroStrategy. click Yes.) 2 In the Change Password dialog box. The system logs you in and you can open MicroStrategy Tutorial and any other projects available to you. open any of the folders and click on any report name to run the report and see the sample data results.

Reports that are useful in more than one area are duplicated in all applicable folders. and so on. and even how you can explore some data. MicroStrategy platform capabilities. It includes sample data. The theme of the MicroStrategy Tutorial project is a retail store for the time period 2005 to 2007. certain reports within a project. such as actual customer names and items purchased. Starting MicroStrategy 5 . Inc. the ability to use specific objects on reports. 4 Your password change is confirmed. The reporting areas are grouped logically so you can see reports based on business roles.Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 3 Enter a new password in the New password and New password verification fields. sales and profitability analysis. About sample data MicroStrategy Tutorial project MicroStrategy comes with a sample project called MicroStrategy Tutorial. If you have any questions about any data you expect to be able to access but cannot. inventory and supply chain analysis. or various subject areas such as customer analysis. The system logs you into the project you selected when you first logged in. It also includes predesigned sample reports. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Security privileges The data you can view and work with may be controlled by privileges that an administrator has assigned to you. books. Click Continue. Security settings can limit your data access to specific projects. The retail store sells electronics. movies. see your MicroStrategy administrator about having your security role or privileges adjusted. and click Change Password. and music.

Enterprise Reporting Documents: This folder contains examples of different types of enterprise reporting documents. The Analytics and Data Mining folder contains examples of linear regression models built within MicroStrategy. managed metrics reports. and business reports. . brand managers. follow the steps in the section above to log in to MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. such as billing managers. Use the reports to get a better feel for platform functionality. invoices and statements. company executives. as well as a customer-level transaction detail report. MicroStrategy Platform Capabilities: This folder contains examples of the sophisticated capabilities within the MicroStrategy platform.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide The Tutorial project lets you familiarize yourself with MicroStrategy because you can run the sample reports in the Tutorial project and experience various ways to analyze data. For example. Sample analysis areas The MicroStrategy Tutorial project comes with the following groups of reports: • Business Roles: This folder contains reports for different types of business intelligence users. and operations managers. Once you have logged in. A billing manager can see data in a report called Invoice Statements by Selected Customers. The documents in this folder are a sample of the types of documents that can be built using the MicroStrategy Report Services product. • • 6 Starting MicroStrategy © 2006 MicroStrategy. Most of the reports discussed in this chapter exist in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. the Graph Styles folder contains examples of most of the graph types that can be created in MicroStrategy. Inc. you can access the reports in the Tutorial project. such as scorecards and dashboards. To access the Tutorial project. These sample reports show you how you can build and generate reports. brand managers can see a report for Brand Performance by Region. sales managers. production and operational reports. For example.

Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 • Subject Areas: This folder contains reports that cover various topics such as customer analysis. part of the MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Developer Kit (BIDK). to become familiar with a standard grid report in MicroStrategy. Inc. These reports are grouped into the following sample analysis modules covering common business analysis areas: • • • • • • Customer Analysis Module Financial Reporting Analysis Module Human Resources Analysis Module Sales Force Analysis Module Sales and Distribution Analysis Module Web Traffic Analysis Module See your MicroStrategy account executive for details on evaluating the MicroStrategy BIDK product. The BIDK provides numerous reports that have already been created. and supplier analysis. enterprise performance management. Opening a report Reports that display your business data are the focus and goal of business intelligence. human resources analysis. Reports allow you to gather business insight through data analysis. Opening a report 7 . © 2006 MicroStrategy. The results displayed in any MicroStrategy report are often a starting point for further investigation. Depending on whether you are using Desktop or Web. use the appropriate procedure below to open a sample report in the Tutorial project. sales and profitability analysis. Analytics Modules sample data This guide also relies on some sample reports and data from the MicroStrategy Analytics Modules. inventory and supply chain analysis.

The reports in this folder appear listed. expand MicroStrategy Tutorial. and expand Reports. To open a report in MicroStrategy Web 1 Follow the procedure above to log in to MicroStrategy Web (Starting MicroStrategy Web. page 2). Use the rest of this chapter to help you understand how to read a grid report. The reports in this folder appear on the right-hand side of Desktop. page 3). 3 Open the Subject Areas folder. select Shared Reports. 8 Opening a report © 2006 MicroStrategy.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide To open a report in Desktop 1 Follow the procedure above to log in to Desktop (Starting MicroStrategy Desktop. expand Public Objects. Double-click the Revenue Forecast grid report to run the report and see the sample data results. . Double-click the Category Sales Report to run the report and see the sample data results. Inc. The information you learn will help you throughout the rest of this guide. then open the Enterprise Performance Management folder. 2 In the Tutorial project. 3 Double-click the Sales and Profitability Analysis folder. Use the rest of this chapter to help you understand how to read a grid report. 2 In the Folder List on the left. The information you learn will help you throughout the rest of this guide.

© 2006 MicroStrategy.” because they represent the many important attributes of a business. MicroStrategy calls these business concepts “attributes.Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 Components of a report The image below shows a standard grid report in MicroStrategy. such as products. Rows and columns On a typical report. and so on. customers. each row represents a business concept. Inc. employees. The components of a grid report are described below. Components of a report 9 . stores.

profits. growth patterns. 10 Report types © 2006 MicroStrategy. This difference may represent a general slump in sales after the US holiday period. depending on the type of work you wish to perform. percent-to-total contributions. In the example of a report that shows sales in the Southeast. Report types You can view a MicroStrategy report from different perspectives. Inc. such as inventory. costs. . In the example of a report that shows sales in the Southeast. to attempt to counteract the forecasted revenue reduction. • Cells Each individual cell on a report contains a single value which is produced by calculating data gathered from somewhere in your organization’s data source. MicroStrategy calls these calculations “metrics.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide While the rows represent business concepts. the revenue forecast for the first quarter of the year (Q1) for your Art & Architecture books (in the first row) is much lower than the revenue forecast for the same books in Q2. sales. or some other customer behavior specific to the retail industry. In the report shown above. and so on. Metric: A calculation that shows the numbers you want to see. Southeast is the attribute. salaries. The analysis of this data might lead to a decision to prepare a sale or other special promotion on Art & Architecture books for Q1. and profit analysis. That data is the focus of business analysis in a reporting environment. such as displaying sales trends. for example. sales is the metric.” • Attribute: A business concept that provides context in which data is relevant. the columns of a typical report represent financial calculations that are important to the business. Metric calculations can show information at simple levels as well as at complex levels.

To see a report in Grid view. Inc. You display report data as a graph © 2006 MicroStrategy. Graphs A graph report is a representation of data in a visual format that can help you see overall trends easily. Grid View displays grid reports using a formatted. Report types 11 . identify medians and exceptions. and so on.Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 Grids A grid report is the most commonly used type of report. The following figure displays the Grid View of a report. from the View menu select Grid (or Grid View). cross-tabular display of the report data. Most business intelligence analysis is performed using this view.

To see a report in Graph view. There are many different graph styles you can choose from to display your report data most effectively. The grid report is generally more useful than a graph report for identifying specific numbers you may need for financial reports and so on.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide using Graph View. see in two different views. 12 Report types © 2006 MicroStrategy. in this case. from the View menu select Graph (or Graph View). Inc. Comparing these two views of the same data helps you see how a graph report can be more useful than a grid report for identifying trends. The graph report above and the grid report on the previous page are the same report. trends across certain products. The following figure displays the Graph View of a report in the bar graph style. .

) The following figure displays the Grid Graph View of a report. SQL View also includes various © 2006 MicroStrategy. SQL View SQL View displays the SQL used to generate the report. this view is called Grid and Graph View. (In MicroStrategy Web. This view provides a good way to troubleshoot and fine-tune the selection of data that is retrieved from your data source and displayed in reports. Inc. Report types 13 . from the View menu select Grid Graph (or Grid and Graph). To see a report in Grid Graph view. side by side.Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 Grid/Graphs Grid Graph View is a combination display of the Grid View and the Graph View of a report.

This guide uses reports as examples.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide execution statistics for a report. . These alternatives are described below. However. invoices that go out to customers. all kinds of management reports and dashboards. MicroStrategy also offers other ways to display data. such as the number of rows. and so on. While working in MicroStrategy Desktop or Web you might see boardroom-quality business presentations. The following figure displays the SQL View of a report. Inc. 14 Alternatives to standard reports © 2006 MicroStrategy. the time it took to execute. and so on. number of columns. Alternatives to standard reports Reports are the most common way to analyze your business data in MicroStrategy.

as shown below: The image above shows the Balanced Scorecard Strategy Map document. analyzed. Inc. Report Services documents can be viewed. A document can contain data from one or more MicroStrategy reports. Alternatives to standard reports 15 . a sample document in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. Documents allow you to display your business data in a user-friendly way that is suitable for presentation to management for boardroom-quality material. © 2006 MicroStrategy. and created in both MicroStrategy Desktop and Web. in a single display of presentation quality. Documents can appear in almost as many ways as you can imagine and are generally formatted to suit your business needs.Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 Report Services documents MicroStrategy Report Services documents (called documents) are available with the MicroStrategy Report Services product. Documents are a special type of report.

then expand the Reports folder. 4 Double-click any of the documents listed on the right-hand side of Desktop.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide To see sample documents This procedure assumes you have the MicroStrategy Report Services product. tables. Inc. images. HTML documents can include text. Report Services documents (described above) are another method. 16 Alternatives to standard reports © 2006 MicroStrategy. In addition to report results. which are a group of related reports displayed together. to execute it and see the results. 2 Expand the Public Objects folder. HTML documents An HTML document is another way to display and analyze data when you want to see multiple reports at the same time. . hyperlinks. and so on. 1 Log in to MicroStrategy Tutorial using the appropriate procedure: Starting MicroStrategy Desktop or Starting MicroStrategy Web. HTML documents are one method to create dashboards and scorecards. 3 Click the Enterprise Reporting Documents folder.

This scorecard is a useful starting point to get a general picture of customer activity and other customer-related measurements. The scorecard shown above summarizes customer information from the most general level. Alternatives to standard reports 17 . on the other hand. such as trends in lost customers based on customer longevity (tenure). © 2006 MicroStrategy. such as the top ten most profitable customers. Inc. to the most detailed level. Dashboards. You can drill into specific reports within the scorecard to perform further analysis.Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 Dashboards or scorecards are popular means of displaying and distributing data from business intelligence projects. Scorecards are typically focused on key metrics within a business area. tend to provide key metrics alongside summary information.

part of the MicroStrategy BIDK product. click the View menu. This improves performance by resulting in quicker data display within a report as users analyze and manipulate the data. A view filter dynamically limits the data being displayed on the report without re-executing the report against your data source. and Office users make use of features that slice and dice data in reports without re-executing SQL against your data source. you have access to the OLAP Services product. View filters OLAP Services provides a quick filtering method called a view filter. If Report Objects appears as an option. For details on creating view filters and using them to analyze data. Inc. to analyze data from many perspectives. 18 OLAP Services © 2006 MicroStrategy. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide The scorecard above is from the Customer Analysis Module. an OLAP Services view filter can then be applied to the report results. without taking the time a standard filtering process takes through your data source. After a report is executed (whether it has a report filter or not). View filters are similar to standard report filters. Web. Determining whether you have OLAP Services In Desktop. A standard report filter restricts the data that is retrieved from your data source. and the report filter applies to the report results every time that report is executed. View filters can be applied again and again. OLAP Services MicroStrategy OLAP Services is a MicroStrategy product that lets MicroStrategy Desktop. See Analytics Modules sample data for more information on the Analytics Modules. A standard report filter is included in a report by the report’s designer. .

Derived metrics are created based on existing metrics in the report. Printing and exporting report data Printing a report You can print a report from MicroStrategy Desktop and Web. Dynamic aggregation allows a report analyst to change the level at which a report is aggregated on the fly. © 2006 MicroStrategy. called dynamic aggregation. Dynamic aggregation occurs when report objects (such as an attribute or an attribute form) are moved from the grid to the Report objects pane. A derived metric performs a calculation on the fly with the data available in a report. Derived metrics are metrics that a report analyst can use to perform calculations using report results. Inc. without re-executing the report against the database. Printing and exporting report data 19 . Dynamic aggregation OLAP Services provides a feature that quickly recalculates report results. For details on using dynamic aggregation to analyze data. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 Derived metrics OLAP Services provides a quick calculation feature called a derived metric. metric values are dynamically recalculated at the level of the objects remaining on the grid. For details on creating derived metrics and using them to analyze data. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. while reviewing the report data. As attributes are moved between the grid and the Report objects pane.

3 On the PDF. 5 Click OK to print the report. 5 Use the options on the Print dialog box to scale the print size of the report. from the File menu choose Print. 2 On the Data menu. The report opens in Adobe Reader in PDF format.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide To print a report from MicroStrategy Desktop 1 Double-click any report to execute it. 3 Specify the scaling and orientation of the report in the PDF Options dialog box and click Export. and to specify the number of copies to print. Inc. point to Export To. The Print dialog box opens. To print a report from MicroStrategy Web 1 Click any report to execute it. from the File menu choose Print. The report opens. The PDF Options dialog box opens. 20 Printing and exporting report data © 2006 MicroStrategy. choose PDF. . 4 Use the options on the Print dialog box to scale the print size of the report. 4 On the PDF. The report opens in PDF format. and then choose PDF File. and to specify the number of copies to print. 2 From the File menu. 6 Click OK to print the report. The Print dialog box opens.

2 From the Data menu. For more information.xls) or a word processor (. Click Help for details about each setting. For more information. The available formats are different in MicroStrategy Desktop and Web. 3 Make any necessary changes to the export options. Available formats also differ depending on whether you want to export a grid report or a graph report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. To configure export settings in MicroStrategy Web 1 Open a report.Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 Exporting data In MicroStrategy Desktop and Web you can export data to different formats or applications. 2 From the File menu. you can adjust several export options that allow you to specify which report details are exported. Note the following for MicroStrategy Web: – You can modify export options in the User Preferences page. click Help in MicroStrategy Web. whether the data should be exported to PDF or another application. The Export Options dialog box opens. such as a spreadsheet (. Inc. Before you export. To configure export settings in Desktop 1 Open a report. click Help in MicroStrategy Web. Printing and exporting report data 21 . – You can modify project-wide graph settings in the User Preferences page. select Export. The Export Options page opens. select Export Options. and more.doc).

point to Export To. . 2 Choose the appropriate format in which to export the file. The report automatically displays in the selected application. The following applications or file types are supported: • • • • • • • Microsoft Access Microsoft Excel Microsoft Word An HTML file A text file E-mail PDF To export data in MicroStrategy Web 1 From the Report menu. You must execute the bulk export from MicroStrategy Web using Scheduled File 22 Printing and exporting report data © 2006 MicroStrategy. 2 Make any necessary changes to the export settings and click Export. Configuring a Bulk Export report If you have the MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server product. cannot be executed from Desktop. Click Help for details about each setting. you can save a very large report as a bulk export report and export the results to a delimited text file. choose Export.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide 3 Make any necessary changes to the export options. Inc. from the Data menu. Bulk export reports. To export data in MicroStrategy Desktop 1 Open a report and. which hold extremely large amounts of data.

refer to the MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server documentation.Basic Reporting Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting 1 Export enabled by Narrowcast Server. For more information on bulk exporting. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. Printing and exporting report data 23 .

.1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting Basic Reporting Guide 24 Printing and exporting report data © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc.

Graph Formatting. such as a business attribute or a metric calculation apply your corporate look to a report for a business presentation Using the banding option. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Banding. 25 . Renaming. as well as changing the overall display or look and feel of a report.2 2. Inc. You can: • • • • highlight important numbers put the focus on specific sets of data rename an object on the report. and More Introduction Formatting a report involves highlighting certain data to enhance analysis. Autostyles. FORMATTING A REPORT Thresholds. you can group rows or columns of report data using colors to enhance readability and make it easier to identify business concepts on which you would like to focus.

• • 26 Ideas for formatting © 2006 MicroStrategy.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide MicroStrategy’s autostyles are collections of formatting choices that can all be applied at the same time with a single click. Graph reports: You can select an appropriate style for your graph (pie. You can also reposition and resize elements such as the graph legend. You can also determine a value to display. This chapter tells you how to use autostyles and how to create and save your own. page 10 in Chapter 1. Use thresholds to have values formatted automatically. Report formatting can be performed in Grid View. Steps for all of the ideas below are in this chapter. and so on) and format the colors of series (for example. Ideas for formatting Formatting can be as fine-grained as you choose and as your needs require. bar. such as the word EMPTY. when a cell would otherwise appear empty. line. the colors of pie slices in a pie graph). (For an introduction to different views and how to access them. You can rename row and column headers so the object names are more meaningful to yourself or other analysts. Introduction to Reporting. Rows and columns in grid reports: You can hide a metric column on a report so that it does not display when the report is executed again. • Individual cells in grid reports: Format individual cells of data in a grid report when a single data value is important to call attention to or you want it to be easy and quick to locate in a large report. or it can be performed in Design View (for report designers). Inc. titles. . and axis labels. You can also apply bands of color to groups of report rows or columns. to make large quantities of data easier to analyze.) You can always click Help to find detailed steps to perform all types of formatting. see Report types. Grid View shows you the results of your changes immediately as you format the report. Gantt. 3D Surface.

Formatting a grid report 27 . © 2006 MicroStrategy. grouping it using names that make sense to report analysts. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. sorting. Data that is formatted differently calls attention to itself. for the report shown in the following figure.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 • Custom groups of attribute elements: A custom group is a special way of showing report data.000. or using subtotals on custom groups.000. such as creating. you can choose to display the group elements in either a flat or a hierarchical view. To format custom groups on a report. Inc. In a simple example. For more details on custom groups. Formatting a grid report Formatting conditional values: Thresholds Individual cell data can be automatically formatted differently than the data in the rest of the report. and makes that data easier to locate for analysis. you want to highlight the subcategories for which the revenue is greater than $1.

. Thresholds are displayed for the % Change in Revenue metric. The resulting report is shown below. 28 Formatting a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy.000.000 is highlighted. Notice that revenue greater than $1. and for the Revenue metric. The threshold is defined to automatically apply a gray background and bold font whenever values meet the threshold’s condition. The image below shows the Tutorial report named Product Sales Results By Region. Compare the example above to the example below. A threshold’s condition can be as simple or as complex as you want. Inc.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide You can achieve this by applying a threshold to the Revenue metric.

Inc. The result shows banded values color-coded according to where they fall in your 29 © 2006 MicroStrategy. use thresholds and assign different colors to different ranges among the values in the report. or replacement text. such as symbols and replacement text. once data passes the threshold. and different font colors are quickly identified. view the report in MicroStrategy Web. The data that meets the condition is considered to be data that has passed the threshold of the condition. Each of these thresholds makes analyzing large amounts of data easier because symbols are easy to locate. Thresholds highlight particular data in a report by displaying special cell formats. It is special formatting that is applied to values when certain conditions are met. In the image above. “Small increase” is defined as revenue changes between 0 and 5 percent. although all other threshold formatting. such as sales over $1 million or inventory below 50. To see threshold images you have added to a report. You set thresholds in MicroStrategy Desktop. the formatting is applied dynamically. Formatting a grid report . Values that show a medium decrease for the Revenue metric are displayed in red. with “medium decrease” defined as between -10 and 0. This allows you to classify the information into broad classes. the thresholds can be displayed in both Desktop and Web. can be viewed in Desktop. images. Threshold images are also visible if the report is placed in an HTML document or Report Services document in Desktop or Web. whenever the report is re-executed.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 When data is set up automatically to appear with special formatting depending on certain conditions. this is called conditional formatting. So thresholds are cells of data that are formatted differently from the rest of the data on a report. Threshold images cannot be viewed in Desktop. the formatting is applied. symbols. the gray diamond-shaped symbol replaces (and represents) all values that represent a small increase in revenue from the previous year. Threshold formatting ideas To create a report that looks like a scorecard. The yellow diamond-shaped symbol represents a medium decrease in revenue from the previous year.

size. Inc. . page 66 in Chapter 3. Before you create a new threshold. Analyzing Data. you must decide the following: 30 Formatting a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. selected from a predefined list of symbols.) With thresholds you can do the following: • Define an unlimited number of conditions for each metric calculation on the report. and color Cell background color (fill) Alignment Number format Borders and patterns • Replace the cell value with any text you want for each cell value that meets the condition specified. Each condition can have a simple or complex expression.” Replace the cell value with an image when the condition is true. Replace the cell value with a symbol. You can also set symbols to be toggled back and forth between the symbol and the underlying value. see Sorting data. Define the following formatting properties for the cells that meet the threshold condition: Font type. (For steps to sort data.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide chosen number ranges. Creating and applying a threshold Thresholds are applied to metric values in report cells. • • • MicroStrategy comes with several default thresholds. you can replace all values where Dollar Sales is greater than $5000 with the text “Exceeded Sales. For example. style. Sort the column by value and your colors will be grouped appropriately. You can apply thresholds to any of the metrics that are part of the report definition.

You can access the Threshold dialog box in the following ways: • • From the Data menu. For example. This means the condition causing the threshold to appear in the last column is based on whatever values appear in the first and second columns. Inc. or employee resource numbers that drop below a particular number. as shown below: • Formatting: What do you want to be displayed on your report when the condition is met? Common examples include displaying important numbers in red. or displaying a red stop sign or a green traffic light in place of certain data. Right-click the appropriate metric and select Thresholds. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Once you have made the decisions above. revenue that falls below a certain percentage.(minus) threshold to highlight when the month-to-month trend is positive or negative. you can create a threshold using the Threshold dialog box. or in white font with a red background. in the following report. select Thresholds. The month-to-month trend is determined by comparing the first and second columns. Formatting a grid report 31 . You can use attributes or other metrics on the report to define a threshold’s condition.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 • Condition: What is the condition the metric values must meet to have the threshold formatting applied? Common examples of a threshold’s condition include sales that exceed a certain amount. the Trend Lead Conversion column includes a green + (plus) or red .

2

Formatting a Report

Basic Reporting Guide

Click Thresholds on the toolbar.

To create and apply a threshold

1 Open a grid report. For steps to open a report, see Opening a report, page 7 in Chapter 1, Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 2 From the Data menu, select Thresholds. 3 Click on New Threshold in the Threshold List, and name your new threshold. The Threshold List displays any thresholds that are already defined for the report. You can select any existing threshold to modify, or click Add to create a new threshold. 4 In the Condition Definition pane, you define what the condition is that the value must meet to have the threshold formatting applied. Click Click here to start a new qualification. The parts of the condition appear, each of which must be defined: • • • Click Field first, to select the business attribute or metric calculation that is part of your condition. Click Operator to select an operator, such as In List, Not in List, or Where. Click Value to specify the elements from the available list.

5 Next you define the formatting you want displayed for cell values that meet the condition you have defined above. First, select one of the following from the Format Definition drop-down list: • Format: Select this to change fonts, colors, styles, sizes, and so on. This formats the values that meet your threshold condition. Replace Text: Select this to have your own text appear. This replaces the value that meets your threshold condition with text. Type the text in the
© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

32 Formatting a grid report

Basic Reporting Guide

Formatting a Report

2

empty text field. The text should be limited to 255 characters. • Image: Select this to replace the value that meets your threshold condition with an image file. Threshold images cannot be viewed in Desktop. To see threshold images you have added to a report, view the report in MicroStrategy Web. Threshold images are also visible if the report is placed in an HTML document or Report Services document. • Quick Symbol: Select this to replace the value that meets your threshold condition with a symbol.

6 Depending on your selection in the step above, define the following: • Format or Replace Text: If you selected Format or Replace Text above, click Cell Formatting to define the number format, font for the text or data, alignment within the cell, cell border, and cell pattern for the formatting option you have chosen from the Format Definition drop-down list. Image: If you selected Image above, define a Picture location for where your image is stored, and then browse to locate the Source of the image you want to use. Quick Symbol: If you selected Quick Symbol above, select a symbol from the drop-down list, and then click Cell Formatting to define the alignment, size and color (font), cell border, cell background, and cell pattern for the symbol you have chosen from the Quick Symbol drop-down list.

7 Select the options in the Subtotal Option section to specify whether the threshold should be applied to the metric, any subtotals that may be on the report, or both: • • • Metric Only: Applies the threshold condition only on metric values. Metric And Subtotals: Applies the threshold condition on metric and subtotal values. Subtotals Only: Applies the threshold condition only on the subtotal values.
Formatting a grid report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

33

2

Formatting a Report

Basic Reporting Guide

8 If you chose Quick Symbol earlier in this procedure, select the Allow toggle threshold check box if you want to allow other analysts to switch between the metric value and the symbol that you have specified for the threshold value. Users can toggle between the symbol and value using the F12 function key or by selecting Hide Threshold or Show Threshold from the Data menu. 9 Click OK to save your new threshold definition. In MicroStrategy Web, you can show or hide thresholds by selecting Thresholds from the Grid toolbar.

Formatting null values and blank cells
An empty cell of data on a grid report represents a null value. A null value is an unknown value, because it can be the result of an empty area of your data source, or the result of the calculations and cross-tabbing that are sometimes performed on a grid report. For example, a null value in your data source can occur if a customer omits his birth date or another piece of personal information. If your data source does not contain data in a particular field and you pivot the rows and columns on the resulting report, the resultant cross-tabbing may produce a null value. You can replace null values with a specific value, such as a zero or the word NULL, so that blank cells do not appear on a report. The replacement can be for the final report display only, or for the calculation of the report data. Replacements do not change any values in your data source. Null value replacements cannot be specified in MicroStrategy Web. MicroStrategy Web displays null values in the format designated for the report in Desktop.
To replace a null value with a specific value

1 Open a grid report. For steps to open a report, see Opening a report, page 7 in Chapter 1, Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting.

34 Formatting a grid report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Formatting a Report

2

2 From the Data menu, select Report Data Options. 3 Expand the Display category and select the Null Values subcategory. 4 To replace a null value for the final report display only, enter the replacement value (such as a zero) in the Null Value Settings area for any of the situations listed: • • • An empty value is retrieved from your data source. An empty value is calculated in the cross-tabulation process. An empty value appears when the report is sorted.

5 To replace a null value during the calculation of report data, enter the replacement value in the Aggregation Null Values box. 6 Click OK.

Renaming row and column headers
You can give a report’s row and column headers meaningful names by renaming them. By creating an alias for an object on a report, the object can be displayed on that report with a different name, without changing its name in the MicroStrategy project. For example, a report has one metric named Sum of Revenue of Web Sales, and another metric named Sum of Revenue of Non-Web Sales. You might rename the first metric as Internet Revenue, and the second metric as Main Street Revenue, so your business audience can more easily understand what the values mean. You can rename any business attribute (usually a row header) or metric calculation (usually a column header) on the report grid. This feature, called aliasing, lets you name an object on a report something that makes sense to you, within the context of a given report.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Formatting a grid report

35

2

Formatting a Report

Basic Reporting Guide

This alias feature is for report display purposes only. Creating aliases with this feature does not change object names as they appear in the project, as they are stored in the MicroStrategy object repository (metadata), or as they are stored in your data source. The alias feature also allows you to display descriptive information about an object on a report and edit the description that exists. You can use this to make object descriptions more meaningful for other users who will view this report. The following is a list of the objects you can rename on a report: • Attribute: A business concept, such as Product, Employee, Month, Region, and so on. Attributes commonly appear in the rows of a grid report. Metric: A business measure or key performance indicator, such as Revenue, Profit, Employee Headcount, or Probability of Purchase. Metrics commonly appear in the columns of a grid report. Consolidation: A selected group of attribute elements used just like an attribute on a report. For example, suppose you want to see each season of the year as a separate row on a report, but Season does not exist as an attribute in your project. A consolidation allows you to group together the elements of the Month of Year attribute into various seasons and place them on the report. In this example, the consolidation will contain four consolidation elements, one for each season. Consolidations are covered in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Custom group: A special filter for report data. Custom groups are covered in more detail in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.

Creating an alias
You can create an alias by renaming a row or column header. Use the appropriate procedure below, depending on whether you are using MicroStrategy Desktop or Web.

36 Formatting a grid report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Formatting a Report

2

To alias an object name in MicroStrategy Desktop

1 Open a grid report. For steps to open a report, see Opening a report, page 7 in Chapter 1, Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 2 If the Formula toolbar is not displayed, from the View menu, point to Toolbar, then choose Formula. 3 Click the column or row heading of the object on the report that you want to rename. The name of the selected heading is displayed above the report on the Formula toolbar. Derived metric: If you have MicroStrategy OLAP Services (see OLAP Services, page 18), you may have a derived metric on the report. If you click on a data cell of a derived metric, you can change the syntax of the derived metric formula in the formula box. 4 Type in the new name for the object. 5 Click the green checkmark (also called Validate and apply) and save the new name.
To alias an object name in MicroStrategy Web

1 Open a grid report. For steps to open a report, see Opening a report, page 7 in Chapter 1, Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 2 From the Data menu, choose Rename/Edit Objects. The Rename/Edit Objects dialog box (DHTML) or panel (HTML) is displayed. 3 Select the object to rename from the Object drop-down list. Derived metric: If you have MicroStrategy OLAP Services (see OLAP Services, page 18), you may have a derived metric on the report. If you click on

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Formatting a grid report

37

2

Formatting a Report

Basic Reporting Guide

a data cell of a derived metric, you can change the syntax of the derived metric formula in the formula box. 4 Type the new name for the object and click OK to save your changes.

Determining whether aliases are used on a report
You can review any report to determine whether a column or row header is an alias or shows the original column or row name that comes from your MicroStrategy project.
To determine whether an alias is used on a report

1 If you have not already done so, open a grid report. For steps to open a report, see Opening a report, page 7 in Chapter 1, Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 2 From the Data menu, select Report Data Options. The Report Data Options dialog box opens. 3 Expand the Display category, and select Alias. Compare the Object name with any Alias name that appears.

Switching from aliases to original names
You can change all row and column names from their alias to their original name. Use the appropriate procedure below, depending on whether you are using MicroStrategy Desktop or Web.
To quickly reset all names in Desktop

1 If you have not already done so, open a grid report. For steps to open a report, see Opening a report, page 7 in Chapter 1, Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting.
38 Formatting a grid report
© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Formatting a Report

2

2 From the Data menu, select Report Data Options. 3 Expand the Display category. In the Alias subcategory, all aliases are listed. 4 Click Reset All to change all column and row headers back to their original names. 5 Click OK.
To quickly reset all names in MicroStrategy Web

1 Open a grid report. For steps to open a report, see Opening a report, page 7 in Chapter 1, Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 2 From the Data menu, select Reset Data.

Expanding or collapsing attribute element groupings
A custom group is a special way of showing report data by grouping attribute elements using names that make sense to report analysts. For example, if an attribute on a report is City, the elements of that attribute might be San Francisco, Washington DC, Atlanta, and New York. A report designer might use this set of attribute elements to create a custom group made up of bands (subgroups) called Top Cities, Average Cities, and Bottom Cities, based on sales numbers for a given month. The report designer can place the custom group on a report to show those bands or subgroupings on the report rather than just listing all the cities individually. If you see a custom group on a report, you may be able to choose to display the group elements in either a flat or a hierarchical view. A hierarchical view displays each custom group element as a set of smaller groups, which can be repeatedly expanded until the actual attribute elements are displayed. The hierarchical view preserves the larger and smaller groupings so you can

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Formatting a grid report

39

2

Formatting a Report

Basic Reporting Guide

see how individual elements of the custom group have been organized. The image below shows custom groups on a report in an expanded hierarchical view.

A flat view simply lists all elements of the custom group in a single, flat list with no indentation. The same report above is shown in the image below with a flattened view.

Custom groups cannot be formatted in MicroStrategy Web.

40 Formatting a grid report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Hiding a metric column You can hide a metric object (usually a column) on a grid report. select Flatten or Hierarchical. Use the appropriate procedure below to hide a metric column. For steps to open a report. see OLAP Services. yet that metric’s data will still be included in any subtotals and grand totals you might have displayed.) © 2006 MicroStrategy. Depending on whether you have MicroStrategy OLAP Services. 2 From the Data menu. select Report Data Options. page 7 in Chapter 1. page 18. you can hide any metric column by simply dragging it off the grid report into the Report Objects pane to the left of your report. 3 Expand the Display category and select the Object Display subcategory. To determine whether you have OLAP Services. the procedure is different to hide a metric column. the custom group must have hierarchical display enabled when it is created. With OLAP Services If you have the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product. From the drop-down list. from the View menu select Report Objects.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 To format the display of a custom group For a custom group to display hierarchically. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. (If you do not see the Report Objects pane and you have OLAP Services. see Opening a report. Inc. Formatting a grid report 41 . Any custom groups on the report are listed here. 1 Open a grid report. 4 Click in the Display column next to the custom group you want to format. 5 Click OK.

choose the period (which is the aliased name of the metric you want to hide. see Opening a report. 3 Expand the Display category. 9 From the Select from the list drop-down list. click in the Alias column next to the metric you want to hide.) 10 In the Pixels field. 7 From the Grid menu. 2 From the Data menu. 42 Formatting a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. . page 7 in Chapter 1.’ (period). 8 On the Columns and Rows tab. select Report Data Options. 5 Enter a ‘.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide Without OLAP Services To hide a metric column on a report 1 Open a grid report. 4 In the Alias subcategory. in the Columns area. as shown in the image below. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. select Fixed. For steps to open a report. select Options. Inc. enter 0 (zero). 6 Click OK. The Report Data Options dialog box is displayed.

When you run the report. As shown in the image below. because the large amounts of data are broken up into visual groups. the font size of the existing metric name forces the metric header to expand beyond zero and display the metric.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 11 Click OK. You can band based on the number of rows or columns (for example. If you only format the column width to 0 pixels and do not create an alias for the metric. then applying alternating colors to sets of values). Formatting groups of report rows or columns: Banding You can color groups of report rows or columns so that they form bands of data that are easy to locate and analyze. If you need to keep track of values that mean different things in different columns (for example. You can band rows or columns in several ways. Formatting a grid report 43 . the metric you chose in the procedure above is now hidden and does not appear on the report. You can also band based on the row and column headers (for example. dollars in one column and inventory quantities in another column). banding based on column headers helps keep financial numbers from getting confused with unit counts. banding can help an analyst avoid making the mistake of reading the wrong number. Banding is a method of organizing or grouping data values in a grid report according to certain criteria. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. Banding can also make it easier to make sense of a very large report. alternating color every 5 rows). sorting the Units Sold column in order.

such that all Revenue columns appear with one color and all Units Sold columns appear with another color. Inc.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide For example. for the report shown below. 44 Formatting a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. you want to band the columns according to Revenue and Units Sold. .

The autostyle of a report provides the report’s default banding options. see Autostyles. and you select the banding colors. However. The procedure is below.) You can perform more complex banding of report data. © 2006 MicroStrategy. you choose to band by columns. Inc. the report appears as shown below. see the chapters on Custom Groups and Consolidations as well as Reports in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. For details. After applying the banding.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 To do this. (For information on autostyles. page 62. Formatting a grid report 45 . you can enable or disable the display of banding on a report in Web. but you can define custom banding or even turn off banding for a report. based on custom grouping of attribute elements and other banding conditions. You cannot create banding formatting in MicroStrategy Web. regardless of its autostyle.

you select the banding criteria By column header and select the banding color. To enable or disable banding in MicroStrategy Web 1 Open a grid report. select Custom banding. see Opening a report. . 6 Click OK. For details on each option in the dialog box. click Help. 4 Click Settings. For steps to open a report. 3 On the General tab. page 7 in Chapter 1. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. To turn off banding in Desktop 1 Open the banded report. page 7 in Chapter 1. The Banding Settings dialog box is displayed. 2 From the Grid menu. choose Options. page 7 in Chapter 1. select Options. see Opening a report.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide To create custom banding in Desktop 1 Open a grid report. see Opening a report. 5 Set the banding options as desired. The Grid Options dialog box is displayed. For steps to open a report. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. For steps to open a report. In the example above. 2 From the Grid menu. 3 Select No Banding and click OK. 46 Formatting a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. to band by columns. Inc. Then click OK again to close the Grid Options dialog box. The Grid Options dialog box is displayed.

you can also make report borders disappear. © 2006 MicroStrategy. heavier or lighter line weights. and even apply colors to report borders. to create a more “open” feel and make the data look less overwhelming. if you have a report that presents a lot of data along with several subtotals and totals. It may be more aesthetically pleasing to see the data printed with the outside lines of the report gone. if you wish. You can apply dotted or dashed lines. Formatting a grid report 47 . or totaled data stand out more clearly. you can also make important. bolded.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 2 From the Grid Options dialog box (DHTML) or the Format menu (HTML). For example. Formatting report borders You can apply special formatting to the outside borders of a grid report. By removing the outside border of a report. Inc. the report may appear looking almost like a spreadsheet. The custom formatting you apply is visible when the report is printed. select or clear the Show Banding option.

the same color as the cell borders: 48 Formatting a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. . Inc. which are pale gray.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide The following image shows the Regional Sales Management report in the Tutorial project with its default report borders.

2 In the top left-hand corner of the grid report. see Opening a report. For steps to open a report. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. © 2006 MicroStrategy. The data looks less crowded.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 The next image shows the same report with the report’s borders removed. Inc. The Format Cells dialog box opens. Formatting a grid report 49 . then select Grid Borders. and the important data at the bottom of the report is emphasized: To format report borders in Desktop 1 Open a grid report. right-click in the empty area and select Formatting. page 7 in Chapter 1.

4 If you chose to add a border. 50 Formatting a combined grid and graph report © 2006 MicroStrategy. . such as solid or dashed. It is replaced with the Thin line style. You can determine the size and position of the grid (and. from the report’s File menu select Print Preview. Formatting a combined grid and graph report Grid Graph view displays a report as both a cross-tabbed grid report and a graph report in the same screen. This formatting option is not available in MicroStrategy Web. The Hair line style cannot be displayed in reports viewed in MicroStrategy Web. in consequence. To view a report in Grid Graph view. The Outline icon on the right automatically adds a border around the outside of the report. If you want appearance to be consistent between Desktop and Web report display. and then select a Color. 5 Click on a line in the Border area and you can see your selections appear on the sample page in the Border area. 7 Some border effects can be seen well in Desktop. while others are more clearly seen in Print Preview mode. consider a line style other than Hair. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide 3 Select one of the Preset icons. The None icon on the left removes all borders from the report. the size and position of the graph) in Grid Graph view. Inc. To view your border settings. select the type of line Style you want. see Grid/Graphs. 6 Click OK to save your changes. page 13 in Chapter 1.

Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 2 From the View menu. the grid is displayed on top of the graph. For steps to open a report. select Grid Graph View. Grid Percentage specifies how much space the grid occupies in the display area. If Grid Position is set to Left or Right. while Left displays the grid to the left of the graph. Formatting a combined grid and graph report 51 . you cannot set the Minimum Grid Percentage higher than 25. if you set the position to Top. • © 2006 MicroStrategy. If Grid Position is set to Top or Bottom. For example. Grid Percentage and Minimum Grid Percentage interact to determine the size of the grid. page 7 in Chapter 1. if this option is set to 75.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 To format Grid Graph view 1 Open a report. Inc. select Report Data Options. Grid Percentage represents the height percentage. 4 Expand the Display category and select the Grid Graph Mode subcategory. 3 From the Data menu. the grid occupies 75% of the report display area while the graph is resized to fit in the remaining 25%. • Minimum Grid Percentage is the minimum space that the grid can occupy. Grid Percentage is the width percentage. For example. For example. 6 Click OK. see Opening a report. The Report Data Options dialog box opens. 5 Adjust any of the following settings for the grid report: • Grid Position determines where the grid is placed in relation to the graph. if Grid Percentage is set to 25.

. For a discussion of the graph styles available in MicroStrategy and when to use each style. you can open any report that was saved as a graph report. a pie graph. 2 From the View menu. see Opening a report. graph legend. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 52 Formatting a graph report © 2006 MicroStrategy. or a scatter graph) the size and location of the graph. titles. using the procedure below. see the Graphing chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a graph report You can format a graph report’s appearance in many ways. You can also convert almost any grid report to a graph report. To view a graph report in Desktop or MicroStrategy Web 1 Open a grid report. select Graph View (in Desktop) or Graph (in MicroStrategy Web). a bar graph. For steps to apply specific graphing options. click Help. the color of the pie slices on a pie graph) The following sections provide information and examples of different ways you can format your graph report. Viewing a graph report To view a graph report. including the following: • • • the style of the graph (for example. page 7 in Chapter 1. and axis labels the color of different sections of the graph (for example. For steps to open a report. Inc.

The style you choose must be compatible with the data you want to display. Inc. appears in relation to the axes on the graph report. and so on). The non-numerical data within a grid report. When a grid report is converted to graph format. lines. since it suits most sets of data. For example. page 53. consider the data requirements for the following graph styles: © 2006 MicroStrategy. you can determine values for that graph element. Select a bar graph style. Formatting a graph report 53 . bubbles. For information on selecting other graph styles. such as attribute names and metric names (the row and column headers). By seeing where a graph element. The axes on a graph are used as reference for the report data (the points. lines. you are prompted to select a graph style. are represented as the axes on the graph. or circles). you can think of the values within the grid cells as giving shape to the graph. such as a bar or bubble. Understanding a graph report A graph report represents a grid report’s numerical data values with the graphical elements within the graph (for example. while the column and row headings become the graph’s axes. see Choosing a graph style. by viewing all the graph elements together. Reports saved in Graph view automatically appear in Graph view when executed. Additionally. you can often more easily see overall trends in your data than is otherwise possible in a grid report.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 3 If this is the first time you are viewing this report in Graph view. Choosing a graph style You can display your report graph in a variety of graph styles. You can also select Grid Graph view to see both the report grid and its corresponding graph side-by-side. bubbles. points. bars. bars.

• • For complete details on the requirements and recommendations for each graph style available in MicroStrategy. .2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide • An area graph or a bar graph require only a minimum of one metric and one attribute to be included in the report. A scatter graph requires at least 2 metrics in the report to display the graph style properly. 54 Formatting a graph report © 2006 MicroStrategy. to display data properly within that style. A bubble graph requires at least 3 metrics to be a useful graph style to choose. as shown in the image below. Inc. Graph style examples You may wish to display your grid report data in a pie graph format. see the Graphing chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.

Use the appropriate procedure below. To learn about how the placement of report objects determines which graph styles you can use. Formatting a graph report 55 . depending on whether you are working in MicroStrategy Desktop or Web. These requirements are listed in the Graphing chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. you must consider two important issues: • The structure and amount of data on your report affect your decision because some graph styles cannot be displayed unless a certain number of attributes or metrics appear on the report grid. see the Graphing chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. The position of report objects on your report grid also determines whether a graph can be generated in a certain graph style. Inc. When selecting a graph style to view your data. as shown below. © 2006 MicroStrategy.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 You might then want to see the same data in a Polar graph style. • Changing a graph’s style Perform the following steps to modify the graph style.

Changing the color scheme of a graph You can modify the colors of certain elements on your graph. For information about the minimum requirements for each graph style. For information about the minimum requirements for each graph style. To change a graph style in MicroStrategy Web 1 Open a report in either Graph or Grid and Graph view. see Opening a report.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide To change a graph style in Desktop 1 Open a report in either Graph or Grid Graph view. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. the pie pieces on your pie graph or the individual bars in your bar graph. . Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. If an error message is displayed that notifies you that there is insufficient data on your graph to generate the graph in the selected style. for example. select a graph style to use with the graph. The graph is updated with the new style. For steps to open a report. 56 Formatting a graph report © 2006 MicroStrategy. see the Graphing chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Choose another graph style for the graph. page 7 in Chapter 1. If an error message is displayed that notifies you that there is insufficient data on your graph to generate the graph in the selected style. The graph is updated with the new style. see Opening a report. Choose another graph style for the graph. For steps to open a report. select a new graph style to use. click Cancel. Inc. page 7 in Chapter 1. 2 From the Gallery menu. click Cancel. see the Graphing chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. 2 From the Formatting toolbar.

as described in the following procedure. click Help at the top of any MicroStrategy Web page. 3 Select a color scheme from the Color Palette icon on the Graph toolbar. see Opening a report. and then selecting Graph. In general: • Categories: are groups of data usually found on the X-axis of a graph report usually correspond to the rows of a grid report usually represent attributes • Series: are groups of data usually found on the Y-axis of a graph report usually correspond to the columns of a grid report are explained in the legend of a graph report usually represent metrics You can change the colors of the series in a graph by selecting a color scheme from the Color Palette in the Graph toolbar. Formatting a graph report 57 .Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 In graphing terms. For steps to open a report. the pieces of a graph element (for example. Inc. The series are described in a graph report’s legend. page 7 in Chapter 1. the pie slices of a pie graph or the individual bars in a bar graph) are referred to as the graph’s series. © 2006 MicroStrategy. To modify colors on a graph report in MicroStrategy Web. The colors of the graph’s series are changed accordingly. To modify the colors of series on your graph in Desktop 1 Open a report in either Graph or Grid Graph view. 2 Ensure that the Graph toolbar is enabled by selecting Toolbar from the View menu. The groups of data along the X-axis are called categories. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting.

) Taking another look at your graph. gradients. For steps to manually resize objects in your graph. • For examples of how to manually resize and reposition objects on a graph. Suppose you format the series colors (pie pieces) of your pie graph by selecting the Citrus color style from the Color Palette in the Graph toolbar. Moving and resizing graph objects In MicroStrategy Desktop. you can manually resize or reposition graph elements. and other options. Undoing and redoing graph manipulations Creating an attractive and easily understandable graph usually means you have to try different combinations of fonts. see Changing the color scheme of a graph. subtitles. you must be granted the necessary Web Professional privilege. For more information. including the graph legend. You can use these handles to manually resize the object. colors. . see the Desktop online help. you decide you do not like 58 Formatting a graph report © 2006 MicroStrategy. (To change the colors of series in a graph.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide To format the series colors of a graph in MicroStrategy Web. contact your administrator. and the graph itself. Inc. page 56. title. handles are displayed around the object. refer to the Graphing chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. (See the “Resizing a graph report” topic. Moving: You can relocate the selected object by clicking in the middle of it and dragging it to another location on the graph.) You cannot manually resize or reposition a graph from MicroStrategy Web. • Resizing: When you select any of the objects described above.

© 2006 MicroStrategy. A list of the most recent manipulations is displayed. Formatting a graph report 59 . you want to change back to the Citrus color style). For steps to open a report. If you decide later that you did not want to undo an action (for example. 2 If you have not already made any changes in the graph. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. Inc. Click the action you want to undo. you can use the Redo function on the report’s Edit menu to quickly reapply that formatting choice. see Opening a report. 4 If you have made several changes to the graph report and you want to undo more than the most recent change. Undoing a change in a graph report The following procedures describe how to undo a graph manipulation. on the Edit toolbar. 3 From the Edit menu. select Undo. You also undo any actions that appear above it in the list. To undo a graph manipulation in Desktop 1 Open a report in Graph or Grid Graph view. page 7 in Chapter 1. The Undo function on the report’s Edit menu allows you to easily reverse formatting choices such as these. The most recent manipulation is reversed. do so now. The Undo and Redo functions work similarly to the corresponding commands in Windows. You can use any of the procedures in this chapter to make one or more formatting changes to the graph.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 the change and want to revert to the pie graph’s original colors. click the arrow next to Undo.

4 If you have made several changes to the graph report and you want to undo more than the most recent change. select the Undo icon. Redoing a change in a graph report If you decide that you did not want to undo a manipulation. Inc. select Redo. do so now. A list of the most recent manipulations is displayed. To redo a graph manipulation in Desktop 1 Open a report in Graph view.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide To undo a graph manipulation in MicroStrategy Web 1 Open a report in Graph or Grid and Graph view. page 7 in Chapter 1. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. For steps to open a report. 60 Formatting a graph report © 2006 MicroStrategy. For steps to open a report. Click the action you want to undo. you can redo it using the following steps. 3 From the Standard toolbar. You also undo any actions that appear above it in the list. 3 From the Edit menu. see Opening a report. You can use any of the procedures in this chapter to make one or more formatting changes to the graph. see Opening a report. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 2 If you have not already made any changes in the graph. . The most recent manipulation is reversed. click the arrow next to Undo. use the procedure above to make changes and then undo one or more of them. 2 If you have not already made changes to the graph report and selected Undo. The most recent "undo" action is reversed. page 7 in Chapter 1. on the Standard toolbar.

click the arrow next to Redo. see Opening a report.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 4 If you have undone several changes to the graph report and you want to reverse more than the most recent undo. Metric data formatting also depends on several other factors. on the Edit toolbar. The most recent manipulation is reversed. When you redo an action. To see the possible scenarios for metric formatting with grid and graph image examples. click the arrow next to Redo. A list of the most recent "undo" actions is displayed. You can also see the online help (the “Formatting metrics on a report” topic) for complete details on other factors that can affect number formatting in a report. Inc. Formatting metric data in a report Metrics on a report can have formatting applied to the metric data independently of any overall report formatting. select the Redo icon. on the Standard toolbar. 4 If you have undone several changes to the graph report and you want to reverse more than the most recent undo. use the procedure above to make changes and then undo one or more of them. Click the action to redo. you also redo all actions above it in the list. A list of the most recent "undo" actions is displayed. © 2006 MicroStrategy. you also redo all actions that appear above it in the list. For steps to open a report. 2 If you have not already made changes to the graph report and selected Undo. The metric data displayed on a report is shown with the formatting from the actual metric that is placed on the report when the report is designed. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. Formatting a graph report 61 . When you redo an action. page 7 in Chapter 1. see the Graphing chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. To redo a graph manipulation in MicroStrategy Web 1 Open a report in Graph view. Click the action to redo. 3 From the Standard toolbar.

font style. see MicroStrategy Tutorial project. in MicroStrategy Desktop and Web. Each autostyle automatically applies a set of formatting that includes color scheme. For example. Explore the available autostyles by opening a grid report in the Tutorial project and selecting any of the available autostyles. see Opening a report. the default autostyle used for all reports is called Corporate. Inc. . 2 From the Grid menu. page 5. 62 Autostyles © 2006 MicroStrategy. For steps to open a report. These are called autostyles. point to Autostyle Selected and choose an autostyle from the available list. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide Autostyles MicroStrategy comes with several presentation styles for displaying reports. Applying an autostyle To apply an autostyle in Desktop 1 Open a grid report. as shown in the image below: Autostyles let you standardize formatting across many reports. page 7 in Chapter 1. For information to locate reports in the Tutorial project. and font type to a report. which includes a gray background and dark blue font color.

select an autostyle from the drop-down list. For steps to open a report. see Opening a report. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 3 On the report’s Grid menu.Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a Report 2 To apply an autostyle in MicroStrategy Web 1 Open a grid report. and change the report’s borders. © 2006 MicroStrategy. select Save Autostyle As. page 7 in Chapter 1. The name should be descriptive so you or other users can be aware of what formatting changes it will make when applied to a report. For example. For steps to open a report. 4 Specify a name for the new autostyle in the Save Autostyle As dialog box. using any of the procedures in this chapter or the online help. autostyles created in Desktop are available to be applied to reports in Web. 2 From the Grid toolbar. so you can easily repeat your favorite styles on later reports. The Save Autostyle As dialog box opens. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. Inc. 2 Format the report as desired. Creating a new autostyle You can save your favorite formatting settings as an autostyle. Although you cannot create new autostyles in MicroStrategy Web. apply a banding color scheme to the columns or rows of the report. Autostyles 63 . To create and save an Autostyle in Desktop 1 Open a grid report. see Opening a report. page 7 in Chapter 1.

you can view the autostyle you created in the list of available autostyles. it appears only in your autostyle drop-down list and is not available to other users. . This is determined by the location where you save the object: • To save an autostyle so that other users can also use the autostyle to apply formatting to their reports.2 Formatting a Report Basic Reporting Guide 5 You can save objects in MicroStrategy so that only you can see and use them. changing properties in the default autostyles. To save an autostyle so that only you can use it. save the autostyle in the My Personal Objects\My Objects folder. save the autostyle in the Public Objects\Autostyles folder. refer to the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. 64 Autostyles © 2006 MicroStrategy. • The next time you open a report. Inc. and so on. For information on creating autostyles for a broad number of reports. If you save an autostyle in this folder. or so that all other users can see and use them.

Report limits: See Specifying maximum and minimum values: Report limits. Inc. it can be difficult to easily understand what the data is telling you. Several MicroStrategy tools can help you analyze large amounts of data more quickly. Calculations. page 86. page 72. Outline mode: See Summary/detail of data. Page-by: See Grouping data by page. page 83. page 79. . page 66. 65 © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 70. ANALYZING DATA Grouping and Pivoting. The following analysis tools are available in MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web: • • • • • • • Sorting: See Sorting data. and Finding Values Introduction When reports return large amounts of data. Finding values in a report: See Finding values. page 89. Outlines. Metric join type: See Determining how metric data is combined: Metric join types.3 3. Pivoting: See Pivoting data.

Consider the following sorting techniques: • • Move the most important data up to the top of the report where you can see it easily. Each analysis tool is discussed in detail in this chapter. Sorting lets you move data so you can analyze that data more effectively.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide • • Evaluation order: See Evaluation order of calculations. . you are looking at a report that shows income ranges for your customers. Inc. The report lists all income brackets for customers in every region in the United States. Sorting data You can reorganize how data is displayed on your report by sorting the data. (The rest of the report that is not included here shows the rest of the regions in the United States.) This image shows 66 Sorting data © 2006 MicroStrategy. For example. page 100. The image below shows just the top half of this lengthy report. Subtotals: See Subtotals. Group particular chunks of data together so you can more easily compare the data. page 95.

Inc.000. © 2006 MicroStrategy. you must scroll up and down the data to gather the numbers you need. and with the report as it appears now. as shown in the far left column in the report. The default sort order focuses on geographical regions.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 the default sort order for this report. risking missing a number or accidentally looking at the wrong number. But you want to analyze only the income bracket revenue over $80. Sorting data 67 .

Region and Income Bracket are attributes and are in the rows of the report. 68 Sorting data © 2006 MicroStrategy. for example. Row headers are typically business attributes. or lowest to highest. You can sort on any column or row that is on a grid report. in the report above.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide If you sort the Income Bracket column in descending order. When you sort. Descending sort order arranges the data in reverse alphabetic order. you can instantly see the higher income brackets you are interested in. the focus of the report is now on income bracket rather than geographical region. in the report above. as shown in the image below. With the new sort order. Revenue is a metric that is in the columns of the report. you determine the sorting order. such as from 10 to 1. grouped together for clarity and easier comparison. or highest to lowest. Column headers are typically business calculations called metrics. for example. Inc. such as from 1 to 10. You sort data based on a row header or column header. either ascending or descending: • • Ascending sort order arranges the data alphabetically. from Z to A. . Attributes and metrics are the most common objects on a report. from A to Z.

A quick sort allows you to experiment with different sort orders for your data. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. Inc. page 7 in Chapter 1. select Sort Buttons. Quick sort You can quickly sort the data in a column or row. select Toolbars. layered sorting patterns. For information on sorting custom groups.) MicroStrategy Web: You can right-click on the column or row. For information on more complex. (To see the sort icons. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Sorting data 69 . see Opening a report. in either ascending or descending order.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 Sorting is processed by the MicroStrategy Analytical Engine. (To see the sort icons. There are various ways to trigger a quick sort. or use the sort icons on the Data toolbar. then select Data. including using the right-click menu or using the sort icons: • Desktop: You can right-click on the column or row. For steps to open a report. To perform a quick sort 1 Open a grid report.) • The procedure below describes the right-click sort method. see Advanced Sorting in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. This guide discusses only quick sorting. from the View menu. which means you can sort and organize the data on a report without taking up the time and resources to re-execute the report against your data source. so you can determine which sort order displays the data in the most useful way. from the View menu. or use the sort icon in each row and column header. see the Custom Groups and Consolidations chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.

see Opening a report. 70 Finding values © 2006 MicroStrategy. 2 From the View menu. in Internet Explorer. not in the blank area of the column header. page 7 in Chapter 1. and select either Ascending or Descending. page 10 in Chapter 1. Inc. For example.) You can also narrow your searches if you need to. use the browser’s Find function to locate values or other data in a report. In MicroStrategy Web. .3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide 2 Right-click in the heading of the column or row to be sorted. 3 Point to Sort. You can also use the Find feature to locate a string in the SQL syntax. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. use the Find feature. to find a value in the report SQL View to find a string in the SQL syntax The Find feature is not available in Graph view. or you want to jump to a section of a large report. when viewing a report in SQL View. depending on what you want to find: • • Grid View or Grid Graph View. Finding values Whenever you want to quickly locate a specific data value in a grid report. In Desktop. Introduction to Reporting. (For steps to look at a report in Grid View or SQL View. see Report types. by defining specific requirements for your search. choose Find (on this page). make sure you right-click directly on the column name. display the report in the appropriate view. To find a value in a report in Desktop 1 Open a grid report. from the Edit menu. For steps to open a report.

if you enter “3470”. © 2006 MicroStrategy. For example.470” will not be found. If you enter “50”. The first instance of the value is highlighted if the value is found. The Find dialog box is displayed. This means that. These options work similarly to Find options in Microsoft Excel. Making a search case-sensitive Match case finds only text that has the same pattern of upper and lower case as the text you specify in the Find what text box.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 3 From the Edit menu. Use this option to make the search case-sensitive. To change this behavior. 4 Enter the value to search for and click Find Next. use any of the following options to narrow the results you get from a search using the Find feature. see Finding an entire cell. if a grid report contains data that includes the numbers 50 and 500. Inc. Finding values 71 . for example. Each cell in a grid report is treated as a string value. a cell containing “500” will not be found. page 71. Finding an entire cell Find entire cell finds only cells that match all of the text you enter in the Find what text box. Searching by row or column Search By Rows or By Columns allows you to set the direction of the search so that the data you are looking for may be located more quickly. 5 Click Find Next again to search for additional instances of the value in the report. a cell containing “3. choose Find. both cells are found when you search for 50. Narrowing a search for report data When searching for data in a report in Grid view.

Making a search case-sensitive Match case finds only text that has the same pattern of upper and lower case as the text you specify in the Find what text box. Inc. See Outlining data. page 73. For example. a string containing “temp” will not be found. To view a report in SQL view. Use this option to make the search case-sensitive. if you enter “temporary”. 72 Summary/detail of data © 2006 MicroStrategy.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide Narrowing a search for SQL syntax You can use SQL view to searching for specific syntax in the SQL for a report. open a grid report and select SQL View from the View menu. Use one of the following tools to organize large sets of data so it is easier to handle: • • Outline mode: This tool lets you expand and collapse sets of data. These options work similarly to Find options in Microsoft Notepad. Use any of the following options to narrow the results you get from a search using the Find feature. Page-by: This tool lets you view one “page” of data at a time. it is generally easier to analyze and understand the data if you can look at only certain sets of the data at one time. Summary/detail of data When you have a large set of data on a report. . page 79. See Grouping data by page. Matching the whole word Match whole word only finds only strings that match all of the text you enter in the Find what text box.

the © 2006 MicroStrategy. you can collapse and expand sections of related data. button 3 was clicked. Inc. which expands the outline down to its third level.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 Outlining data You can create an indented grouping of related data on a grid report by organizing the data into a standard outline style. Using an outline style of organization in MicroStrategy. Summary/detail of data 73 . For this image. In this case. The image below shows just a small portion of an outlined report expanded completely. The outline style is controlled with the numbered buttons that appear in the top left corner of the report. as shown in the images below.

. Note that you can almost see the entire report in a 74 Summary/detail of data © 2006 MicroStrategy. but each item of data and its related metric numbers can be seen clearly: The next image shows the same report as in the image above. Note that most of the report data cannot be viewed without scrolling. Inc. but with the lowest level of data collapsed and only the higher levels of data expanded (button 2 in the top left corner was clicked).3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide third level is Supplier.

but higher level numbers can be analyzed and compared more easily. It is also easier to compare totals and averages for each category.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 single screen. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. The detailed data is hidden. Summary/detail of data 75 .

You also want data listed by month within each of the years. For example. depending on whether you are working in MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. you can use an outline to expand and view just that data you want to see immediately.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide The next image shows the same report as in the images above. to be expanded later for quick comparisons. 2005. and 2006. 2004. Rather than having all data visible for every month of every year. Enabling an outline Use the appropriate procedure below. . you want to display sales for three years. Inc. 76 Summary/detail of data © 2006 MicroStrategy. and keep other data collapsed. Note that this outline level provides the highest summary of data: Outlining is particularly useful when information displayed would otherwise involve repetitive entries. but with all data levels collapsed fully (button 1 in the top left corner was clicked).

For example. To enable an outline in MicroStrategy Web Outline mode is only available when the report has more than one object in the rows. there must be more than one attribute if you want to use outline mode. © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 7 in Chapter 1. Each outline level usually represents a business attribute on the report.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 To enable an outline in Desktop Outline mode is only available when the report has more than one object in the rows. and click OK. You can expand and collapse the outline levels by clicking the numbered buttons at the top of the report. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. see Opening a report. page 9 in Chapter 1. Introduction to Reporting. For steps to open a report. page 7 in Chapter 1. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. For steps to open a report. For example. Summary/detail of data 77 . there must be more than one attribute if you want to use outline mode. 1 Open a grid report. if your grid report has business attributes on the rows of the report. 2 From the Grid menu. see Rows and columns. 1 Open a grid report. 3 Select the Outline check box. choose Grid Options. The Grid Options dialog box opens. select Display Outline Results. There is one button for each outline level in the report. For a detailed explanation of rows and columns and what business data they represent. see Opening a report. if your grid report has business attributes on the rows of the report. Inc. 2 From the Format menu.

reports with an outline applied are displayed with all outline levels collapsed. 3 Click the General tab. page 7 in Chapter 1. Initial display of an outline Depending on whether you are using MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. • To have an outline initially display with all levels collapsed 1 Open a grid report. However. select Save to save your outline mode settings for the report definition. see Opening a report. you can specify how you want the report to display when it is opened. Click the numbers above the report to expand or collapse everything to a certain outline level. page 9 in Chapter 1. select Options. MicroStrategy Desktop: By default. Inc. or with all outline levels collapsed. The Grid Options dialog box is displayed. Each outline level usually represents a business attribute on the report. 5 From the File menu. For a detailed explanation of rows and columns and what business data they represent. see Rows and columns. and select Open with all outline levels collapsed. • MicroStrategy Web: By default. . 2 From the Grid menu. you may be able to change how outlined reports appear when they are opened. Introduction to Reporting. You can have an outlined report open with a specific level already expanded.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide 4 You can expand and collapse individual levels by clicking the + or .box within each row on the report. For steps to open a report. 78 Summary/detail of data © 2006 MicroStrategy. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. This default cannot be changed. reports with an outline applied are initially displayed with all levels expanded. 4 Click OK to close the Grid Options dialog box.

one data subset at a time. so that the report shows only one year’s data at a time. The subsets you separate your business data into are called pages. Quarter. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Summary/detail of data 79 . and you then page your way through the report. it can be easier to handle that data by grouping the report data into logical subsets. For example. You simply click the page-by field to select a different subset of data to display. Inc. if a report showing your Profit data is organized by Year. you can create a page-by for Year. you can use the page-by feature. The following figure shows such a report with Year in the page-by area of the report (the top of the report). and viewing only one of the subsets at a time. To group data into subsets. Page-by makes viewing a report easier than scrolling through long lists of data.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 Grouping data by page When you have a very large set of data on a report. The page-by feature lets you decide what subsets of your business attribute data you want to display as separate pages of your report. and Region.

as shown in the page-by area at the top of the report: In the next image. The specific subset of data from the report that is being displayed is the data related to electronics. Inc. and profits related to book sales: Attributes and metrics are the most common objects available in the page-by area of a report.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide In MicroStrategy Web. price. . the report is paged by books instead of by electronics. although you can enable page-by for most objects that appear on a report. the page-by feature appears as shown in the image below. (Consolidations and custom groups are described in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. resulting in data showing cost. You can page-by any of the following objects: • • • • Attributes Metrics Hierarchies Consolidations and custom groups.) 80 Summary/detail of data © 2006 MicroStrategy.

for Designers. be aware that order matters. If you decide to place multiple related attributes in the page-by area. your project designer may have disabled the page-by functionality for that type of object. Whatever you page-by first (furthest to the left) affects the elements displayed in the other page-by fields. right-click the object you want to move to the page-by area. If you encounter a problem moving a certain type of object into the page-by area above a report. 3 On the report. 2 From the View menu. object prompts that are made up of attributes. Summary/detail of data 81 . 1 Open a grid report.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 • Most object prompts. The object is moved to the page-by area above the report. point to Move. All metrics must be moved together. right-click the word Metric on the report and select Page-by. Place multiple objects into the page-by area in logical order. © 2006 MicroStrategy. The Drop Page Fields Here pane opens above the report. and custom groups. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. To move metrics to the page-by area. Object prompts containing metrics can be placed in the page-by area as long as the report’s rows or columns do not contain a metric.) Page-by capabilities can be enabled or disabled for your project by your project designer. Prompts are discussed in detail in Asking for user input: Prompts. For steps to open a report. hierarchies. consolidations. and select To Page-by. from left to right. You cannot have one metric in the page-by area and one on the report grid. Inc. page 7 in Chapter 1. select Page by. (Specifically. To move an object to the page-by field in Desktop You can place more than one object in the page-by area. page 292 in Chapter 7. see Opening a report. Building Query Objects and Queries.

To further arrange objects on the report. The object is moved out of the page-by area and onto the report. . This is usually set by a project designer. Retaining page-by display when saving a report When you save a report that contains the page-by feature. Click the page-by field and select an option from the drop-down list to change the subset of data displayed. 2 Point to Move. right-click the page-by field for the object. Inc. you can choose to either retain the currently displayed page-by selection with the saved report. If you save the current display of a page-by report. and select either To Rows or To Columns. you can click the row or column headers of objects on the report. the next time you run the report it automatically displays the last page-by choice you made before you saved the report. or to revert to the original page-by display. 82 Summary/detail of data © 2006 MicroStrategy.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide 4 The report is automatically redisplayed to show only the subset of data shown in the current page-by field. The default page-by saving method reflects the page-by setting designated for the entire project. and drag and drop them into place. This feature allows you to choose different criteria to view a report by whenever it is executed. To remove an object from the page-by field in Desktop 1 In the page-by area at the top of the report. In instances where you want to view a specific page first. using this setting allows you to decide the initial page to display.

Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 To retain page-by display 1 Open a report that contains a paged-by object. 3 From the Data menu. 5 From the drop-down list called Retain page-by selections when you save this report. Pivoting data 83 . page 7 in Chapter 1. 6 Click OK to save your change and close the Report Data Options dialog box. The report refreshes. 4 Expand the General category. see Opening a report. The page-by field you last selected is now the first page displayed. from the page-by drop-down list. Inc. The Report Data Options dialog box opens. select the page you want to be displayed the next time you execute the report. For steps to open a report. 2 Click the page-by field at the top of the report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. select Yes. displaying the page of data you selected. and. select Report Data Options. and select Advanced. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. Pivoting data Data pivoting enables you to rearrange the columns and rows in a report so you can view data from different perspectives. 7 Save the report and then reopen it.

3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide For example. (The image below shows only a small section of the full report. . so that the objects that were in the columns are now in the rows. as shown in the image below. the Inventory Received from Suppliers by Quarter report shows a set of data spread across the screen in a large grid display. Inc. and the objects that were in the rows are now in the columns. in the image below. much of the data is easier to read and compare. 84 Pivoting data © 2006 MicroStrategy. If you pivot the objects on the report.) It is not always easy to compare numbers in reports of this size.

select the word “Metric” in the header to move all metrics together. in this pivoted report it is simpler to analyze total units received each quarter within a subcategory of books. Change the order of objects in the rows. because the totals are listed in a single column. you must have the DHTML user preference enabled to move data this way. click an object on the report to select it. making them easy to compare. metrics must all be together on only one axis. you must visually skip over groups of data and try to focus only on totals. Methods for pivoting data You can pivot data in a grid report using any of the following methods: • • From the Move menu (in Desktop) or the Data menu (in MicroStrategy Web). Any anomalies in the numbers quickly become apparent. For graph reports. so they must be moved as a group when pivoting data. For example. on a grid report you cannot move one metric to a row and another to a column. To perform the same comparison analysis with the first report above. and choose a data pivoting option from the Move menu. select Swap Rows and Columns. With data pivoting. Inc. Drag and drop objects on the report to move them around. Pivoting data 85 . All metrics are kept together on a report. • © 2006 MicroStrategy. (In MicroStrategy Web. Move an object (a business attribute or a metric calculation) and its related data from a column to a row.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 For example.) In Desktop. Change the order of objects in the columns. To pivot metric data. you can do the following: • • • • Move an object (a business attribute or a metric calculation) and its related data from a row to a column.

report limits are joined by the AND operator. select Pivot Buttons.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide • Right-click an object on the report.) Select an object on the report and use one of the data pivoting buttons on the toolbar (in Desktop) or in the column header (in MicroStrategy Web). • Specifying maximum and minimum values: Report limits After a report’s results are displayed. Report limits are defined using operators such as Between and Less Than. A report limit is assigned to metrics that appear on the report. If you apply a report limit to restrict the data displayed to the top ten employees. . you may need to further restrict the data displayed without changing how the calculations were performed. By default. For more information on advanced operators to apply to a report limit. select Move. double-click the operator and select a new operator. You want to see only the results of the top ten employees. . To change the operator. 86 Specifying maximum and minimum values: Report limits © 2006 MicroStrategy. you have a report that ranks all employee sales. and choose a data pivoting option. (In MicroStrategy Web. For more information on additional options and settings within the Report Limit Editor. These maximums and minimums determine which rows of a result set are displayed in the report. To enable pivoting buttons in MicroStrategy Web. and are called report limits. You can limit the data displayed in a report by specifying maximum and minimum values for a given metric. Only the employees displayed changes. from the View menu. Inc. click Help. For example. you must have the DHTML user preference enabled to move data this way. the data used to calculate the sales rank is not affected. see Appendix B: Logical and Mathematical Operators for Filtering in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.

8 Click OK to return to the report. 5 From the Operator drop-down list. 2 From the Data menu. Examples include Between. Greater than.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 If you have the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product. Report limits and filters If the report has a filter. navigate to locate the metric to which you want to apply the limit. not just metrics. see Opening a report. Inc. The Report Limit Editor opens. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. For example. then the report limit is applied to further restrict the data returned in the report. 6 Enter the Value that you want the operator to apply to. and so on. To limit the data on a report using maximums and minimums 1 Open a grid report. select the operator you want. click Modify. For information on OLAP Services. the Report Limit subcategory displays any report limits that may already be applied to the report. you can apply report limits to any data on a report. Under the Calculations category. page 18. page 7 in Chapter 1. select Report Data Options.000 to see only data over 1 million. 3 To apply new limits to the report data. Exactly.000. © 2006 MicroStrategy. see OLAP Services. the filter is applied to the report data first. Double-click on the metric to add it to the Limit Definition pane of the Report Limit Editor. 7 Click Save and Close to save the report limit. you might enter 1. Less than. if your operator is Greater than. 4 In the Object Browser. Specifying maximum and minimum values: Report limits . For steps to open a report.

• • • 88 Calculating data © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. report limits. such as sales. costs. A description of the default evaluation order and examples for different evaluation orders are provided below in Evaluation order of calculations. store. page 95. The goal of reporting is to access the latest data related to your analysis needs. See Subtotals. page 100. . attribute join types: These determine how tables of attribute data (business concepts. The effect on calculations of numerical data in your data source when that data is joined in different ways is described below in Determining how metric data is combined: Metric join types. page 89. and then calculate that data to display the numbers you need to see. next. or profits) are joined to each other. the results of calculations on that data can change drastically depending on a number of considerations. Within a single set of data that is gathered from your data source in response to a report’s query. evaluation order: This determines in what order the various objects on a report are calculated. or item) are joined together. and subtotals. subtotals: These allow you to total metric data using a selected mathematical function.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide Calculating data Your organization’s data source contains data related to all of your organization’s operations. such as year. such as • metric join types: These determine how tables of metric data (usually numerical data. and so on can completely change the report’s results. Which object is calculated first. See the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide for details and business examples of attribute joins in a report. Objects that can affect the calculation of data to be displayed on a report include such things as metrics. You can subtotal data in different ways for other business users who will be viewing or analyzing the data.

Calculating data 89 . © 2006 MicroStrategy. These decisions are often driven by the type of database your organization owns. these settings are effective for that metric no matter which reports the metric is used in. Inc. These settings are generally made within the VLDB properties for your project’s database instance within MicroStrategy. the person who designs a metric can override the project-level default settings described above when she creates the metric. For details on metric-specific VLDB properties. Knowing how data is calculated for metrics on a given report is an important part of the data analysis process. see the Advanced Metrics chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. just as the order of operations in any arithmetic expression can affect the result. 2 Next. Calculation rules for metrics are defined at several organizational levels: 1 How data is calculated by default is usually decided first by the project designer. as well as joins for a compound metric (a metric that is made up of other metrics). Several decisions go into determining rules for how data is calculated when that data is pulled from different tables in your data source. a metric join determines the way that data is combined into a single set of data.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 Determining how metric data is combined: Metric join types When you execute a report. When data is pulled from two or more tables of metric data in your data source. When a metric designer applies settings to a specific metric. who implements several settings on a project-wide basis that affect how SQL handles your organization’s data during calculation. see the Advanced Metrics chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. The final results on any report are greatly dependent on the organization and structure of your data source tables and how data is stored within them. For details on metric calculation settings at the metric level. data is often retrieved that has come from more than one table in your data source. The order in which the data is joined from the different tables can affect the outcome of the data calculation. most databases process SQL differently.

inner or outer. Outer join: An outer join includes in the calculation all of the data in all of the tables from which data is being gathered in your data source. see Viewing and changing metric join types. A metric join setting determines how data is combined by applying a specific type of join. report analysts can change how a metric is calculated for a single report with which the analyst is concerned. changes made to the join type using the Report Data Options dialog box affect this metric on this report only. (For steps to do this. page 94. as well as change various settings. Inner and outer joins are discussed with examples below. Inc.) Any changes made to metric joins in the report will override any join settings that were made by the metric designer or by the project designer. A metric is often calculated based on data that comes from more than one table in your data source. These report-level metric join options are discussed in detail below. it uses its default metric join type. • Inner join: An inner join includes in the calculation only the data common to all the tables from which data is being gathered in your data source. You can view the existing settings for a metric. described above. The join type places conditions on the data to be displayed in the report. Metric joins An understanding of your organization’s data source storage structure is helpful to understand the details of metric joins. When the metric is used on another report. within the Report Data Options dialog box.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide 3 Finally. . Data coming from multiple tables must be joined together in some way during data calculation. The MicroStrategy SQL Engine applies the designated join type to the data pulled from your data source’s tables. However. • 90 Calculating data © 2006 MicroStrategy.

with an inner join between metrics. as shown in the table above. review the data in the following table. For example. Inc. (For a definition and examples of levels. The resulting report contains only those rows that have data returned for all the metrics. so all data for the West region is also omitted from the report. the table above shows that sales data has not been tracked for the West. Region North South East West Sales Information? Yes Yes Yes No Budget Information? No Yes Yes Yes A report is created containing Sales and Budget metrics. see How data is aggregated on a report: metric level. and the Region attribute. displays only those regions that have both sales and budget information. The resulting report. no data is displayed for the North region on the report. The result looks like the following report: However. The Sales Information and Budget Information columns show whether data exists in the data source for that type of data in that region. assume you need to change your analysis and you want to display all of the data from the tables in your data source. The default inner join is not changed. whether or not data exists for all the metrics at all levels in the report.) You apply an outer join to both metrics because you know there is some incomplete or empty data for some © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 115. Since the North region does not have any budget data.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 Examples of inner and outer joins Inner joins are generated by default for all metrics in a report. or data that is common to all components of the join. Similarly. Calculating data 91 . because you want to view metric values that are common to both metrics and that are therefore not empty for either metric.

such as the Revenue metric and the Profit metric. (The exception is with rank metrics. All regions (all report rows) with information on sales are displayed. • 92 Calculating data © 2006 MicroStrategy. so you apply an outer join to the Sales metric and an inner join to the Budget metric. Inner joins are most effective if your data source contains relatively complete metric data. Inc. When to use an inner or outer metric join Inner joins An inner join is generally more commonly used for metric data than outer joins.) Inner joins are effective in many situations.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide regions in your data source. Finally. in which the North and West regions appear even though they have no data for one of the metrics. you can specify different joins for each of the metrics on a report. see Outer joins below for details. It is irrelevant whether data exists for the Budget metric or not. without empty values. including the following: • Inner joins provide effective results when you know the metrics on your report are closely related to each other. You want to see all sales data even if budget data has no values for some regions in your data source. . The outer join results in the following report. The following report is created: West is not displayed because it does not contain sales information.

but several profit values have not been reported and entered in the data source for certain days during the past week. The goal for a rank metric is to display all rankings. Inc. Outer joins allow you to see all data that is available for a metric. When a metric calculates rank. With an outer join. Calculating data 93 . © 2006 MicroStrategy. all rows are displayed on the report even if there is no result displayed for some of the elements for some of the metrics on the report. you can apply an outer join to the Revenue metric so that you can see all values for Revenue for each day of the past week. even if the Profit value for a given day is currently empty. some of the ranks (and therefore.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 • Inner joins require less processing time than outer joins. the ranked attribute elements) may not appear on the report because an inner join does not include elements with null values in the result set. so all elements must appear whether they have values or not. For example. Outer joins Outer joins are effective if your data source contains empty values for some metric data in some tables. your revenue data may be completely up to date. If the default inner join is used on a rank metric. But an element with a null value may have a rank. Outer joins are also necessary for metrics that show rank. it is important to use an outer join on the rank metric. When the Revenue and Profit metrics are both included on the same report. so they are useful to lessen the processing load on your MicroStrategy Intelligence Server machine.

see Opening a report. Inc. Under the Calculations category. along with each metric’s join type. The Metric Join Type subcategory lists all metrics on the report. 94 Calculating data © 2006 MicroStrategy. 2 From the Data menu. To view and change metric join types 1 Open a grid report. .3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide Viewing and changing metric join types The image below shows the metric join type setting in the Report Data Options dialog box. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. For steps to open a report. select Metric Join Type. page 7 in Chapter 1. as shown in the image above. select Report Data Options.

Inner and outer joins are described fully above. The report is re-executed against your data source. select a different join type. You can select the following: • Default: This option sets the metric to use the join type set for that individual metric when that metric was created with the Metric Editor. page 5. The following example uses reports in the Tutorial project to show how object evaluation order can affect report results. If no join type was determined this way for the metric. Outer: This option displays all of the data from all data source tables from which data is being gathered for this metric. and the newly calculated results are displayed. you can sort them by metric name or by join type. • • 5 Click OK. You change the evaluation order of a report’s data calculation by changing the order in which objects on the report are calculated. For details on all options available on the screen. Changing the order in which data is calculated can change report results. 3 You can change a metric’s join type by clicking the join type (Inner or Outer) for the metric you want to change.) © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inner: This option displays only the data common to all data source tables from which data is being gathered for this metric. by clicking the Metric or Join Type column headers. Evaluation order of calculations Evaluation order is the order in which objects are calculated by MicroStrategy’s Analytical Engine. click Help. (For information on the Tutorial project. Inc. see MicroStrategy Tutorial project.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 If you have a long list of metrics. 4 From the drop-down list that appears. Calculating data 95 . this option sets the metric to use the join type set at the project level.

Cost. Inc.Cost metric displays only those results greater than $500. see Specifying maximum and minimum 96 Calculating data © 2006 MicroStrategy. .000. 11 rows are returned. a report limit is added to the base report. The report limit requires that the Revenue . as shown in the image below: Base report Next. the metric definition is the Cost metric subtracted from the Revenue metric subtotals • When this report is executed.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide A report contains the following objects: • • • • • Year Quarter the Revenue metric the Cost metric a compound metric called Revenue . (For an explanation of report limits.

2 The compound metric is calculated next. the evaluation order is changed to evaluate in this order: 1 Subtotals are calculated first. which is as follows: 1 Any compound metric (Revenue . only seven rows are returned. Calculating data 97 . Next.Cost) is calculated first. © 2006 MicroStrategy.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 values: Report limits. 3 The report limit is calculated last. 3 Any subtotals are calculated last. as shown in the image below: Evaluation order report The report above follows the default evaluation order. page 86.) When the report is re-executed. 2 Any report limit is calculated next. Inc.

To view evaluation order in Desktop 1 Open a grid report. select Report Data Options. seven rows are still returned. For steps to open a report. are included in the subtotals. . as shown in the image below: New evaluation order report However. Because the subtotals are calculated before the report limit is applied.434. the quarters that met the criterion of the report limit) are included in the subtotals. 98 Calculating data © 2006 MicroStrategy. only the data displayed on the report (that is. see Opening a report.936. which is the same as the base report on the previous page. notice the difference between the subtotal amounts. even those below the report limit of $500.000.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide In the resulting report. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. all the rows. In the default evaluation order report. The subtotal for Revenue for the new evaluation order report is $16. 2 From the Data menu. Inc. which has no report limits. The Report Data Options dialog box opens. page 7 in Chapter 1.

Evaluation Order subcategory appears. 6 Click OK to save your changes. select the new evaluation order number for the object. 5 Click the number in the Evaluation Order column next to the object whose evaluation order you want to change. by clicking the Name or Type column headers. From the resulting drop-down menu. clear the check box. The Calculations . similar to the image below: 4 If the Show consolidations only check box is selected. and select Evaluation Order. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Calculating data 99 . Inc. The report objects that are evaluated appear in the Data Set evaluation order list. you can sort them by name or type.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 3 Expand the Calculations category. • If you have a long list of objects. Repeat this step as necessary with each object listed.

and median. (For a definition and examples of levels of aggregation. see the Reports chapter. 100 Calculating data © 2006 MicroStrategy. The subtotal functions available include sum. Inc.) A subtotal lets you see the totals for subgroups of your report data. see the following chapters of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide: • • For the evaluation order of multiple consolidations. for example. For background information on levels. For more details on changing the evaluation order of objects on a report. mean. allow you to apply subtotals to selected metrics only. Answering Questions about Data. see Metrics made up of metrics: Compound metrics. For the evaluation order of all other report objects. For a more detailed description of a compound metric. . average. Building Query Objects and Queries. A metric’s designer must enable grand totals and/or subtotals for a metric. for Designers. maximum. totaled at a level you select. Analysts can also change the function used with a subtotals.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide Many reports contain objects that require more complex considerations to determine an effective evaluation order. see the Custom Groups and Consolidations chapter. as well as others. Desktop analysts also have the ability to change the level at which a subtotal is calculated. see How data is aggregated on a report: metric level. minimum. If grand totals and/or subtotals have been enabled. page 226 in Chapter 7. Custom subtotal functionality is explained in detail in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. page 115. Subtotals Subtotals are totals of selected groups of your metric data. Report designers can also construct custom subtotals in MicroStrategy Desktop that. see How data is aggregated on a report: metric level. page 115 in Chapter 4. count. an analyst can choose to either display or hide them for that metric on a given report.

4 Click the Advanced tab. specify the level on the report at which to calculate the selected subtotal. Answering Questions about Data.Basic Reporting Guide Analyzing Data 3 Displaying subtotals You can choose to display a subtotal across levels on a report. select Subtotals. or display all subtotals. Each of these is considered an axis of the grid report. columns. For steps to open a report. For a definition of a level and examples. 5 In the Applied levels section. page 115 in Chapter 4. Inc. Calculating data 101 . Then select one of the following: – Grand Total: Apply only the subtotal across the whole axis. see Opening a report. – All Subtotals: Apply the subtotal across all levels on the axis. – None: Apply the subtotal to no level of the axis. page 7 in Chapter 1. and/or page-by fields. 3 Select the type of subtotal function you want to use on the report. To display subtotals in Desktop This procedure assumes a report designer or metric designer has enabled grand totals or subtotals for a metric. 1 Open a grid report. 2 From the Data menu. display grand totals. The Advanced Subtotals Options dialog box opens. The Subtotals dialog box is displayed. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. see How data is aggregated on a report: metric level. © 2006 MicroStrategy. The levels you can select from are: • By position: Apply the subtotal to particular parts of the report: rows.

which means the grand total is calculated based on all attributes on the report. 7 Click OK to complete the subtotal definition. When you select this. select Edit Totals. click Add to add new group-by levels. attributes and hierarchies are listed for you to choose from.3 Analyzing Data Basic Reporting Guide • Across level: Apply the subtotal to all attributes and hierarchies available on the report. Inc. . Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. The subtotals are displayed on the report. • 6 Click OK to return to the Subtotals dialog box. Group by: Apply the subtotal by the selected attribute across all other attributes on the report. 102 Calculating data © 2006 MicroStrategy. see Opening a report. When you select this. 4 Click OK to complete the subtotal definition. This works best if the report has been sorted based on the attribute you want to group the subtotal by. The Grand Total check box adds a subtotal grouped by nothing. page 7 in Chapter 1. Select those you want to subtotal. To display subtotals in MicroStrategy Web This procedure assumes a report designer or metric designer has enabled grand totals or subtotals for a metric. see the Custom Groups and Consolidations chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. The Subtotals dialog box is displayed. For information on using subtotals in custom groups. 1 Open a grid report. 3 Select the type of subtotal function you want to use on the report. The subtotals are displayed on the report. regardless of position. 2 From the Data menu. For steps to open a report.

or you can expose an entirely different object on a report to see what the data looks like within a different context. and provides examples for simple and more complex filters. See Filtering data. Drilling. Drilling lets you explore data beyond the data immediately visible on a report. 103 . page 115. page 104. it is important to understand what data was specifically included in that report.4 4. To successfully interpret the data displayed in a report. Inc. ANSWERING QUESTIONS ABOUT DATA Filters. Filters screen the data that the report brings back from your data source. You can drill through a report to analyze data that is closely related to the original report data. and Hierarchies Introduction Filters are an integral part of almost every report. This chapter shows you how to view a report filter’s definition. See Drilling into related data. as well as what data was excluded. Drilling is one of the most powerful data analysis functionalities in any reporting environment. © 2006 MicroStrategy.

page 110.) Now a filter is applied to the report. Filtering data A filter sifts the data in your data source to bring back the information that answers exactly what you require. . (This is the Revenue by Brand report. as shown in the image below: (To display the Report details pane for any report. The following image shows the Revenue by Brand report “filtered on” specific brands.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide Drilling successfully on data in a report requires that you understand how business attributes in a reporting project can relate to each other within higher-level business concepts called hierarchies.) You can see that the filter is empty by looking at the information in the Report details pane above the report. for the brands 3Com. You 104 Filtering data © 2006 MicroStrategy. See Understanding hierarchies. from the View menu select Report Details. Hierarchies and drilling are covered in this chapter. The following image shows a report that has not had a filter added to it. Inc. located in the sample Tutorial project. Hewlett Packard. and Sony.

The filter definition is Brand = 3Com. only for the company’s northeastern and mid-eastern US stores.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 can see the filter’s definition in the Report details pane above the report. Filtering data 105 . The filter selects only that data related to a company’s electronics products. The filter’s definition is [Category © 2006 MicroStrategy. The report shows revenue and revenue forecasts. Inc.Hewlett Packard or Sony. A more complex filter is used in the next report. and only for the current year.

see Viewing a filter’s definition.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide = Electronics] And [Quarter = 2006 Q1.2006 Q3 or 2006 Q4] And [Region = Northeast or Mid-Atlantic]. but also what that filter’s definition is. You can view this information in the Report Details pane. 106 Filtering data © 2006 MicroStrategy. Filters are usually created and added to reports by a report designer. This information helps you understand exactly what data in your data source was included in the report’s results. . Inc. For steps to view a filter’s definition in a report. For any report. as well as what was excluded. as shown in the images above.2006 Q2. you can easily see not only whether a report has a filter applied to it. page 107.

see Opening a report. For steps to open a report. see Customizing the Report Details pane. A view filter does not trigger re-execution against the data source. see OLAP Services. which is the result of a view filter. The advantage of using both standard report filters and view filters on a report is that the report can use the standard report filter to bring back more data than can usefully be displayed at any one time. To see a report’s filtering information in Desktop 1 Open a report. page 18 in Chapter 1. a view filter dynamically limits the data being displayed on a report without re-executing the report against the warehouse. The analyst can then use a view filter to change the data displayed. Web. This capability translates into improved response time and decreased database load. The analyst generates a view report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 7 in Chapter 1. Inc. Different from a report filter that restricts how much data is retrieved from the data source.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 OLAP Services view filters and regular filters The MicroStrategy OLAP Services product lets MicroStrategy Desktop. To specify the information that you want displayed in Report Details. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. Viewing a filter’s definition Use the appropriate procedure below to view a report’s filtering information in MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. as long as it falls within the data already retrieved from the database. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. Filtering data 107 . page 108. and Office users slice and dice data in reports without having to re-execute SQL against the data source. For details on the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product.

4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide 2 From the View menu. select Report Details. Inc. The Desktop Preferences dialog box opens. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. The Report Details pane appears. Customizing the Report Details pane MicroStrategy Desktop users can determine what information will appear in the Report Details pane for all reports viewed on their machines. page 7 in Chapter 1. A new page appears that shows the details of any filter that is included on the report. select Report Details. see Opening a report. from the Tools menu. To specify Report Details information in Desktop 1 In Desktop. showing a Report Description and the details of any filter that is included on the report. . select Desktop Preferences. 108 Filtering data © 2006 MicroStrategy. To see a report’s filtering information in MicroStrategy Web 1 Open a report. For steps to open a report. 2 From the File menu.

Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 2 Click the Reports tab. The Desktop Preferences dialog box appears as shown below: © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. Filtering data 109 .

that information is not displayed in the Report details pane. you can select check boxes to display various information about your reports. 4 Click OK to save your changes. It is displayed in the Report Details pane above the report. . as shown in the image below: • • If you clear a check box.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide 3 In the Report Details area in the middle of the tab. Understanding hierarchies Most data calculation in a business reporting environment is based on the concept of levels. Click Help for details on each option in the Reports tab. This information is displayed after you save your changes and execute a report. you must first know what a business attribute 110 Understanding hierarchies © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. Hierarchies are an important part of understanding levels in MicroStrategy. To understand a hierarchy.

or Year. such as which regions produced the least revenue and which years saw the highest growth in revenue. While knowing your company’s total sales is useful. When executed. These concepts help you understand the business data (usually numbers) stored in your data source. It might tell you that the northeast region brought in a million dollars in revenue in the first three months of last year. Attributes help you make sense of the business facts stored in the data source. Behind the scenes. If you remove the attributes from the report. attributes provide a context for calculating data and filtering data. Understanding hierarchies 111 . to tell you what the data in that row or column is for. as well as a Revenue metric based on the Revenue fact. knowing where and when the sales took place provides the kind of analytical depth you require on a regular basis. Geographical Region. and Region attributes on it. the report displays your company’s revenue by region. such as Store. For example. Employee. This section defines an attribute. you can only see how much revenue the entire company grew in total. Inc. you have a report with the Month. describes a hierarchy. Because of the attributes on the report (Region. and Year). By converting each of these important business concepts into an individual object that can be placed © 2006 MicroStrategy. Business attributes An attribute is a business concept.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 (generally called an attribute) is. and for a given month and year. a substantial amount of information is available. Attributes provide the answers to the questions “where” and “when”. In a reporting environment. Year. attributes are MicroStrategy objects associated with one or more columns in a lookup table within your data source. over all time. Attributes appear on reports as row headings or column headings. Month. The attributes your organization’s project designer creates are based on whatever business concepts are important to your organization. and then explains the concept of levels.

when a MicroStrategy project is created based on the data in this data source. and Customer. which works because of hierarchies. Quarter. or Region. and Year. and Year are combined into the Time hierarchy. The data source may also store specific financial data in its tables on a quarterly or annual basis. Quarter. monthly. these attributes are combined into a group called a hierarchy. All of this data is stored based on the concepts of day. attributes are arranged in a specific way that is based on their relationship to each other. or annual sales figures? Yes. Quarter. Month. Hierarchies A hierarchy is made up of a group of related business attributes that are conceptually related to each other. quarter. and they may store inventory information that is updated monthly. Within a hierarchy. . and Year so that daily sales data can be reported. the attributes Day. Therefore. If your data source contains data on daily sales figures. concepts like Day. an organization’s data source tables may be updated daily with sales data. and reports of financial data can display quarterly or annual details and summaries for corporate presentations. Inc. page 111. you can if you drill to that data. The Year attribute is the highest-level attribute in the Time hierarchy because it encompasses all the other concepts of 112 Understanding hierarchies © 2006 MicroStrategy. Month. The attributes Day. can appear on a report that displays data within the context of those attributes. monthly inventory can be reported. month. attributes will likely be created to represent Day. see Business attributes. Month. City. Month. Quarter. (For a description and examples of attributes. in this case.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide on a report. and year. can you see weekly. and Year all share one thing in common: they are all concepts that describe the larger idea of time. Because they are all part of the same higher-level concept.) For example.

. For example. But what if you want to see a report showing monthly sales data? Because Day and Month are part of the same hierarchy. The related business attributes within this idea of © 2006 MicroStrategy.) In another example.) The lowest-level attribute. and Quarter. you can simply drill from the daily sales data displayed on the report. (These attributes and this hierarchy are part of the sample Tutorial project. or least-inclusive attribute. up to monthly sales data. in this hierarchy is Day. the sales data is stored in the data source on a daily basis. and therefore stores its employee data in your data source within the concept of geographical locations within the U.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 time (Day. Understanding hierarchies 113 .S.) This hierarchical grouping of related business attributes is useful for analyzing data in a reporting project. This Time hierarchy is shown below: The example above shows a hierarchy of all the attributes that relate to the business concept of Time. The new report you drill to (which contains monthly sales data) is recalculated automatically based on the drilling path you select.S. imagine that your company is an Internet-based retailer and has its call centers all over the U. drilled-to report. Inc. Month. “Drilling up” reflects the direction you are drilling into the data in relation to where the attribute exists within the hierarchy: you drill from Day (shown on the report) up the Time hierarchy to Month (which appears on the new.

and so on. Hire Date. . which includes related lower level attributes like Profile (Age Range. Nationality. Date of Birth. see the MicroStrategy Project Design Guide. Country is the highest-level attribute and Employee is the lowest-level attribute. 114 Understanding hierarchies © 2006 MicroStrategy. Division. Marital Status). Leave Date. Ethnicity. An example using sample data from the Tutorial project is shown below: In the Geography hierarchy above.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide geographical location become part of the Geography hierarchy. Employee might just as likely be the highest-level attribute in a hierarchy called Employee Resources. Address. Title. Gender. Salary Range Level. Location. If you are interested in complete details. Department. Inc. Education and Degree Type. Which attributes are grouped into what hierarchies is decided by your organization’s system architect or project designer when a MicroStrategy project is first created.

See Understanding hierarchies.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 How data is aggregated on a report: metric level When more than one attribute is on a report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. The report therefore contains the metric Revenue. as is generally the case. It allows you to execute another report based on the original report to get more detailed or supplemental information. For example. since Month is a less-inclusive. Is the Revenue metric going to be summed up and displayed by year? Or is it going to be summed up and displayed by month? Since a metric is calculated by default at the level of the lowest attribute that is on the report. If you have questions about what level your metric data is being calculated for. a metric is calculated by default at the lowest level that is on the report. Drilling into related data 115 . To understand what you are doing when you are drilling up. page 112. in this example the metric results are calculated to reflect monthly sales data. Inc. concept than Year.) You can investigate the data in your report quickly and easily with the help of drilling. or across. or lower-level. page 110. such as Day (in a Time hierarchy) or Employee (in a Geography hierarchy). As described in Hierarchies. page 110 for an introduction to this concept. down. the lowest level is usually the attribute that reflects the least-inclusive business concept. and the attributes Year and Month. you should understand the concept of hierarchies. Drilling into related data Drilling allows you to view displayed report data at levels other than that returned in the original grid or graph report. (To understand levels. read Understanding hierarchies. imagine a report that shows your company’s revenue listed by month and year. Be aware that the person who created the metrics on your report can change this default level of calculation. contact your organization’s MicroStrategy report designer or metric designer.

Even though a report generated as a result of drilling is related to the original report. Inc. they are two entirely different reports. A new report is automatically created. Then you decide you want to look at those stores’ revenue by quarter. You can drill on attributes. the metrics are recalculated to reflect the new attribute you are drilling to. 116 Drilling into related data © 2006 MicroStrategy. You right-click on the Year column header. consolidations. and the report displays the quarterly revenue for your stores. some metrics. Consolidations and custom groups are described in detail in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. The two reports can be saved or changed independently of each other. and custom groups.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide For example. and choose Drill down to Quarter. you look at the annual revenue for all your stores. The sample report is shown below. . Methods for drilling on a report Depending on the drilling method you choose. you can drill on the entire report or only a part of the report.

2005. Q3 2005. you can select multiple attribute elements on which to drill by holding down SHIFT or CTRL. and 2006. 3 From the Selected object drop-down list. • The following procedures show you how to drill on a grid report in either MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. So. In Desktop.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 Drilling on a grid report The following describes the different methods for drilling. or Q4 2005. You can double-click (in Desktop) or single-click (in Web) one of the years (one of the attribute elements) to drill down from that year and see the quarter level data for that year. • For example. Use the Drill option on the Data menu or use the Drill toolbar button: You can drill on either the entire report or only selected items using these features. 2 From the Data menu. For steps to open a report. Some drilling methods provide more drilling options than others: • Double-click an attribute element (in Desktop) or single-click (in Web): You can drill down one level for a single element. page 7 in Chapter 1. if your report shows the attribute Year. if you double-click on 2005 and drill down. Drilling into related data 117 . 2004. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. you can drill to Q1 2005. see Opening a report. select the object on which to drill. The Drill dialog box is displayed. select Drill. the attribute elements might be 2003. • Right-click one or more attribute elements (Desktop only): You can right-click an attribute element to open a shortcut menu that lists the possible drill directions and drill paths. Q2 2005. To drill on a grid report in Desktop 1 Open a grid report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc.

2 Right-click on the object on which you want to drill. . choose whether to keep thresholds on the new report. click Help in the MicroStrategy Web menu. see Grouping data by page.) 8 Click OK to view the new report that is automatically created and executed based on your chosen drilling action. add the current page-by element check box is enabled. select the attribute you want to drill to. Select this check box to view this page-by element in the new report. 7 If you are using an attribute in the page-by field on the original report.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide 4 In the Drilling options window. this option is unavailable. To drill on a grid report in MicroStrategy Web 1 Open a grid report. For more advanced drilling options in MicroStrategy Web. (For a description of the page-by feature. see Drilling on a report with threshold formatting. page 79. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 5 Choose Yes from the Keep parent drop-down list to display the parent attribute (the attribute from which you are drilling) on the new report. the When drilling. (For considerations on drilling from a report that contains thresholds. Inc. page 7 in Chapter 1. 6 If your report contains thresholds. For steps to open a report. see Opening a report. page 126. browse to the attribute you want to drill to. 118 Drilling into related data © 2006 MicroStrategy.) If your report does not contain thresholds. The new report is automatically executed based on your chosen drilling action. 3 From the drop-down list.

Inc. you can right-click the metric (in Desktop) or single-click (in Web) to access different drill options for that metric. • • • For detailed steps to drill on a report. A category is any one of the shapes on the graph that represent a label (attribute element). to analyze additional levels of data within the report. If you have a compound metric on the graph. you are notified that you cannot perform a click drill on that object. or by selecting Drill from the Data menu. the name of the resulting.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 Drilling on a graph report You can drill on a graph report just like you drill on a grid report. in the Inventory and Unit Sales report in the Tutorial project. For example. you can easily drill on the grid by right-clicking attributes (in Desktop) or single-clicking (in Web). The resulting. A compound metric is a metric made up of other metrics. You then drill from this resulting report by drilling down from Category to © 2006 MicroStrategy. click Help in MicroStrategy Desktop or Web. if you have a list of cities. For example. For example. you can drill from the Item attribute up to the Category attribute. Use the following methods to drill on a graph: • Click labels (attribute elements) on the graph. If you are in Grid Graph view. Click one of the categories on the graph to drill on it. If no default drill level was specified. Click compound metric labels on the graph. double-click (in Desktop) or single-click (in Web) a bar in your bar graph to drill to the default drill level for that data. drilled-to report automatically becomes the original report’s name plus the name of the object you drilled to. you can right-click each city (in Desktop) or single-click (in Web) to access different drill options for the attribute City. Drilling into related data 119 . drilled-to report’s name is “Inventory and Unit Sales -> Category”. Tracking your drill path and naming the drilled-to report When you drill from a report.

1 From the report’s File menu. which is especially useful if you continue to drill from each resulting. your drill path as reflected by each resulting report’s name is shorter and more useful again. Inc. You might save a report you have added formatting to.” You can use this report name to track your drilling path. each project’s My Personal Objects folder 120 Drilling into related data © 2006 MicroStrategy. Each project’s Public Objects folder is available to all users who have access to that project. drilled-to report. The drilled-to report’s name is “Inventory and Unit Sales -> Category -> Subcategory. If you drill repeatedly along a single path. Consider saving a specific drilled-to report with a new name that is useful for you. . when you continue drilling from that report. 2 Navigate to the location in which you want to save the new report.” If you then drill across from Subcategory to Region. or you might save a report you have drilled to. In contrast. the resulting report’s name is “Inventory and Unit Sales -> Category -> Subcategory -> Region. The saved report’s name and its definition such as the report filtering criteria and report formatting information are stored in the MicroStrategy metadata repository.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide Subcategory. Saving a report After you save a report. you and others can execute it in the future. Then. To save a report This procedure assumes you have finished formatting a report or have drilled to a new report. at some point the report’s name may become too long or cumbersome to be useful. and you have that report open. select Save As.

© 2006 MicroStrategy. Product. such as Customer. You can control how drilling behaves on a report with the options described in this section. Most drilling options involve attributes on reports. see Hierarchies.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 (and the folders within it) is available only to the user who is logged in at the time a report or other object is saved to this folder. An attribute is a MicroStrategy object that represents business data in your data source. For background information on attributes. 3 Give your new report a name that reflects its use as a business intelligence data analysis tool. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results You can set various options that determine how drilling works on a given report. Inc. These allow you to control how other users drill on the report when they execute it. or Store. 4 Click Save. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 121 . or to preserve your own most useful drilling paths and drilling behavior for later reuse on a given report. see Business attributes. page 112. page 111. For background information on drilling and drilling paths.

see Keeping or removing the drilled-from attribute in the new report. Save a useful page-by display that suits your informational needs. Inc. you can enable drilling in all directions or restrict drilling to lower-level attributes in a given hierarchy. see Tracking your drill path and naming the drilled-to report. by adding the drilled-to object’s name to the end of the report’s name. • The report name automatically adjusts each time you drill. Keep track of the drill path so you can remember what reports you drilled from for each new. page 122. Use the procedure described in Enabling drilling down or drilling anywhere. see Enabling drilling down or drilling anywhere. Solutions Do not allow the attribute you are drilling on to appear in the drilled-to report. Analyzing Data. Use the procedure described in Drilling to a report that is unaffected by page-by fields. • Make sure each attribute you drill on appears in the resulting. page 124. see Keeping or removing the drilled-from attribute in the new report. What do you want to do? Reduce the width of reports. Use the procedure described in Drilling to a report with page-by fields restricted to visible pages on the original report. To do this. Use the procedure described in Enabling drilling down or drilling anywhere. especially when drilling. page 122. page 134.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide Troubleshooting drilling behavior To find the best ways to customize drilling for your way of working or to suit your reporting goals. To customize this behavior. For ideas on managing the report’s name as it grows. page 124. page 122. page 82 in Chapter 3. Have page-by fields on the drilled-to report show exactly the same information they displayed on the drilled-from report. Restrict others users of a report from being able to drill wherever the report allows. 122 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. To customize this behavior. see the following table for suggestions. drilled-to report. To do this. page 119. so the object you drilled on always appears in the subsequent report. Have the drilled-to report show only data related to the currently visible page-by object on the drilled-from report. Restrict drilling paths to drilling down only. Enabling drilling down or drilling anywhere For a given report. . page 131. Enable drilling in all directions. drilled-to report. see Retaining page-by display when saving a report. Save the report so the currently visible page-by fields are displayed when you next execute the report. Restrict drilling to lower-level attributes within a given hierarchy.

For background information on drilling and how to drill on a report. To enable drilling 1 If you have not already done so. for example. open a grid report. A user can drill across to other. 3 Expand General. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 123 . For example: A user can drill down from an attribute to the child attribute data. For steps to open a report. Drilling down from the Category attribute or one of its elements. users can only view data associated with objects lower in the hierarchy than the attribute on which they are drilling. no matter which direction in the attribute’s hierarchy they drill. select Report Data Options. then select Drilling. page 112. users can only drill to Day. drilling from Employee data across to Region data. drilling from Item data up to Product data. for example. users can only drill to Item. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. see Hierarchies. The Report Data Options dialog box opens. Inc. for example. • Drill down only: When this option is selected in the procedure below. A user can drill up from an attribute to the attribute’s parent attribute data. 4 Select one of the following options: © 2006 MicroStrategy.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 • Drill anywhere: When this option is selected in the procedure below. users can view data associated with the object they drill from. see Opening a report. page 7 in Chapter 1. related attributes. drilling from Year data down to Month data. For example: Drilling down from the Month attribute or one of its elements. 2 From the Data menu.

and the Revenue metric. • 5 Click OK to save your settings and close the Report Data Options dialog box. you can have the drilled-from attribute and its related data displayed in the resulting report. . select Drill. or you can choose to not display the drilled-from attribute on the resulting report. Examples are provided above. Examples are provided above. For example. as shown below: You drill down from Region to Call Center. Keeping or removing the drilled-from attribute in the new report When you drill on a report. or across. and select Call Center. a report contains Country. If you tell MicroStrategy to keep the drilled-from attribute (called the parent attribute) on the 124 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide • Drill anywhere: Users can view data associated with the object they drill from. Drill down only: Users can only view data associated with objects lower in the hierarchy than the attribute on which they are drilling. Inc. To do this. select Down. down. no matter which direction in the attribute’s hierarchy they drill: up. you right-click on Region. The following examples show the results of both of these options. Region.

when you drill down from Region to Call Center.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 drilled-to report. Inc. as shown below: If you tell MicroStrategy not to keep the drilled-from attribute. Region (the drilled-from attribute) appears on the drilled-to report along with Call Center (the drilled-to attribute). Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 125 . Call Center replaces Region on the drilled-to report as shown below: © 2006 MicroStrategy.

if certain cells of data appear bolded or have a red background on a report. select Report Data Options. that is data that has met a specified threshold and so is formatted differently to highlight it. resulting reports can become very wide if you have many attributes and metrics. 3 Expand General. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. For 126 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. The default behavior is to keep the drilled-from attribute on the drilled-to report. Inc. page 7 in Chapter 1. • 5 Click OK to save your settings and close the Report Data Options dialog box. Not keeping the drilled-from attribute can help reduce the width of drilled-to reports. Be aware that the report’s designer may have changed the default. then select Drilling. specified conditions are met. Drilling on a report with threshold formatting Thresholds are conditional formatting that appears on report data when certain. For steps to open a report. open a grid report. select Yes from the Keep Parent While Drilling drop-down list. To keep or remove the drilled-from attribute when drilling 1 If you have not already done so. 2 From the Data menu. For example. However. 4 Select one of the following options: • To ensure the drilled-from attribute appears on the drilled-to report. The Report Data Options dialog box opens. .4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide Keeping the drilled-from attribute can be helpful to trace your drilling path. To ensure the drilled-from attribute does not appear on the drilled-to report. see Opening a report. select No from the Keep Parent While Drilling drop-down list.

Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 127 . For the drilled-to report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. see Formatting conditional values: Thresholds. as shown in the image below: When you drill from Region to Call Center. For example. a report containing the Region attribute and the Revenue metric has a threshold that highlights revenue greater than $2 million. you can determine whether revenue over $2 million should still appear bolded. The revenue amount is bolded when the threshold is met. the revenue amounts are recalculated for the Call Centers. Formatting a Report. You can have thresholds on the drilled-from report be displayed automatically on any drilled-to report. Inc. page 27 in Chapter 2.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 background information on thresholds.

Revenue amounts over $2 million are bolded on the drilled-to report. as shown below: If you choose to remove thresholds while drilling. and you drill down from Region to Call Center. .4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide If you choose to keep thresholds while drilling. Inc. and you drill down from Region to Call Center. as shown below: 128 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. no data is bolded.

• 5 Click OK to save your settings and close the Report Data Options dialog box. For steps to open a report. The Report Data Options dialog box opens.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 When deciding whether to enable this option. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. open a grid report. Be aware that the report’s designer may have changed the default behavior. page 7 in Chapter 1. see Opening a report. To keep or remove thresholds when drilling 1 If you have not already done so. when a report is drilled on. then select Drilling. select No from the Keep thresholds while drilling drop-down list. 2 From the Data menu. if you drill up from Region to Country. 4 Select one of the following options: • To ensure thresholds appear on the drilled-to report. The thresholds then only clutter the report and do not provide any meaningful information. Inc. select Report Data Options. the entire report is likely to consist of revenue over $2 million. To ensure thresholds do not appear on the drilled-to report. For example. if you drill up on an attribute. The default behavior retains the threshold on the drilled-to report. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 129 . all the data in the new report could potentially meet the threshold condition. select Yes from the Keep thresholds while drilling drop-down list. be aware that. Using the example above where revenue over $2 million is bolded. © 2006 MicroStrategy. thresholds can become meaningless. 3 Expand General.

Determining the effect of the page-by field on the resulting report You can determine how the page-by field on a drilled-from report affects the drilled-to report. one country at a time. Inc. If the currently visible page-by field says Country: USA. and no other countries can be selected in the page-by field. which one of the following results do you want to see: • • Data for all countries continues to be displayed on the drilled-to report. you put the Country attribute in the page-by area. see Grouping data by page. Be sure you review Drilling on a report with page-by fields in the same hierarchy. and you drill down on the report. page 139 for details. If your report has two or more page-by fields that have objects in the same hierarchy. of data on the report at one time. you have a report that shows sales data for individual countries. Specifically. Only data related to the USA is displayed. page-by behavior changes slightly when drilling. if you only want to see one country’s data per page of the report. For example.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide Drilling on a report grouped by page-by fields Page-by is a method of grouping large amounts of report data so you only see a separate subset. For example. in a report that shows sales numbers for every country in which your organization does business. for example) at the top of the report. It has the Country attribute in the page-by area above the report. you can choose whether to have the object that is currently visible in the page-by field be part of the filter for the drilled-to report. 130 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. . For a full description of page-by and examples. page 79. or page. one country at a time. if a report you want to drill on contains a page-by field (that displays an attribute or a metric. The options in this section let you determine how you want drilling to perform when you drill on a report that has one or more page-by fields.

Conversely. shown by Subcategory: Art & Architecture in the other page-by field. © 2006 MicroStrategy. in the drilled-to report. For example. you can have the page-by fields of the original report appear in exactly the same state in the drilled-to report.) Drilling to a report that is unaffected by page-by fields When you drill on a report. shown by Year: 2005 in one page-by field. hen you drill from the body of a report. When you drill from the page-by field itself. The report is shown in the image below: Your goal is to have these same page-by fields. This personalization lets you locate certain drilling behavior within specific areas of a report to suit your drilling habits. The currently selected subcategory is Art & Architecture. of course. by default the drilled-to report is identical to the original report (except for the appearance of the object you drilled on. with all the same paging choices available.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 Personalizing the drilling location to affect page-by results You can determine what part of a report will perform specific drilling behaviors. a report contains the Region attribute and the Revenue metric. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 131 . with the Year attribute and the Subcategory attribute in the page-by fields above the report grid. showing these same options and with the same drop-down list of selections. by default the currently visible page-by field becomes part of the drilled-to report’s filter. Inc. The currently selected year is 2005. The report has no filter.

from the Region attribute down to the Call Center attribute. page 145 below. as it was in the drilled-from report. see To customize drilling on a report that has page-by fields. . To do this. 132 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. The page-by fields still contain the Year attribute and the Subcategory attribute. the resulting drilled-to report appears as shown below: Note the results in the drilled-to report: • • The new report’s filter is empty. as they did in the drilled-from report. which means you can view revenue data for other years and subcategories in the drilled-to report. Call Center replaces Region in the grid of the new report because Call Center was the object you drilled down to. as they did in the original report. Inc. The drop-down lists of the page-by fields contain all years and all subcategories. • You must clear the Any page-by field and Any other part of the report check boxes to achieve this drilling behavior.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide Drilling from the grid When you drill on the report’s grid.

the resulting drilled-to report appears as shown below: Note the results in the drilled-to report: • • The new report’s filter remains empty. The Year page-by field still contains the Year attribute. and therefore all years and all subcategories are included in the data of the drilled-to report. Call Center replaces Region in the grid of the new report because Call Center was the object you drilled down to. which means you can view revenue data for other years and items within other subcategories in the drilled-to report. To do this. page 145 below. for example from Subcategory down to Item. • In summary. no page-by fields from the original report have been added to the filter of the resulting report. You must clear the Any page-by field and Any other part of the report options to achieve this drilling behavior. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 133 . based on setting certain drilling options. © 2006 MicroStrategy. The drop-down lists of the page-by fields contain all years and all items within all subcategories. and the Subcategory page-by field became the Item page-by field because that is the object you drilled down to. Inc.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 Drilling from the page-by area When you drill on one of the report’s page-by fields. see To customize drilling on a report that has page-by fields.

The report has no filter. a report contains the Region attribute and the Revenue metric. shown by Subcategory: Art & Architecture in the other page-by field. To illustrate this using the same example as above. Inc. the page-by fields change to display the objects on the level to which you drilled. the drilled-to report contains data specific to the page-by fields currently visible on the drilled-from report.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide Drilling to a report with page-by fields restricted to visible pages on the original report You can include all currently visible page-by fields as part of the new. The currently selected year is 2005. . with the Year attribute and the Subcategory attribute in the page-by fields above the report grid. The currently selected subcategory is Art & Architecture. As a result. drilled-to report’s filter when you drill from the original report. The report is shown in the image below: 134 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. Additionally. shown by Year: 2005 in one page-by field.

Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 Drilling from the grid When you drill on the report’s grid. and the Subcategory page-by field still contains the Subcategory attribute. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 135 . The Year page-by field still contains the Year attribute. the drop-down list of the Year page-by field contains only the year that was visible on the original report when you drilled. in this case 2005. Call Center replaces Region in the grid of the new report because Call Center was the object you drilled down to. However. from the Region attribute down to Call Center. Inc. namely Year = 2005 and Subcategory = Art & Architecture. This means you only view revenue data for that year and that subcategory in the drilled-to report. • • © 2006 MicroStrategy. in this case Art & Architecture. The drop-down list of the Subcategory page-by field contains only the subcategory that was visible on the original report. the resulting drilled-to report appears as shown below: Note the results in the drilled-to report: • The new report’s filter contains the objects that were in the page-by fields of the original report.

To do this. . 136 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. the Apply to all page-by fields option. Inc.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide You must select the Any Page-by field check box. drilled-to report. in the resulting. page 145 below. This means the data for this drilled-to report was filtered so that only revenue for art and architecture books in 2005 is returned. see To customize drilling on a report that has page-by fields. 2005 and Art & Architecture have been added to the new report’s filter so that all of the revenue data on the resulting report is 2005-specific and lists revenue only for art and architecture books. The drilled-to report is shown below: Note the results in the drilled-to report: • The filter on the drilled-to report contains 2005 and Art & Architecture. Drilling from the page-by area When you drill on a page-by field at the top of the report. and the Any other part of the report check box to achieve this drilling behavior. for example from Subcategory down to Item.

as part of the drilled-to report’s filter. you can include only the page-by field on which you drill. The currently selected year is 2005. the Apply to all page-by fields option. and therefore only those subcategories and years included in that filter are included in the data of the drilled-to report. 100 Places to Go While Still Young at Heart appears because that book happens to be the first book among all the art and architecture books that are stored in the data source. Any other page-by fields remain as they were on the drilled-from report. This page-by field functions like all page-by fields. a report contains the Region attribute and the Revenue metric. based on setting specific drilling options. As a result. Drilling to a report with one page-by field restricted and other page-by fields unaffected When you drill from the original report. To illustrate this using the same example as above. page 145 below. You must select the Any Page-by field check box. the drilled-to report contains data specific to the drilled-on page-by field visible on the drilled-from report. All other page-by fields stay the same as they were on the original report. in that only revenue for this book is included on the page currently displayed in the new report. and the Any other part of the report check box to achieve this drilling behavior.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 • Item replaced Subcategory in the page-by field because you drilled down from Subcategory to Item. shown by Year: 2005 in one page-by field. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 137 . In summary. see To customize drilling on a report that has page-by fields. with the Year attribute and the Subcategory attribute in the page-by fields above the report grid. shown © 2006 MicroStrategy. all page-by fields from the original report have been added to the filter of the resulting report. To do this. In the new page-by field. Inc. The currently selected subcategory is Art & Architecture.

drilled-to report is shown below: Note the results in the drilled-to report: • The drilled-to report has a filter. . The report is shown in the image below: Drilling from the page-by area When you drill on a page-by field. The filter contains the page-by field that was drilled on and contains the object that was visible on the page-by field in the original report. Inc.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide by Subcategory: Art & Architecture in the other page-by field. the new. for example from Subcategory down to Item. 138 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Art & Architecture. The report has no filter.

because that is the object you drilled down to. you must select the Any Pageby field check box and the Apply to current page-by field option. you must select the Any Page-by field check box. You must select the Any Page-by field check box and the Apply to current page-by field option to achieve this drilling behavior. All page-by fields are unaffected by the drilling action and appear they did on the original report. If you set up a report’s drilling behavior this way. page 110. but the drop-down list of the Item page-by field contains only art and architecture books. Inc. the Apply to current page-by field option. Drilling on a report with page-by fields in the same hierarchy This section assumes you understand what a hierarchy is and how attributes are related within a hierarchy. • To set these options. Drilling from the grid The drilling behavior described above can only be achieved when you drill from the page-by area of a report. page 145 below. see To customize drilling on a report that has page-by fields. © 2006 MicroStrategy. see Understanding hierarchies. To achieve this drilling behavior. Only revenue for the items in that subcategory is displayed on the report. you can choose from one of two options for how drilling from the report’s grid should behave: • All the page-by fields are restricted to page-by objects that were visible on the original report. The drop-down list of the Year page-by field contains all years. To achieve this drilling behavior. see To customize drilling on a report that has page-by fields. since that is the only subcategory in the filter. For background information on hierarchies and attributes. page 145 below. To do this. and the Any other part of the report check box.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 • • Item replaces Subcategory in the page-by field. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 139 .

. when you drill on one of those attributes. Specifically. Inc. the drilling behavior described in the sections above is slightly different. This report is shown in the image below: 140 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. all related page-by fields are restricted to the object that was visible on the original report when you drilled. you have a report with one page-by field showing the Year attribute. and you drill on one of them. if two or more attributes in the page-by fields are in the same hierarchy. and one page-by field showing the Subcategory attribute. one page-by field showing the Category attribute.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide If you drill on a report that has two or more page-by fields that contain attributes within the same hierarchy. For example.

The drilled-on page-by field is restricted to the page-by object visible on original report. The Year attribute is in a separate hierarchy. when page-by fields contain related attributes. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. All other page-by fields remain as they were on the original report. However.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 The Category and Subcategory attributes are both within the project’s Product hierarchy. the filter contains only the page-by object that was drilled on. the behavior in the third bullet above is slightly different. as shown on the left side of the image below. as shown in the image below: These settings normally provide the following results: • • • A filter is added to new report. You leave all drilling behavior options in the Report Data Options dialog box set to default. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 141 .

4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide To see the resulting report. you drill from the Subcategory page-by field down to Item. The Art & Architecture subcategory is placed in the resulting report’s filter. because Category and Subcategory are in the same hierarchy. However. Inc. . And as expected. normally only that drilled-on page-by field is changed so that it shows only the object that was visible in the original report. and thus limits the Category page-by field to displaying only Books. with all years available to be selected from the Year page-by. Other page-by fields are not affected by the drilling action and remain as they appeared on the original report. The resulting report is shown in the image below.) This behavior occurs because the higher-level attribute Category must logically reflect the elements displayed in the lower-level attribute Item that you drilled down to. based on your behavior settings the Subcategory page-by field was placed in the resulting report’s filter. in the resulting report the Category page-by field only displays choices related to the subcategory that was currently visible in the original report (rather than showing all items from all subcategories as was displayed in the Category page-by field in the original report. with the Category page-by field expanded: When drilling from any page-by field using the default behavior settings. 142 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. the Year page-by field remains as it was on the original report. As expected.

The following table summarizes the options described in detail in this section of the manual: Option(s) Selected Drill Location In Original Report Drill from a page-by field Appearance Of Resulting Report • Filter is added to new report. • Filter is empty. in a report that has page-by fields containing attributes in the same hierarchy. • Drilled-on page-by field is restricted to the page-by object visible on original report. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 143 . This causes drilling behavior to perform slightly differently than the default behavior described throughout this section of the manual. all other page-by fields with attributes in the same hierarchy are restricted to the hierarchy level of the page-by field you drill on. • All page-by fields remain as they were on the original report. Inc. For complete details and examples for each of these options. Drill from the report grid Drill from a page-by field Drill from the report grid © 2006 MicroStrategy. filter contains only the page-by object that was drilled on. • All page-by fields are restricted to the page-by objects visible on original report. You can also refer to the table below for a quick reference to choose the right options to achieve the drilling behavior you prefer on a given report. they affect each other when you drill on one of them. In summary. • Other page-by fields remain as they were on the original report.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 Because these attributes are connected by their relationship within the same hierarchy. see the sections above. Customizing drilling behavior for a report with page-by fields The procedure below describes the options to set drilling behavior for a report that has one or more page-by fields. • Filter is added to new report. • Filter is empty. when you drill on a page-by field containing one of those attributes. filter contains all page-by objects that were visible on original report. • All page-by fields remain as they were on the original report.

• Filter is empty. filter contains only the page-by object that was drilled on.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide Option(s) Selected Drill Location In Original Report Drill from a page-by field Appearance Of Resulting Report • Filter is added to new report. filter contains all page-by objects that were visible on original report. • All page-by fields are restricted to the page-by objects visible on original report. • Drilled-on page-by field is restricted to the page-by object visible on original report. filter contains all page-by objects that were visible on original report. filter contains all page-by objects that were visible on original report. Inc. • All page-by fields remain as they were on the original report. • Filter is added to new report. Drill from the report grid Drill from a page-by field Drill from the report grid Drill from a page-by field Drill from the report grid Drill from a page-by field Drill from the report grid 144 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy. • All page-by fields are restricted to the page-by objects visible on original report. • Filter is added to new report. • Other page-by fields remain as they were on the original report. • All page-by fields remain as they were on the original report. • All page-by fields are restricted to the page-by objects visible on original report. • Filter is added to new report. . • Filter is empty. filter contains all page-by objects that were visible on original report. • All page-by fields are restricted to the page-by objects visible on original report. • Filter is empty. • Filter is added to new report. • All page-by fields remain as they were on the original report.

When you drill on this report in the future.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Questions about Data 4 To customize drilling on a report that has page-by fields 1 If you have not already done so. choose one of the following: – Apply to current page-by field: Only the page-by object that is currently visible is added to the filter of the drilled-to report. where most users drill from the data. For steps to open a report. – Apply to all page-by fields: All page-by objects are added to the filter of the drilled-to report. If this is selected. then select Drilling. 3 Expand General. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. your settings will determine how the page-by field affects the results displayed in the drilled-to report. which determine how the page-by on the drilled-from report affects the drilled-to report. page 7 in Chapter 1. 5 Click OK to save your settings and close the Report Data Options dialog box. as described in the examples above: • Any page-by field: The page-by object is added to the filter of the drilled-to report when you drill from a page-by field. 2 From the Data menu. open a grid report. 4 You can set the following drilling options. © 2006 MicroStrategy. see Opening a report. • Any other part of the report: The page-by object is added to the filter of the drilled-to report when you drill from anywhere on the report’s grid. select Report Data Options. You choose to locate the page-by drilling feature in the body of the report. The Report Data Options dialog box opens. Inc. Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results 145 .

while an outer join includes all of the relevant data in all of the tables being joined. 146 Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results © 2006 MicroStrategy.4 Answering Questions about Data Basic Reporting Guide Calculating data on drilled-to reports: Attribute join types When you execute a report. You can affect how data is calculated on a drilled-to report by setting the type of join for attributes that may appear on the drilled-to report. For business attribute data. then expand General. into a single set of data is called a join. select Drilling. . For details and examples showing how attribute joins affect report results. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. When data is pulled from two or more tables in your data source. For any attribute. The final results on any report are greatly dependent on the organization and structure of your data source’s tables and how data is stored within the tables. or joined. The order in which the data is joined from the different tables can affect the outcome of the data calculation. Inc. data is often retrieved that has come from more than one table in your data source. the most common types of joins are inner joins and outer joins. An inner join includes in the data calculation only the relevant data that is common to all the tables being joined. you can set the join type as inner or outer using the Drill Attributes Join Type dialog box. and click Drill Attributes Join Type at the bottom of the dialog box. You can access this dialog box from the Data menu. just as the order of operations in any arithmetic expression can affect the result. the way that data is combined.

you will want to have the most recent information from you data source displayed on your reports. 147 . At other times. This chapter discusses report caches. if you execute a report multiple times. ANSWERING PROMPTS AND REFRESHING DATA Introduction Your analysis of data can only be as accurate as the results displayed in a report. as well as various methods of refreshing a report’s data. In many instances. In this case. you probably want to be sure the query is submitted through your data source each time so you know you are seeing results based on the latest data available.5 5. MicroStrategy provides caching so you can retrieve report results as quickly as possible without submitting the request through your data source again. Inc. © 2006 MicroStrategy. you simply need to see the same report you looked at before — you do not care whether the data is up-to-the-minute. In this case.

To effectively refresh data on a report. Understanding your data sources With MicroStrategy. For example. or an external data source such as SAP-BW. you can report on and analyze your organization’s data with the goal of answering your business questions. you must consider a few factors: • • The frequency with which your data source is updated. you must refresh the data displayed on the report. a simple text file. a Microsoft Excel file. Inc.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide Refreshing a report As an analyst. Your data source may be updated on a daily basis or only bi-weekly. It is a good idea to familiarize yourself with the frequency and the days or times when your data source receives updates. A data source can be a data warehouse. you should take a moment to understand your data sources. data sources are commonly separated into specific business divisions. To take advantage of recently updated data in your data storage. or whether it is pulling its data from a stored cache that was created in MicroStrategy when the report was run the first time. Microsoft Analysis Services. No matter which type of data source your organization uses. This information helps you determine when it is most desirable to re-execute your most commonly run reports. When you re-execute a report. . Whether the report you are running is being executed through the data source again. you may find yourself regularly executing certain reports that have provided useful information to you in the past. you might have a data source that 148 Refreshing a report © 2006 MicroStrategy. or Hyperion Essbase. MicroStrategy makes sense of the large amounts of data stored in your data source and returns report results which reflect that data. if it is important for you to see report results that reflect the latest data. how do you know that the data that is returned reflects the most recent data available in your data source? To answer this question.

Refreshing the data displayed on a report There are several ways that data shown on a report can be refreshed so that the report reflects the latest values in the data source. Your organization might also have a separate data source to store all human resources data such as employee headcount. By knowing which data sources are providing you with your report data. Answering prompted reports is discussed in this chapter. Inc. It is important to know which data source(s) you are regularly accessing when you execute reports. Refreshing a report 149 . and so on. page 154. storing all data related to monitoring the efficiency of your business workflow. making sure that the report query is submitted through your data source rather than through a stored report cache in MicroStrategy. © 2006 MicroStrategy.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 only holds information related to your supply chain data. employee turnover. This information in turn can help you decide how often you need to re-execute certain reports. you can learn how frequently they are updated with new data. • Prompted report: A report analyst can automatically refresh the data on a prompted report by answering the prompts differently than they have been answered during any previous execution of the report. in Answering report prompts.

The execution time is quicker because cached reports do not need to run against the data source. Disable caching for a report: A system administrator can disable caching for a specific report. rather than putting a load on the system to re-run the request to the data source. every time the report is re-executed. so that a cache of results is never created in the system when that report is executed. in MicroStrategy. Report caches A report cache is a special data store within MicroStrategy software that holds information that was recently requested from the data source to be displayed on a report. thus gathering the most recent data. 150 Refreshing a report © 2006 MicroStrategy. Caches are discussed in more detail below. The report’s results are then cached. including information on how to determine whether a report’s results came from a cache or not. or stored. Inc. When the report is executed again. If the stored cache is deleted. the query goes through your data source and thus returns the most recent data.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide • Report cache: A cache is the stored results of a report query that has already been executed. In a cache. frequently requested reports are cached because future requests for the same reports return data faster if the report has been cached. the system can quickly access the cache to display report data. The following methods can be implemented to ensure refreshed data is accessible when a report is re-executed: Delete a report’s cache: A system administrator can delete a report’s cache to ensure the data on that report is refreshed the next time it is executed. Generally. In this way. . A cache is created when a report is executed for the first time and the request is submitted to the database to gather the latest data. the system is forced to submit the request through the data source again. results from your data source are stored and can be used by new job requests that require the same data.

Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 Caching is a useful strategy your administrator can use to reduce demands on your database and improve the speed of MicroStrategy’s reporting performance. (There are other ways to refresh data on a report. by deleting the report’s cache before you execute the report. cached data is not always the most up-to-date. Inc. thus returning the most recent data from your data source. However. © 2006 MicroStrategy.) Deleting the report’s cache forces the report to be executed through your data source again. You must have administrative privileges to delete a report cache. because it has not been run through your data source since the cache was created. You can get new data for a report that has been cached. Refreshing a report 151 . which are discussed in this chapter.

the answer is Cache Used: No. . 152 Refreshing a report © 2006 MicroStrategy. For this report. An example image of the Report Details pane and its related report is shown below: In the Report Details pane above. select Report Details. open a report and. Inc.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide You can see whether the results on a report have come from a MicroStrategy cache in two ways: • Look at the Report Details for the report. the last line shows whether the cache was used to populate the report with data. To do this. from the View menu.

The Report Objects pane is an OLAP Services feature that lets users create mini-reports based on an original report. As shown in the image below. by dragging objects on and off the report. These reports are called view reports. for this report the 5th line says Cache Used: Yes. Web. Inc. without re-executing SQL against the data source. Cached data and OLAP Services MicroStrategy OLAP Services is a MicroStrategy product that lets MicroStrategy Desktop. and Office users make use of features that slice and dice data in reports to create new reports. © 2006 MicroStrategy. To do this.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 • Look at a report in SQL view. the report results are recalculated based on the cached data rather than being submitted through the data source again. This improves performance by resulting in quicker data display within a report as users analyze and manipulate the data. OLAP Services view reports are populated from the original report’s cache rather than being run against the data source. When report objects are dragged to or from the Report Objects pane. Refreshing a report 153 . from the View menu select SQL View.

in this case months of a given 154 Answering report prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. the report brings back and displays different data from the data source. There are several types of prompts. A prompt is a question presented to the user who runs the report. see OLAP Services. Depending on the answers the user provides.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide To determine whether you have OLAP Services. The following image shows one example of a prompt that appears when a prompted report is executed. and for details on other OLAP Services features. Answering report prompts Any report can contain prompts. This is because different prompt answers usually require different data than what is stored in the report’s cache. . page 18. Inc. You choose one or more answers from the center pane. Answering a prompted report differently each time it is executed is one way to ensure that a report is executed against your data source and displays the most recent data.

this is usually far too much information on a single report for a single analyst to quickly discern meaningful information from. Both analysts execute the same report. A single report may be designed to return all the data in your data source related to customer purchases. For example.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 year for which you want to see data. he must answer certain questions related to the data he wants to see. Prompted reports help report designers use their design time efficiently. However. and another analyst can run the same report but see customer data for the past year. You move your selection(s) to the right. Instead of creating a single report that returns too much data. your organization may have many analysts who study customer-related purchasing data. when each analyst runs the report. but they each see a different subset of the report’s data because they each answered the report’s prompt differently. so that all the analysts can use the same report to see the data they need. © 2006 MicroStrategy. then you finish running the report to see your chosen data displayed. Inc. the report designer can create a single report that includes prompts so that. based on their individual needs. Answering report prompts 155 . so that one analyst can see data about customer purchases for the past month. A prompt that filters data based on dates might be useful in this situation.

and include date prompts. a number. you can keep the default answer and add other answers. . To answer prompts by selecting from a list. or a word. the more data is displayed in the resulting report. 156 Answering report prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. long prompts. No matter which of the options above are included in the prompt by the prompt’s creator. to define the data you want to see on the report. page 157. Inc.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide How to answer a prompt Some prompts require an answer. see To answer a prompt by typing a specific value. If a prompt allows you to provide more than one answer. see To answer a prompt by selecting answers from a list. these types of prompts include attribute element prompts and object prompts. For those with a wider knowledge of prompt design. these types of prompts are called value prompts. • Prompts that request you to type in specific values or text to search for. Prompts can be divided into the following groups. and Big Decimal prompts. page 160. Some prompts do not allow more than one answer. based on what is required to answer them: • Prompts that request you to select items from a list. To answer prompts by typing text or values. For those with a wider knowledge of prompt design. to include more data on the resulting report. such as a specific date. Some prompts have a default answer that is used unless you replace it with a different answer. the following guideline is generally true for any single prompt: The more answers you provide to a prompt. The mechanics of answering a prompt differ depending on the type of prompt you are answering. text prompts. numeric prompts. Some prompts are optional.

you are creating a filter for the report. see To answer a prompt by defining a filter based on an attribute. Inc. which include the following: © 2006 MicroStrategy. To answer a prompt by selecting answers from a list Use the following procedure to answer prompts for which you select answers from a list. For those with a wider knowledge of prompt design. Use the appropriate procedure below. see To answer a prompt by defining a filter based on a metric calculation. For those with a wider knowledge of prompt design. page 167. Prompts for which you create a filter based on a metric. or business concept. This group of prompts can be divided into two subsets: Prompts for which you create a filter based on an attribute. To answer prompts by creating a filter based on an attribute. depending on the requirements of the prompt you are presented with.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 • Prompts that request you to form a more complex statement of the data you want to see displayed on the report. When you define a statement. these types of prompts include hierarchy prompts and attribute prompts. To answer prompts by creating a filter based on a metric. page 162. Answering report prompts 157 . or calculation of business data. these types of prompts are metric qualification prompts.

page 7 in Chapter 1.) • A prompt where you select attributes from the center pane. Inc. This information appears at the top of the prompt window. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 1 Determine whether an answer is required for this prompt. listed as either Required or Optional. similar to the image below.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide • A prompt where you select attribute elements from the center pane. similar to the image below.) This procedure assumes you have executed a report that has prompts and are therefore presented with a prompt. see Opening a report. . (This is an attribute element prompt. For steps to execute a report. (This is an object prompt. 158 Answering report prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy.

Answering report prompts 159 . 2 Determine whether the prompt has a default answer already provided. – If the default answer does not suit your needs. the results are displayed. if there is one. and you are finished with this procedure. click Next to go to the next prompt question. This information appears at the top of the prompt window. If a default answer was provided by the prompt’s designer. proceed to the next step. listed as Maximum qualifications. and you are finished with this procedure. proceed to the next step. click Finish. • If a default answer is provided: – If the default answer suits your needs and you do not want to add other answers to it. To do so. 3 Determine how many answers are allowed. click the default answer and click the left arrow to move the default answer to the center pane. Inc. click Finish. if there is one.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 • If an answer is not required: – You can decide not to provide an answer. • If an answer is required. the report cannot be executed without an answer. (All prompts on the report are listed in the far left pane.) If there are no other prompt questions. – If the default answer suits your needs but you want to add other answers to it. The default answer is used to filter data for the report’s results. – You can decide to answer the prompt. If there is no default answer. a default answer appears in the far right pane of the prompt window.) If there are no other prompt questions. proceed to the next step. proceed to the next step. the results are displayed. The report is executed. To answer the prompt. © 2006 MicroStrategy. You can ignore the prompt and click Next to go to the next prompt question. (All prompts on the report are listed in the far left pane.

text prompts. (These prompts include date prompts. These prompts include the following: • A prompt where you type a specific value. . If a cache was not used.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide 4 Add one or more answers by selecting one or more items from the center pane and clicking the arrow to move them to the right. or text. 7 If you want to see how your prompt answers were used to create the report’s filter. Your prompt answers appear in the Report Details window. Inc.) 160 Answering report prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. similar to the image below. The items you choose will be used to filter the data that is returned on the report. in the form of report filtering conditions. Otherwise. The report is executed and your results are displayed. such as a date. a number. and Big Decimal prompts. 6 If there are additional prompts on the report. the results reflect the latest data in your data source. numeric prompts. You can also see whether a cache was used to supply the results. To see data filtered in a different way. review the summary of your answers and click Finish. click the Reprompt icon and answer the prompt again to create a different filter for the report results. long prompts. use the appropriate steps to answer them. from the View menu select Report Details. To answer a prompt by typing a specific value Use the following procedure for prompts for which you type in a specific value such as a date or number. 5 Click Next.

For steps to execute a report. as follows: • • • • • Date prompt: Enter a date value. such as 8/14/2006. You can also see whether a cache was used to supply the results. Long prompt: Enter integer numbers up to 10 digits. You must type the form of answer the prompt is expecting. in the form of report filtering conditions. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Answering report prompts 161 . click the Reprompt icon and answer the prompt again to create a different filter for the report results. 3 If there are additional prompts on the report. 2 Click Next. Numeric prompt: Enter integers or decimals up to 15 digits. If you want to see data filtered in a different way.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 This procedure assumes you have executed a report that has prompts and are therefore presented with a prompt. Text prompt: Enter alphabetic characters that form any type of text string. If a cache was not used. Big Decimal prompt: Enter integers and decimals up to 38 digits.) Otherwise. review the summary of your answers and click Finish. the results reflect the latest data in your data source. 1 Type an answer in the field provided. Your prompt answers appear in the Report Details window. (All prompts on the report are listed in the far left pane. see Opening a report. Inc. use the appropriate steps to answer them. from the View menu select Report Details. 4 If you want to see how your prompt answers were used to create the report’s filter. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. The report is executed and your results are displayed. page 7 in Chapter 1.

. Inc. This prompt is similar to the image below. (This is a hierarchy prompt. and then drag an attribute or double-click in the pane on the right to create a filter for an attribute.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide To answer a prompt by defining a filter based on an attribute Use this procedure for prompts for which you define your filtering conditions based on an attribute.) 162 Answering report prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. These types of prompts include the following: • A prompt where you select a hierarchy from the drop-down list above the center pane.

and you are finished with this procedure. (This is an attribute prompt.) This procedure assumes you have executed a report that has prompts and are therefore presented with a prompt. • If an answer is not required: – You can decide not to provide an answer.) If there are no other prompt questions. if there is one. You can ignore the prompt and click Next to go to the next prompt question. proceed to the next step. listed as either Required or Optional. proceed to the next step. For steps to execute a report. – You can decide to answer the prompt. similar to the image below. the report cannot be executed without an answer.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 • A prompt where you double-click in the pane on the right to create a filter for an attribute. • If an answer is required. see Opening a report. page 7 in Chapter 1. Answering report prompts 163 . 1 Determine whether an answer is required for this prompt. click Finish. To do so. © 2006 MicroStrategy. The report is executed. This information appears at the top of the prompt window. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. the results are displayed. Inc. (All prompts on the report are listed in the far left pane. To answer the prompt.

3 You can add a new or additional answer by double-clicking in the Definition pane on the right. the default answer appears in the far right pane of the prompt window. click Next to go to the next prompt question. then select Remove. The Attribute Qualification pane opens. the results are displayed. click Finish. (All prompts on the report are listed in the far left pane. proceed to the next step. as shown in the image below: 164 Answering report prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. next to a filter icon. and you are finished with this procedure. if there is one. – If the default answer does not suit your needs.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide 2 Determine whether the prompt has a default answer already provided. • If a default answer is provided: – If the default answer suits your needs and you do not want to add other answers to it. right-click the default answer. Click Yes to confirm your action.) If there are no other prompt questions. If the prompt designer provided a default answer. . – If the default answer suits your needs but you want to add other answers to it. Inc. The default answer is used to filter data for the report’s results.

• From the Operator list. From the Qualify On drop-down list. Depending on what you chose to qualify on above. For example. – Other forms: There may be other forms to choose from. browse to select the attribute that has the elements you want to see data for. you might choose the Greater Than operator to filter out data that is below a certain number. If you know the ID or range of IDs you want to filter data for. If you want to filter data based on descriptions. If you want to filter data based on specific attribute elements. select the operator that will help you define your filter. 204.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 4 Create your filter by selecting options for each of the following: • Next to Attribute. Depending on the type of prompt you are answering. select whether you want to filter data based on: – Elements: These are the individual elements of the attribute listed at the top of the Attribute Qualification pane. select Description. 2005. For example. if the attribute is Year. – ID form: Each attribute element has a specific ID assigned to it. • • © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. elements might include 2003. 2006. see Joining filter qualifications with operators. page 281. – Date Value: Click the Calendar icon to select the exact date or range of dates for which you want to filter data. and so on. select Elements. perform one of the following: – Element List: Click Add and select the attribute elements for which you want to filter data. – Description form: Most attribute elements have a description provided for them. – ID Value: Type the ID number(s) for which you want to filter data. For more details on operators. depending on the attribute and on your project. Answering report prompts 165 . select ID. this field may not be available for selection.

Your prompt answers appear in the Report Details window. the results reflect the latest data in your data source. use the appropriate steps to answer them. The report is executed and your results are displayed. You can also see whether a cache was used to supply the results. Otherwise. . in the form of report filtering conditions. If a cache was not used. Inc. 6 If there are additional prompts on the report. If you want to see data filtered in a different way. 166 Answering report prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide 5 When you are finished defining your filter. from the View menu select Report Details. click the Reprompt icon and answer the prompt again to create a different filter for the report results. click Next. 7 If you want to see how your prompt answers were used in the report’s filter. review the summary of your answers and click Finish.

Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 To answer a prompt by defining a filter based on a metric calculation Use this procedure for prompts for which you define your filtering conditions based on a metric. This information appears at the top of the prompt window. Answering report prompts 167 .) This procedure assumes you have executed a report that has prompts and are therefore presented with a prompt. For steps to execute a report. page 7 in Chapter 1. see Opening a report. (This is a metric prompt. listed as either Required or Optional. Inc. which include the following: • A prompt where you double-click in the pane on the right to create a filter for a metric. 1 Determine whether an answer is required for this prompt. © 2006 MicroStrategy. as shown in the image below.

2 Determine whether the prompt has a default answer already provided. proceed to the next step.) If there are no other prompt questions. right-click the default answer. the default answer appears in the far right pane of the prompt window. Click Yes to confirm your action. then select Remove. click Next to go to the next prompt question. the report cannot be executed without an answer. click Finish. if there is one. If the prompt’s designer provided a default answer.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide • If an answer is not required: – You can decide not to provide an answer. (All prompts on the report are listed in the far left pane. . and you are finished with this procedure. To do so. click Finish. (All prompts on the report are listed in the far left pane. the results are displayed. To answer the prompt. proceed to the next step. The report is executed. Inc. – You can decide to answer the prompt. The default answer is used to filter data for the report’s results. • If an answer is required. if there is one. – If the default answer suits your needs but you want to add other answers to it. proceed to the next step.) If there are no other prompt questions. the results are displayed. You can ignore the prompt and click Next to go to the next prompt question. – If the default answer does not suit your needs. • If a default answer is provided: – If the default answer suits your needs and you do not want to add other answers to it. 168 Answering report prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. and you are finished with this procedure. next to a metric filter icon.

see Joining filter qualifications with operators.. Inc. Answering report prompts 169 . page 115. you may be able to select the metric on which you want to base your filter.) Depending on how the prompt’s creator designed the prompt. Use one of the following methods: – Type the name of the metric in the Metric field and click OK. For example. and click OK.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 3 You can add a new or additional answer by double-clicking in the Definition pane on the right. or Percent. page 281. For more details on operators.) next to the Output Level field to select a level. • From the Function drop-down list. Output levels are discussed in detail in the Advanced Filters chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Rank. From the Operator drop-down list. • • © 2006 MicroStrategy. The default is the metric’s level. The output level is the level at which the metric results are calculated. (Levels are described in How data is aggregated on a report: metric level.. select a logical operator... The Set Qualification pane opens. navigate to the folder that contains the metric. you might choose the Greater Than operator to filter out data that is below a certain number. In the Open dialog box. browse (click . select the metric.) to locate the metric. select the aspect of the metric that will be filtered on: Metric Value. – Browse (click . as shown below: 4 Create your filter by performing each of the following: • If you want to select an output level.

If you want to see data filtered in a different way. to be returned on the report. • 5 When you are finished defining your filter. you are presented with special save options that give you several ways to save your prompted report. 170 Answering report prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. Click OK to close the Set Qualification pane. If a cache was not used. when the report is re-executed. enter the value to complete your chosen operator. 7 If you want to see how your prompt answers are used in the report’s filter. if you chose the Greater Than operator above. you are not prompted again. You can save your answers with the report. Inc. When you run the report in the future. the results reflect the latest data in your data source. Your prompt answers appear in the Report Details window. The report is executed and your results are displayed. 6 If there are additional prompts on the report. review the summary of your answers and click Finish. Saving reports with prompts When you save a prompted report after having executed it. in the form of report filtering conditions. click the Reprompt icon and answer the prompt again to create a different filter for the report results. click Next. .) The prompt answers you selected the first time the report was run are saved to the report definition. You can also save the report so that it prompts you or other users again. You continue to be prompted every time you run the report in the future. Otherwise. you must enter the value which data should be greater than. You can also see whether a cache was used to supply the results. For example. and that definition is used every time the report is run in the future.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide • Beside the Value field. use the appropriate steps to answer them. (This is called saving the prompted report as static. from the View menu select Report Details.

5 Select whether you want to save the report as static or prompted. as described below: • Static: The report is saved with the currently displayed report and filter information. 2 Answer the prompts and execute the report. Inc. Additionally. you can choose whether to be prompted for just one type of prompt and not another when you run the report in the future.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 (This is called saving the prompted report as prompted. you can also have your current prompt answers become the new default prompt answers when the report is run again. because you can save your own preferred answers as the defaults. see Answering report prompts. All of these choices are described in the procedures below. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. depending on whether you are using MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web: • • To save a prompted report in Desktop. select Save As. when you are prompted you can simply click Finish to accept all the default answers. Use the appropriate procedure. The Save Options dialog box opens. If you select prompted. and then each time you re-run the report. For steps to answer a prompt. see Opening a report. and provide a name for the report. 3 From the File menu. Answering report prompts 171 . page 171 To save a prompted report in MicroStrategy Web. Navigate to where you want to save the report.) If you want. This can speed up report execution. you can choose how the prompts are saved. page 7 in Chapter 1. page 154. When you © 2006 MicroStrategy. 4 Click Save. depending on the types of prompts on the report. page 173 To save a prompted report in Desktop 1 Open a prompted report. For steps to open a report.

– Filter and template will be prompted: The report is saved so that object prompts. such as attributes. level prompts. you will be prompted just as you were the last time the report © 2006 MicroStrategy. you are prompted to select both filter and object (template) information. 172 Answering report prompts . • Prompted: The report is saved with active prompts. which includes any objects that you selected in an object prompt or any level that you selected in a level prompt. When the report is executed again. to be added to the report. When the report is executed again. and filter definition prompts all remain active. you are not prompted again. metrics. you can determine whether these prompt types are presented in future. you are prompted to select only the report’s filter information. A filter prompt asks users to select attribute elements that become part of the report’s filter. the report prompts you for answers again. – Only template will be prompted: The report is saved with the current filter definition. If the report you are saving has an object prompt. When you run the report in the future. or filters. • Set the current prompt answers to be the default prompt answers: The prompt answers you selected the first time the report was run become the new default prompt answers when you run the report in the future. A level prompt asks users what level a metric should be calculated at. The next time you run the report.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide execute the report in the future. When the report is executed again. Inc. a level prompt. Select one of the options described below to determine which of these prompt types appears again in the future: – Only filter will be prompted: The report is saved with the current report (template) definition. which includes any filter-related information that you selected in a filter definition prompt. you are prompted to select only the report’s object (template) information. An object prompt asks users to select report objects. or a filter definition prompt.

2 Answer the prompts and execute the report. and provide a name for the report. only the default prompt answers are different. Navigate to where you want to save the report. Your selections are applied to the report and it is saved. and metrics. are not presented when you run the report in the future. lists of attribute elements. 3 From the File menu. 4 You can choose to either save the report so that you are prompted again when the report is run in future. select Save As. Answering report prompts 173 . To save a prompted report in MicroStrategy Web 1 Open a prompted report. such as attributes in a hierarchy. the report is saved with the currently displayed report and filter information. A filter definition prompt is a prompt that asks you to define the report’s filtering criteria. and that you did not answer the last time the report was run. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. • Keep filter modifications (unanswered filter prompts will be lost): Any filter definition prompts that were optional to answer. see Opening a report. Inc. Remember options next time: Your selections in the Save Options dialog box become the default method for saving reports when you save prompted reports in the future. page 7 in Chapter 1. attribute forms. or you can save it as static: • If you clear the Keep Report Prompted check box. If you select the Keep Report Prompted check box.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 was run. When you execute the report in the future. The next time • © 2006 MicroStrategy. the report is saved with active prompts. For steps to open a report. you are not prompted again. • 6 Click OK.

A level prompt asks users what level a metric should be calculated at. or a filter definition prompt. a level prompt. select one now. described in the next step. The Advanced Options dialog box opens. An object prompt asks users to select report objects. . the report prompts you for answers again. 6 The Save Report as Static and Save Report as Prompted options are identical to clearing or selecting the Keep Report Prompted check box. you can determine whether these prompt types are presented in future. metrics. such as attributes. or filters.5 Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data Basic Reporting Guide you run the report. A filter prompt asks users to select attribute elements that become 174 Answering report prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. to be added to the report. Then determine additional options as described below: • If you select Save Report as Prompted. To do this. If you have not already chosen one. 5 You can also determine more detailed options to save your prompted report. Inc. you can determine how certain prompt types are saved. If the report you are saving has an object prompt. described above. select Advanced Options.

you will be prompted just as you were the first time. Inc. which includes any objects that you selected in an object prompt or any level that you selected in a level prompt. • Set the current prompt answers to be the default prompt answers: The prompt answers you selected the last time the report was run become the new default prompt answers when you run the report in the future. and filter definition prompts all remain active. attribute forms. 175 . Answering report prompts • • © 2006 MicroStrategy. – Filter and template are prompted: The report is saved so that object prompts. lists of attribute elements. When the report is executed again. When you run the report in future. level prompts. you are prompted to select only the report’s object (template) information. such as attributes in a hierarchy. When the report is executed again.Basic Reporting Guide Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data 5 part of the report’s filter. only the default prompt answers are different. and that you did not answer the last time the report was run. you are prompted to select only the report’s filter information. Select one of the options described below to determine which of these prompt types appears again in the future: – Only filter is prompted: The report is saved with the current report (template) definition. – Only template is prompted: The report is saved with the current filter definition. are not presented when you run the report in the future. which includes any filter-related information that you selected in a filter definition prompt. Remember options next time: Your selections in the Save Options dialog box become the default method for saving reports when you save prompted reports in the future. Keep filter modifications (unanswered filter prompts will be lost): Any filter definition prompts that were optional to answer. When the report is executed again. A filter definition prompt is a prompt that asks you to define the report’s filtering criteria. and metrics. you are prompted to select both filter and object (template) information.

5

Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data

Basic Reporting Guide

7 Click OK. Your selections are saved.

Remaining connected to original prompt objects
When you save a prompted report, by default the connections to the objects on which the prompt was based are broken. This means that, for example, if a prompt presented you with a group of metrics from which you selected an answer, then that prompt was created based on those metrics. Once you save that prompted report, that group of metrics is embedded in the report’s definition as a set of prompt questions. In the future, if one of those metrics has its name changed in the project or is deleted from the project, that change is not updated in the prompt for your report. This occurs because the connection between the prompted report and the original objects on which the prompt was based has been broken. You can change this behavior and save a prompted report so that a prompt and the objects on which it is based remain connected to each other. This way, any updates to the original objects can be reflected in the prompt when the report is run again.
To remain connected to original prompt objects

Use this procedure to keep a report connected to the original prompt objects when it is executed in the future. If you select Static in the Save Options dialog box, the prompted metric is embedded in the report regardless of the Revert to the original prompted objects setting described below, so you do not need to perform this procedure. This is because the report is not being saved as a prompted report, so this setting does not affect the report. 1 Open a prompted report. 2 From the Data menu, select Report Data Options. The Report Data Options dialog box opens. 3 Expand the General category, and select Advanced.

176 Answering report prompts

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data

5

4 Select the check box called When saving a report as prompted, revert to the original prompted objects on the template. Changes made to the template will be lost. The objects a prompt refers to will not be embedded in the report when the report is saved as a prompted report. The report retains links to the original prompt objects so that any changes made to the original objects are reflected in future executions of this report.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Answering report prompts

177

5

Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data

Basic Reporting Guide

178 Answering report prompts

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

6
6.

BUILDING A QUICK QUERY FOR ANALYSIS

Introduction
This chapter shows analysts and report designers how to quickly create a simple business report. Before you create a report, you must have a business query in mind for that report to answer. You must also have access to various report objects that have already been created, so you can place them on the report and provide that report with the information it needs to gather the right data from your data source. You can use report objects that have already been created by project designers and report designers.

Prerequisites
Make sure you review the following prerequisites before you create a report in MicroStrategy. They can save you time and make your report results more effective, thus making data analysis much easier.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

179

6

Building a Quick Query for Analysis

Basic Reporting Guide

Define your business query: Before you can determine what objects to place on a new report, you need to know what data you want to see displayed on a report. MicroStrategy reports answer business questions that can be answered with the help of the data stored in your data source. To define your business question, make sure you consider the following questions: What is the main topic area the report needs to address? In other words, at a general level, what do you need to know? What level of detail do you need? For example, do you want complete details, or do you only want to see a few key measurements of particular data? Key measurements can be useful for a business meeting or high-level presentation.

Look for existing reports: Before you create a report or document, search through MicroStrategy to see whether a similar report already exists that can serve the same purpose as the report you intend to create. This can not only save you time, it can help you avoid unnecessary duplication in your MicroStrategy project. Look for appropriate report objects: Do objects already exist in the project which match what you want to see on a report? If not, a report designer can create them. The objects which you will use to create a report must already be created in a MicroStrategy project. Report objects are generally created by the project’s designer when the project is first created, and by report designers.

Understand how your MicroStrategy project reflects your data source: Since you use objects to create reports, it can be useful for you to understand how the project’s objects reflect the actual data in your organization’s data source. In this way, you can choose objects to use on reports with full knowledge of the data source tables that data is coming from when the report is executed.

It is not necessary to have in-depth knowledge of your MicroStrategy project’s design if you are creating quick reports for analysis, but if you desire more details on project design and data modeling, see the MicroStrategy Project Design Guide.

180

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building a Quick Query for Analysis

6

Quick report creation: Building a new report
This chapter provides steps to create a new report using the MicroStrategy Report Builder tool. When you create a report, you take existing objects in your MicroStrategy project and place them on the report. The objects represent the data in your data source. Before you create a report, it can be useful to create links, or shortcuts, to objects you will want to use regularly. You can place the shortcuts in a location within the project that is conveniently accessible to you. For steps to create shortcuts to objects, see Quick object access: Creating shortcuts to objects, page 181.

Quick object access: Creating shortcuts to objects
The quickest way to access an existing object to place on a report is to create a shortcut to the object, called a shortcut object. A shortcut object is simply a link, or shortcut, to an existing object in a MicroStrategy project. You can place a shortcut object in a location that is most convenient for you. By creating shortcut objects for the objects you commonly use in a project, you can make the report creation process quicker and easier. For example, you use the Units Sold metric frequently when you create new reports. You want to create a shortcut to the Units Sold metric, which resides in the project’s Metrics folder, and you want the shortcut to be saved in the My Objects folder. Locate the Units Sold metric by expanding the Metrics folder, then expanding the Sales Metrics folder. Right-click the Units Sold metric and choose Create Shortcut. In the Browse to Folder dialog box that opens, navigate to the My Objects folder and click OK. The Units Sold shortcut object is created in the My Objects folder.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Quick report creation: Building a new report

181

6

Building a Quick Query for Analysis

Basic Reporting Guide

To create a shortcut object from the original object

Because a new shortcut object must be based on an existing object, other objects must already exist in your project. If your project does not yet contain objects, your report designer or object designer can create the objects you need to place on reports. 1 Right-click the object for which you want to create a shortcut and select Create Shortcut. The Browse for Folder dialog box opens. 2 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the shortcut and click OK. For example, you may save shortcuts in your My Objects folder within your project.

Creating a report for analysis
This section describes how to create a report using the quick report creation tool called Report Builder. MicroStrategy’s Report Builder steps you easily through the process of quick report creation, and lets you access a wide variety of report objects in your project to define your report. Report Builder asks for four specific pieces of information from you: • • • • The attributes to include on the report The metrics to include on the report Information to create a filter for one or more attributes; the filter is optional Information to create a filter for one or more metrics; the filter is optional

Each of these pieces of information is described more fully, with examples, in the procedure below.

182 Quick report creation: Building a new report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building a Quick Query for Analysis

6

Creating a quick report using Report Builder
To create a report that accurately answers a specific business query, be sure you have access to objects that have already been created, as described above in Prerequisites, page 179.
To build a quick report using Report Builder

This procedure assumes that a project designer has created a project in MicroStrategy that reflects your organization’s stored data, and the project contains attributes and metrics.
To start Report Builder

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, log in to the project that contains the objects you want to use to create a report. To log in to a specific project, see Starting MicroStrategy, page 2 in Chapter 1, Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. 2 Expand the My Personal Objects folder, and then open the My Reports folder. 3 Right-click on the right-hand side of Desktop, select New, and then select Report. The New Grid dialog box opens. 4 Select Report Builder and click OK. Report Builder opens.
To include attributes on the report

Attributes are the business concepts reflected in your stored business data in your data source. Attributes provide a context in which to report and analyze business data. While knowing your company’s total sales is useful, knowing where and when the sales took place is more helpful. For example, you have a report containing the Month, Year, and Region attributes, as well as a Revenue metric. When executed, the report displays your company’s revenue for each region, during each month and year for which data is available. Because of the attributes on the

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Quick report creation: Building a new report

183

6

Building a Quick Query for Analysis

Basic Reporting Guide

report, a substantial amount of information is available, including which regions produced the least revenue and which years saw the highest growth in revenue. 5 To include attributes on the report, from the list of attributes in the center pane, select one or more to include on your report, then click the arrow to move them to the right. Note the following: – You must select at least one attribute. – Generally, one to three attributes are sufficient to add to a report, depending on the business query you are trying to answer with the report. – If you add more than one attribute to the report, make sure you select attributes that make sense when placed together on a report. 6 When you are finished adding attributes, click Next.
To include metrics on the report

Metrics are MicroStrategy objects that represent business measures. Metrics are the calculations performed on data stored in your database, the results of which are displayed on a report. Metrics are similar to formulas in spreadsheet software. Questions such as “What were the sales for the eastern region during the fourth quarter?” or “Are inventory levels being consistently replenished at the beginning of each week?” can easily be answered by metrics. A metric is made up of facts stored in your data source and the mathematical operations to be performed on those facts, so that meaningful business analysis can be performed on the results. 7 To include metrics on the report, from the list of metrics in the center pane, select one or more metrics to include on your report, then click the arrow to move them to the right. Generally, one or two metrics is sufficient to add to the report, depending on the business query you are trying to answer with the report.

184 Quick report creation: Building a new report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Month. The attributes within that hierarchy are displayed in the center pane. and to help focus the report on a specific business question. © 2006 MicroStrategy. For example. most reports use a filter to limit the quantity of data returned from the data source. • Hierarchies group all the attributes in your project into logical subsets. To locate the attribute. If you do not want to include an attribute filter. page 187. use the drop-down list above the center pane to browse to the Data Explorer. An attribute filter restricts data specifically for the attributes on. click Next in Report Builder and proceed to the next subtask in this procedure. 9 To include an attribute filter on the report. navigate through the hierarchies displayed in the center pane. you must identify the attribute you want to use a filter on. Inc. Week. When the Data Explorer is selected. the Day. your project’s hierarchies are displayed in the center pane.Basic Reporting Guide Building a Quick Query for Analysis 6 8 When you are finished adding metrics. Quick report creation: Building a new report 185 . For example. your report. you might filter the Year attribute so that data is only returned for the current year. You only need to include an attribute filter if it makes sense with your business query. into the Definition pane on the right. 11 Drag and drop the attribute you want to use a filter on. 10 Double-click the hierarchy that holds the attribute you want to filter data for. However. To include a metric filter on the report. or for the first three months of last year. click Next. and Year attributes might all be grouped into a Time hierarchy. If hierarchies are not displayed in the center pane. To include an attribute filter on the report A filter screens data in your data source to determine whether the data should be included in or excluded from the calculations of the report results. or related to.

from the Operator drop-down list. Using the example in the bullet above. Click OK. Details on every combination of choices is available. the attribute Customer might have the elements John Smith. For guidance: – Click Help in the Attribute Qualification dialog box. for Designers. 12 Select one of the following options. To create this kind of filter. in Filtering data based on business attributes: Attribute qualifications. • Return results that show all the attribute’s data EXCEPT for the specific elements you define. Click OK.6 Building a Quick Query for Analysis Basic Reporting Guide It is generally simplest to select an attribute that is part of your report. Then select the elements on the left and click the arrow to move them to the right. and so on. click Add to display the attribute’s elements. depending on how you want to filter the attribute’s data: • Return results that only show data related to specific elements of the attribute. You can filter data to display a list of only those customers (those elements) that you specify. unless you need an attribute filter that relies on a different attribute. select Not In List. – Attribute qualifications are discussed in detail in this manual. William Hill. • Experiment with other options in the Attribute Qualification window to create the exact filter you want. Building Query Objects and Queries. Then click Add to display the attribute’s elements. along with links to instructions for creating more complex filters. you might specify certain customers whose data you do not want to see. . Inc. page 253 in Chapter 7. To create this kind of filter. Jane Doe. For example. Select the elements on the left and click the arrow to move them to the right. 186 Quick report creation: Building a new report © 2006 MicroStrategy. The Attribute Qualification dialog box opens.

and in the Value field enter the number all calculated values should be greater than. • Click the Operator drop-down list to see the many other common operators you can define your filter with. or simply type the metric’s name in the field. enter the number that marks the higher end of the range. 15 Select one of the following options. For example. To include a metric filter on the report A metric filter screens data based on a metric’s value or rank. from the Choose a metric drop-down list in the Set Qualification dialog box. You only need to include a metric filter if it makes sense with your business query. select Not Between. To create this kind of filter.Basic Reporting Guide Building a Quick Query for Analysis 6 13 When you are finished defining your attribute filter. from the Operator drop-down list. click Next. page 188. If you do not want to include a metric filter. It is generally simplest to select a metric that is part of your report. you might create a filter that displays sales data for only those products with an inventory count below a specified number. select Greater than. In the second Value field. depending on how you want to filter the metric’s data: • Return results that show all data greater than a specific amount. enter the number that marks the lower end of the range. • Return results that show data that is outside a particular range of values. 187 . 14 To include a metric filter on the report. Experiment with other options in the Set Quick report creation: Building a new report © 2006 MicroStrategy. In the first Value field. Inc. from the Operator drop-down list. To finish your report. unless you need a metric filter that relies on a different metric. To create this kind of filter. click Next and proceed to the next subtask in this procedure. select the metric on which you want to filter.

. – For information on using the Report Editor. Otherwise. along with links to instructions for creating more complex filters. Inc. – To execute the report without making any further changes. 19 Navigate to a project folder in which to save the report. adding or creating additional objects. page 266 in Chapter 7. For guidance: – Click Help in the Set Qualification dialog box. Building Query Objects and Queries. type a name for the report. where you can continue to build the report with additional objects and user functionalities. – Metric qualifications are discussed in detail in Filtering data based on attribute relationships or metrics: Set qualifications. for Designers. The Save Report As dialog box opens. from the View menu select Grid View. click Back. Building Query Objects and Queries. your report is executed against your data source and your results are displayed. click Next. for Designers. 16 When you are finished defining your metric filter. and adding user functionalities. the report opens in the Report Editor.6 Building a Quick Query for Analysis Basic Reporting Guide Qualification window to create the exact filter you want. select Save As. see Chapter 7. and click Save. click Finish. • Analysts: If you have Desktop Analyst privileges. • 188 Quick report creation: Building a new report © 2006 MicroStrategy. 18 To save your new report. If you want to make any changes. Details on every combination of choices is available. from the File menu. Report Designers: If you have Desktop Designer privileges (or higher). To finish your report 17 Review the summary of your selections.

If you have the appropriate privileges. you must have a business query in mind for that report to answer. FOR DESIGNERS Introduction This chapter introduces the basics of designing and creating business reports. © 2006 MicroStrategy. BUILDING QUERY OBJECTS AND QUERIES. Inc.7 7. or you can use report objects that have been created by other report designers. This chapter also shows you how to add user-friendly additions to a report. Before you create a report. such as a drilling map or other capabilities. so you can place them on the report and provide that report with its definition. Those that can be performed in MicroStrategy Web have procedures specifically for working in Web. 189 . you can create report objects yourself. You must also have access to various report objects that have already been created. All of the tasks in this chapter can be performed in MicroStrategy Desktop.

Reasonable means that irrelevant data sets cannot be created. ensuring that business data can be easily and quickly analyzed.) If you are not sure which privileges are assigned to your user name in the MicroStrategy environment. These users can analyze data. while report analysts can manipulate reports without needing to understand the details of creating reports. which can all be performed in a controlled. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide This chapter assumes you are familiar with all the other chapters in this guide. Inc. This environment allows report analysts to work within defined limits.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. including product brands. Report designers design a reporting context or environment in which report analysts can successfully analyze business data. The other chapters contain introductory information on the user experience with basic functionality in the MicroStrategy environment. contact your system administrator. generate new reports from existing reports through drilling. Report analysts are not required to have a thorough understanding of the project. nor can huge amounts of data be retrieved from your data source. a report designer might design a report for the sales department that displays data on the organization’s annual regional revenue. and create quick and easy reports using Report Builder. user-friendly environment. These roles allow a defined group of report designers to be trained on more advanced report functionality. For example. as well as making sure that only reasonable queries are submitted to the database. which can hamper system performance. . The 190 Before you begin © 2006 MicroStrategy. such as those provided to the Administrator role. Before you begin Report designer role This chapter primarily discusses software functionality that is only available to users who have privileges equivalent to Desktop Designer or Web Professional roles in MicroStrategy (or a broader set of privileges.

page 378. Each of these report design methods is described in this chapter: • For more information on creating prompts and adding them to a report. Revenue. drill maps define specific paths for users to navigate through the data. Each user then sees report results specific to how he answered the prompts. you can allow users to drill to various levels on the report. Another report analyst can execute the same report. There are numerous ways to design reports. and Brand on the report. with a drill map in the Brand Revenue by Region report discussed above. see Asking for user input: Prompts. • • © 2006 MicroStrategy. Category. After running a report. For example. A prompted report might allow users to select from certain attribute elements to create their own personalized version of the report. page 115 in Chapter 3.) A report analyst can then execute this report and drill to see details about revenue and profits for only the Northeast region. For information on drill maps. For example. Inc. page 292. see Customizing drill maps. and Revenue Rank by Region. see the Brand Revenue by Region report in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. and view nationwide revenue and profits for a single item in the product line that concerns him. you can design reports that prompt users for an answer about the type of data they want to view. For example. a report analyst might drill from the regional level down to the Call Center level (or store level) to create a new report that displays revenue by call center. see Drilling into related data. for Designers 7 report designer places the attributes Year. drill on a different object on the report. such as Brand. Region. and the metrics Profit. For more information on drilling.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Before you begin 191 . Drilling is a report manipulation method through which the user requests additional information that is directly related to the information available in the current report. (To view this actual report. each one giving users a slightly different data analysis experience. Analyzing Data. before the report is run. A report designer can also add to a report a selection of extra functionality for users.

you need to gather information from your user community. your database administrator. page 334. and your MicroStrategy software. Questions you should have answers to include: • What is the main topic area the report needs to address? In other words. what do users need to know? What level of detail do users need? For example. Gather information about your user audience Ask yourself who the audience is for the report or Report Services document you plan to create. You may already know the answers to several of these questions. sometimes executive level users only want to see a few key metrics of certain data. at a general level. For information on creating a report. page 208. see Calculating data on a report: Metrics. Other analysts may need to see very detailed financial numbers or inventory counts. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide • • For information on creating metrics. • 192 Before you begin © 2006 MicroStrategy. see Creating a grid report. .7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Inc. your project designer. Developing a business query: Best practices Before you create a report. Some suggestions are listed here.

by adding prompts to the report. For details on prompts. so it can be helpful to ask what types of reports they are used to receiving or are currently receiving. and that security filters are in place to control row-level access to data. For all user communities.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. you may need a single report for a group of users. ACLs. A prompt asks users questions about the results they want to see on a report. for Designers 7 • What types of reports do users expect? Higher level executives sometimes have certain expectations on how data is displayed in a report. as well as whether it is important to try to adhere to the style in which data is displayed. For example. Your universe of users may include distinctly different security requirements. Object-level security is performed using ACLs. consider making reports as flexible as possible for each user who executes them. and other security features. and then submits the appropriate report query to the data source. a standard MicroStrategy grid report can be a good style to start with when introducing users to MicroStrategy reports. but that group includes both external and internal users. You must confirm that appropriate security is in place for a report’s underlying objects. some users adopt MicroStrategy so they can read spreadsheets of data more easily. See the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide for details on security filters. For example. Inc. • Who is your universe of users made up of? If your universe of users is extremely diverse. or access control lists. For this reason. but one or both may be under the control of your project designer. page 292. Both security filters and ACLs are generally implemented by your system administrator. determine whether they are willing to learn a new report format or whether it will be easier for them to receive reports in a style they have become used to. Before you begin 193 . and you want to restrict some data from external view. see Asking for user input: Prompts. © 2006 MicroStrategy.

and specifically how the project’s objects reflect the actual data in your organization’s data source. You should make sure the data your organization stores can support the information your users want to analyze in a reporting environment. Since you use these objects to design reports. create a report that shows basic data on the count of customers who purchased those specific products over the past few years. . it is worthwhile to spend some time with your database administrator to address the reliability of the data stored in your data source. you can choose objects to use on reports with full knowledge of the data source tables that data is coming from when the report is executed. If the numbers you see in the report do not come close to what you expected to see. and is it clean? One way to check on the reliability of your data from a user perspective is to create some simple grid reports designed to validate whether your data reflects your understanding of reality. 194 Before you begin © 2006 MicroStrategy. In this way. For example. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Gather information about your data source Data sources are discussed in Understanding your data sources. it can be useful to you to understand your project’s design. if you have a good sense of how many customers own two or three of your organization’s products. Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data. Review this short section if you need an introduction to or refresher on data sources. Questions you should ask include: • Does the data in your data source support what users want? In other words. does your organization gather the data that users want to see reports on? Is your data organized in such a way that it can be used? Is the data reliable. • Gather information about your MicroStrategy project Many of the objects within a project are generally created by the project’s designer when the project is first created.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. page 148 in Chapter 5. Inc.

consider the following approaches to report creation: • Before you create a report or document. search through MicroStrategy to see whether a similar report already exists that can serve the same purpose as the report or document you intend to create. • Locate or create time-savers When you have asked the questions above to get a good idea of what information your users need and the data source and project you must rely on to provide that information to users. but some may also be defined by a project’s designer. see the MicroStrategy Project Design Guide. Consolidations and custom groups are just two examples of ways you can present data to your users in a way that does not directly reflect your data source’s storage structure.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. it can help you avoid unnecessary duplication in your MicroStrategy metadata. Inc. This can not only save you time. Before you begin 195 . It is also helpful to know some details about how your project was designed. VLDB properties are usually determined by an administrator. MicroStrategy provides a great deal of flexibility in combining information from your data source into specific objects which reflect the concepts that make sense to your users. What project configuration settings have been set that will affect reports or documents? Ask your project designer about any configuration settings made for the project as a whole. see Adding consolidations and custom groups. because most reports and report objects revert to the project’s settings when no object-specific or report-specific settings override them. page 381. For an introduction to consolidations and custom groups. you or another report designer can create them. for Designers 7 For details on general project design and data modeling. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Questions you should ask about your project include: • Do objects exist in the MicroStrategy metadata which match what users want to see on reports? If not. • What VLDB (Very Large Database) properties have been set? These settings affect how the SQL is written when a report sends a SQL query to your data source.

page 195. page 181 in Chapter 6. PowerPoint. Building a Quick Query for Analysis. Paint. as described in Locate or create time-savers. Allow users to look at your initial document design and provide feedback before you spend a lot of time on the final work. and fine-tuning a complex report. Before you spend time creating. Once you feel confident that your basic report design includes the appropriate objects.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide • Before you create the finished report or document. final report. and you need to create a report quickly. Then send the mock-up to your user community to gather their feedback on its usefulness. MicroStrategy’s Report Builder steps you through the process of quick report creation. formatting. use Microsoft Excel. and you can provide additional functionality for users who will later execute the report to perform data analysis. This can save you valuable time creating a complex. Quick reports can be useful to test out a basic report design concept for a more complex report. For Report Services documents. you can move on to create any additional objects necessary and to create the more complex. In Report Editor you can add. or another tool to create a mock-up of the report or document you intend to design. Inc. when you are finished with Report Builder. While Report Builder itself provides limited access to certain objects and functionality during report creation. it is often useful to perform this feedback step one more time. . which usually involves presentation details. edit. 196 Before you begin © 2006 MicroStrategy. To create a report quickly using Report Builder. Quick report creation: Building a new report If you are already familiar with MicroStrategy objects that are used to create a report. or remove objects freely. you can create a basic report quickly and ask users to provide feedback on its general usefulness in answering their business queries. see Quick report creation: Building a new report. it opens your new report within the Report Editor if you have design privileges. finished report or document that may potentially have to be significantly redone.

Employee Headcount.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. to create a report. how that data is calculated. see Creating a grid report. page 197. you must learn how to create the objects you want. Those objects determine what data is gathered from your data source. page 206. Attributes provide a context for metrics (described below). such as Revenue. such as Product. page 208. Attributes based on the data in your data source should have already been created by your company’s project designer. metrics: A metric is a business measure or key performance indicator. Month. or Probability of Purchase. See Calculating data on a report: Metrics. © 2006 MicroStrategy. See Filtering data on a report: Filters. Profit. filters: A filter sifts the data in your data source to bring back the information that answers exactly what you require. page 247. Employee. MicroStrategy objects All reports have specific business objects placed on them. metrics are the calculations performed on data stored in your database. Inc. prompts: A prompt is a question the system presents to a user during report execution. MicroStrategy objects 197 . for Designers 7 To create objects. and reports and documents. the results of which are displayed on a report. • • • The objects you can create in MicroStrategy Desktop fall into one of three groups: schema objects. Objects used on reports include such things as: • attributes: An attribute is a business concept. page 334. application objects. See Providing business context to a report: Attributes. page 292. Therefore. and so on. See Asking for user input: Prompts. From a practical perspective. and how the results are displayed when each report is run. you must first determine whether the objects you want to place on it already exist. see MicroStrategy objects. How the user answers the question determines what data is displayed on the report. To create a report from scratch. If they do not.

they are used to create application objects. Reports and documents are generally created by a report designer. For information on how to create these types of objects. This chapter describes how to create these types of objects. Inc. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide • Schema objects: Schema objects are generally created by a project designer and include such things as facts. • • 198 MicroStrategy objects © 2006 MicroStrategy. Application objects are generally created by a report designer and are built from schema objects. if you own the MicroStrategy Report Services product) are built from application objects. Application objects: These objects are used to create reports.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. see the MicroStrategy Project Design Guide. Samples of each type of application object are located in the Public Objects folder in the Tutorial project. Schema objects are building block objects. hierarchies. Reports and documents are the objects that display the results calculated from your data for analysis purposes. and transformations. Report and document objects: Reports (and documents. . This chapter describes how to create these types of objects. attributes.

Inc. The image below shows the default projects that appear under the project source MicroStrategy BI Developer Kit in Desktop. and their related icons. so you can quickly identify objects you want to use in the MicroStrategy interface: Application objects must be created and saved within a project before they can be used on reports. a project in MicroStrategy is the environment in which all related reporting is done. Take a moment to familiarize yourself with the icons for application objects and reports. MicroStrategy projects Conceptually. MicroStrategy objects 199 . for Designers 7 The objects in each group. if all default installation options were accepted © 2006 MicroStrategy. are shown in the following diagram.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries.

attributes that provide context for the metric data. For interface-specific information on report objects. . metrics that calculate the data. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. metrics. Projects generally also contain other schema objects and application objects. and prompts. Inc. A typical project contains reports. The image below shows the MicroStrategy Tutorial project expanded in Desktop. The projects in the image below include Enterprise Manager Demo. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide during MicroStrategy installation. For detailed information on and examples of other report objects. filters to qualify the report data. and mathematical functions.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. This chapter introduces you to basic attributes. and My First Project. Objects 200 MicroStrategy objects © 2006 MicroStrategy. and some of the folders containing objects within the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. MicroStrategy Tutorial. filters. click Help in MicroStrategy Desktop or Web.

for Designers 7 within a selected folder (in this case.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. the folder called Regional Sales Managers) appear on the right side of the Desktop screen. metrics. Inc. you can use the Tutorial project with the procedures in this chapter to learn how to create the various report objects in MicroStrategy. Generally. thus creating reports for business users to run and analyze. a report designer places various MicroStrategy objects such as filters. and attributes on reports. For © 2006 MicroStrategy. If you do not have a working project yet. MicroStrategy objects 201 .

see About sample data. Inc. Introduction to Reporting. Steps to create several types of objects are in this chapter. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide information about what the Tutorial project is and how to access it. In MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. These objects define what business data will be displayed in any report on which the objects are placed.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. 202 MicroStrategy objects © 2006 MicroStrategy. you use editors and wizards to create and save the report-related objects you intend to use on reports. you must have objects to place on the report. page 5 in Chapter 1. Creating and saving objects Before you create a report to display your business data. .

Within the Metric Editor. you use the Metric Editor. prompts. the Metric Editor is shown below. Inc. you might define the metric as the difference between Profit and Cost. and you might name this metric Revenue. For example. you define all the details about that object. MicroStrategy objects 203 . Using the object’s editor or wizard. Separate editors exist for filters. for Designers 7 Object editors and wizards Each object type that you create in MicroStrategy has its own editor or wizard to make object creation straightforward. reports. to create a metric. The mathematical calculation and the name are both part of this new metric’s definition. For example.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. and so on. © 2006 MicroStrategy.

Filter Editor. In this way. and select the type of object to create. If you right-click an object instead of within an empty area in the right side of Desktop. the New option is not available. select New. and Prompt Generation Wizard are accessible from MicroStrategy Desktop. In this way you create a shortcut object. The Metric Editor. but is saved in an inconvenient location. and select the type of object to create. The object’s editor or wizard opens. The Report Editor is accessible from both Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. you can create a link. calculated. click the drop-down arrow on the Create a new object icon. Building a Quick Query for Analysis. The SQL determines the appropriate data to be gathered. page 181 in Chapter 6. Inc. and select the type of object to create. On the toolbar. For steps to do this. If an object you want to use on a report already exists in the project. such as a report or a filter. which can be saved in a location more convenient for you. the objects you create and place on a report determine the results a user sees when he runs the completed report. or shortcut. the definition you gave to that object becomes part of the report’s definition. Ways to create objects You can use any of the following methods to create new objects in Desktop: • On the File menu. and in turn affects the SQL that is sent to your data source when the report is run.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. The object’s editor or wizard opens. The object’s editor or wizard opens. and displayed on this report. select New. . for Designers Basic Reporting Guide When the saved object is placed on a report. Right-click in an empty area in the right side of Desktop. to the existing object. see Quick object access: Creating shortcuts to objects. • • 204 MicroStrategy objects © 2006 MicroStrategy.

you only have to modify the original object and these changes are reflected in all shortcuts linked to this object. MicroStrategy objects 205 . the Save As dialog box opens. The original object is displayed in the editor. filters. where you specify a name and a location where the object is to be saved. see the following sections of this chapter to create the objects you need to place on reports. Shortcuts also make project maintenance easier by eliminating the need to maintain numerous duplicate copies of objects. Creating shortcuts to objects in different locations facilitates access to these objects without having to duplicate them. Shortcut objects make navigating among objects easy and quick. The default save location is the folder in which you were working when you opened the object’s editor or wizard. because you can locate specific report objects in the most useful folders within a project. On the toolbar. If your project does not yet contain objects. Because a new shortcut object must be based on an existing object. You can also edit the original object by right-clicking one of its shortcuts and selecting Edit. you can save objects in the following ways: • • • • From the File menu. which is simply a shortcut to an existing object. other objects must already exist in your project. such as reports. When you save an object for the first time. and so on.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Quick object creation The quickest way to create an object is to create a shortcut object. click the Save button. when you want to change any properties of an object. select Save As. select Save. © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Designers 7 Ways to save objects Depending on the object editor or wizard you are using. click the Save and Close button. Inc. From the File menu. Shortcut objects are stand-alone objects in MicroStrategy that represent links to other objects. On the toolbar. Using shortcuts. metrics.

you should choose attributes that make sense together when they are on the same report. when you place attributes on a report. see Quick object access: Creating shortcuts to objects. the report displays your company’s revenue for each region. When executed. Building a Quick Query for Analysis. For details on accessing the Tutorial project. you have a report containing the Month. knowing where and when the sales took place provides the kind of analytical depth users require on a daily basis. 206 Providing business context to a report: Attributes © 2006 MicroStrategy. Providing business context to a report: Attributes Attributes are the business concepts reflected in your stored business data in your data source. If you remove the attributes from the report. page 181 in Chapter 6. page 5. Because of the attributes on the report. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide For steps to create shortcuts to existing objects. as well as a Revenue metric. As you can see from the examples above. . For example. If you do not already have a company project running. Inc. and Region attributes. Attributes are created by the project designer when an organization’s project is first created. a substantial amount of information is available. Year. Attributes provide a context in which to report on and analyze business facts or calculations. you can use the sample Tutorial project that comes with MicroStrategy. including which regions produced the least revenue and which years saw the highest growth in revenue. While knowing your company’s total sales is useful. during each month and year for which data is available. see About sample data. you can only find out how much revenue the company made in total.7 Building Query Objects and Queries.

To find the Tutorial project in MicroStrategy Web. Details include the data source tables from which data is collected when this attribute is used on a report and that report is executed. page 3. Inc. see Starting MicroStrategy Desktop. Then select Blank Report. page 341. see your MicroStrategy project designer or the MicroStrategy Project Design Guide. as follows: • In Desktop: In the Tutorial project. In Web: In the Tutorial project. Then open the Attributes folder and explore the various attributes within each folder. Providing business context to a report: Attributes 207 . The Report Editor opens. • For more details on creating attributes. the Attribute Editor opens with that attribute’s details displayed. open the Schema Objects folder. Use the appropriate procedure below to locate the Tutorial project: • • To find the Tutorial project in MicroStrategy Desktop. page 2. 2 Browse to the attributes folder. Adding attributes to a report To add one or more attributes to a new or existing report.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Select Attributes and explore the various attributes within each folder. for Designers 7 To see sample attributes in the Tutorial project 1 Log in to MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. If you double-click any attribute. © 2006 MicroStrategy. see Starting MicroStrategy Web. select Create Report. see Reports: Adding attributes to a report.

metrics are the calculations performed on data stored in your database. so that meaningful business analysis can be performed on the results. 208 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. metrics define the analytical calculations to be performed against data that is stored in the data source. Specifically. . Most of the decisions you make about the other objects to include on a report depend on the metrics you use on the report. the results of which are displayed on a report. Questions such as “What were the sales for the eastern region during the fourth quarter?” or “Are inventory counts being consistently replenished at the beginning of each week?” can easily be answered by metrics. Metrics are similar to formulas in spreadsheet software. It is not an overstatement to say that the focus of almost any report is its metrics. A metric is made up of data source facts and the mathematical operations to be performed on those facts. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Calculating data on a report: Metrics Metrics are MicroStrategy objects that represent business measures and key performance indicators. From a practical perspective. Metric creation is usually the responsibility of advanced analysts.7 Building Query Objects and Queries.

© 2006 MicroStrategy. The Metric Editor opens. The Metric Editor is accessible from MicroStrategy Desktop and is shown in the image below: To access the Metric Editor 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. select Empty Metric and click OK. from the File menu.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Inc. and to edit existing metrics. 2 If you are prompted to select a metric type. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 209 . and select Metric. for Designers 7 Viewing and working with metrics: The Metric Editor You use the Metric Editor to create and save metrics. select New.

When you define the components that make up a metric and then adjust any specific settings for the metric. and transformation (if any). Metric formula: A metric’s formula is made up of a mathematical function and the business facts stored in your data source. A metric’s formula can also consist of other metrics. Components of a metric The pieces. plus any software settings applied to the metric. you create a definition for that metric. Inc. level. and so on. or components. Metric expression: A metric’s expression is made up of all the metric components displayed when a metric is opened in the Metric Editor: formula (described above). for Designers Basic Reporting Guide To open an existing metric in the Metric Editor 1 Double-click any metric within the MicroStrategy software to open that metric in the Metric Editor and see the metric’s definition. Metric definition: A metric’s definition includes the metric’s expression. Then expand the Metrics folder. the business context in which to calculate the formula. • In the Tutorial sample project. expand the Public Objects folder. All of the terms presented in the definitions above are described in the following pages. Double-click any metric within the Metrics folder. 210 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. . It is useful to understand their relationship to each other if you want to develop a logical approach to creating metrics. condition (if any).7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Metrics terminology The following terms are used throughout this guide and the Advanced Reporting Guide to describe aspects of metrics. of a metric include such things as the metric’s mathematical formula.

and thus the results to be displayed when that metric is placed on a report and the report is executed. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 211 . The following examples of metrics show these different formula options: © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Designers 7 A metric definition contains some components that are required. which determines the data to be used from your data source and the calculations to be performed on that data.) The metric formula above calculates the sum of all costs recorded in the data source. (Facts are one type of business data. to determine a measure of a company’s expenditures. which includes a mathematical function business level at which to calculate the formula Both required metric components are described below. An example of the formula of a metric is Sum(Cost) where Cost is a fact stored in the data source. The components you decide to include in the metric’s definition are based on the calculations you want to be performed on the data in your data source. Required metric components All metrics require the following components as part of the metric’s definition: • • mathematical formula. typically numeric. A metric formula can be made up of facts in the data source (as in the example above). business attributes in the data source. Mathematical formula A metric definition must contain a formula. stored in a data source. or other metrics that have already been created.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Inc. and some components that are optional.

• Metric made up of attributes: Count(Employee) This metric’s formula counts the total number of company employees recorded in the data source. because metrics within a metric are displayed in bold font in the Metric Editor. and then subtracts the cost total from the profit total. The image below shows the metrics Cost and Profit. . which make up the definition of the new metric being created.) • Metric made up of other metrics: [This month’s profit] . then divides the result by last month’s profit to determine the percent difference in profit from last month. Existing metrics can be part of a newly created metric’s formula. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide • Metric made up of facts: (Sum(Profit) Sum(Cost)) This metric’s formula adds all profits recorded in the data source. 212 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy.[Last month’s profit] / [Last month’s profit] This metric’s formula subtracts last month’s profit (a metric) from this month’s profit (another metric). You can easily identify metrics within a metric. adds all costs recorded in the data source. as opposed to facts or attributes within a metric. Inc. and thus they become part of the new metric’s definition. see Providing business context to a report: Attributes.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. (For a definition of an attribute. page 206.

The function is part of the formula. What this means is that. the functions are Sum and Count.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. In the © 2006 MicroStrategy. a metric’s formula is included in the SELECT clause of a SQL statement. page 226. In the examples above. when you drag a fact into the metric’s Definition pane the system automatically adds Sum to the definition. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 213 . The default function for every formula made up of attributes is Count. in the Metric Editor. and the data results of such a formula would simply be the extensive list of all the costs or profits ever recorded in the tables in your data source. for Designers 7 A metric that contains other metrics is called a compound metric. If you are familiar with SQL syntax. Inc. a metric formula might consist solely of the Cost fact or the Profit fact. If a formula did not have a function. Compound metrics are discussed in Metrics made up of metrics: Compound metrics. The default function for every formula made up of facts is Sum. Function Most metrics must also have a mathematical function as part of the metric formula.

the Cost fact was dragged from the Object Browser’s list of facts on the left. and examples for every function available in MicroStrategy. 214 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. See the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide for information on creating your own functions. . for Designers Basic Reporting Guide image below. syntax.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. MicroStrategy provides over a hundred functions that can be a part of all calculations. Inc. You can also create your own functions. of course. you can change the function. See the MicroStrategy Functions Reference for usage information. see the Advanced Metrics chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. whether simple or complex. into the Definition pane on the bottom right: Once your formula is in the Metric Editor. For examples of commonly used metric functions.

therefore. For example. If you add the attribute Year. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 215 . or lost due to lost sales leads last quarter? Revenue data alone is meaningless without at least one business attribute to provide context to the metric data.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. for Designers 7 Providing context: Calculating metrics in the real world A metric’s formula must be calculated within the context of a business concept. a report with the metric called Revenue on it could show a list of company revenue — but in what context? Revenue generated by a particular salesperson. page 206. must be calculated in relation to some attribute if the metric is to have meaning on the report. every metric definition must include a reference to the attribute that you want to provide context to the metric’s calculation of data. A metric. For example. Level of calculation for a metric As noted above. is revenue calculated and displayed by month? Or is it calculated and displayed by year? © 2006 MicroStrategy. or by your company’s top five best-selling products? Revenue earned last year. a metric must be calculated within the context of a business attribute . on a report containing the Revenue metric and the attributes Month and Year. For more information on attributes. Therefore.but which attribute? Most reports contain more than one attribute. Inc. revenue for the current year makes sense. see Providing business context to a report: Attributes.

at what level is the Revenue metric calculated? Is it calculated at the higher-level Year attribute or the lower-level Month attribute? To understand an attribute’s level. Month.7 Building Query Objects and Queries.S. picture a hierarchy of related business attributes. Inc. suppose that your company is an Internet-based retailer and has its call centers all over the U. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Another way to ask this question is. The highest level attribute is usually the attribute that reflects the most-inclusive business concept. An example is shown below: The example above shows a hierarchy of all the attributes that relate to the business concept of Time. because it appears above those other attributes. Day is the lowest-level attribute and reflects the least-inclusive business concept. The related business attributes within this idea of 216 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. (These attributes and this hierarchy are part of the sample Tutorial project. . In this hierarchy.S. In another example. Your company therefore stores its employee data in your data source within the concept of geographical regions within the U.) The attribute Year is higher than Quarter. or Day.

a metric is calculated by default at the level of the lowest-level attribute that is on the report. for Designers 7 geographical region become part of the Geography hierarchy.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 217 . at the level of the attribute on the report in which the metric is placed. a metric is calculated at the report level. A metric’s level (sometimes called dimensionality) determines the level at which the metric is calculated. that is. An example using sample data from the Tutorial project is shown below: In the Geography hierarchy above. as is generally the case. By default. a report shows your company’s © 2006 MicroStrategy. The lowest level is usually the attribute that reflects the least-inclusive business concept. For example. Country is the highest-level attribute and Employee is the lowest-level attribute. every metric must have a level as part of its definition. Inc. When more than one attribute is on a report. Therefore.

or lower-level. Is the Revenue metric going to be summed up and displayed by year? Or is it going to be summed up and displayed by month? The metric results by default are calculated to reflect monthly sales data. the level appears as Level (Dimensionality) = Report Level. If the default level is changed. The report therefore contains the Revenue metric and the attributes Year and Month. the level at which a metric is calculated is displayed in the Metric Editor in two places: • In the lower Definition pane at the end of the metric’s formula. In the upper pane of the Metric Editor. Determining calculation level In MicroStrategy. the name of the attribute that represents the new level appears between the curly braces. concept than Year. • Following are examples of metric formulas with the level displayed at the end of the formula: Sum(Revenue . The default metric level appears as {~}. 218 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. since Month is a less-inclusive.Cost)){~+} The {~+} means that the metric is calculated at the level of the lowest attribute on the report. the level appears within curly braces. Inc. which is the default calculation level for a metric.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide revenue listed by month and year.Cost){~+} Sum(Abs (Revenue . . as shown in the image below.

Metrics that do not use a level Certain types of metrics can only have a level applied to their constituent parts. In a report that shows Revenue. This metric’s level appears in the Metric Editor as: Revenue {Year} For more information on attributes. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 219 . page 226 for a description and examples of these types of metrics. Inc. and Month. Several arithmetic operators appear in many of the examples above.) and redefine the level as Year. and detailed examples. These restricted metrics are called compound metrics. See Metrics made up of metrics: Compound metrics. see Providing business context to a report: Attributes. The metric then calculates at the Year level. for Designers 7 Of course. Optional metric components Arithmetic operators A metric’s formula can also contain one or more arithmetic operators. For more complex metrics with various levels. and the report results display yearly sales data. page 206. Year. the level at which a metric is calculated can be changed. see the Advanced Metrics chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. An arithmetic operator is easily added to a © 2006 MicroStrategy. which means the metric on the report measures revenue by year and month.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. you might change the Revenue metric’s level from the default of Month (which is the level of the lowest attribute on the report. not to the metric as a whole.

A condition is not required in a metric’s definition. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide metric’s definition in the Metric Editor. but you want to restrict payroll numbers to contractors’ payroll only. A filter applied this way screens only the data related to that individual metric. In this context. overtime. You decide you want to see the same metric calculations on the same data. You can create a filter consisting of Employee=Contractor and Region=Northwest. you have a report that displays monthly operations data. This report provides a good overall view of your monthly numbers. the filter is called a condition and the metric to which the filter is applied is called a conditional metric. . and your results appear and are calculated for only the data that your filter specifies.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. A filter is a condition placed on data from your data source. such as operating income. Inc. You can also apply a filter directly to an individual metric on a report. You then apply this filter to the report. A filter placed on a report as a whole screens overall report data. The common arithmetic operators can be selected from the toolbar at the top of the Definition pane. For example. and only for your subsidiaries in the northwest region. payroll. as identified in the image below: Conditionality When you filter data in your data source. The filter becomes part of that metric’s definition. and so on. this is an 220 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. you screen a broad set of data and extract the specific information you want to see.

if one exists. January 2007. For example. when the report is run the Sales metric ignores the report filter (January 2007) and uses its own condition (2007) to calculate and display the sales for the entire year 2007. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 221 . and Sales. However.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. By creating a condition for the Year=2007 and adding it to the Sales metric’s definition. Applying conditionality to a metric forces the calculation of a metric to be qualified by the metric’s filter irrespective of what is specified in the report filter. Inc. so that users only see data for January. You want this one metric to ignore the filter on the report. you create a report filter for January 2007 and place it on the report. you want to show all the values for the entire year 2007. open the metric in the Metric Editor by double-clicking the metric you want to see the definition for. Profit. © 2006 MicroStrategy. for one metric. To determine whether a metric has a condition applied to it 1 In Desktop. To apply conditionality to a metric. Sales. 2007 when the report is executed. you want to create a report with multiple metrics: Cost. for Designers 7 optional metric component. You want to apply a time filter. To achieve this. you create a filter and add the filter to the metric’s definition so that only data that meets the filter conditions is included in that metric’s calculation.

Condition = (nothing).7 Building Query Objects and Queries. The condition filters data by looking for only those customers who have purchased a specific item. so this metric has a condition as part of its definition. • In the example below. so this metric has no condition applied to it. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 2 The metric’s condition is shown in the upper pane of the Metric Editor: • In the example below. . Inc. Condition = [Customers who bought Reference Item]. 222 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. While you can only use one filter on a metric. that single filter can contain multiple filtering criteria.

Transformations are generally added to metrics that are designed to do time-series analysis. See Metrics made up of metrics: Compound metrics. refer to the Advanced Metrics chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. you have created a transformation metric. as well as additional examples on conditionality. you create a metric to calculate revenue. When a transformation is created and applied to a metric. Transformation A transformation applies offset values. If you add a transformation named Month to Date to that metric. or month-to-date.” to a metric on a report. see Filtering data on a report: Filters.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Inc. the new metric (a © 2006 MicroStrategy. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 223 . for Designers 7 For details on filters generally and on creating various types of conditions for filters. Transformations are schema objects. page 226 for a description and examples of these types of metrics. For information to create and use a conditional metric. to compare values at different times. For example. such as this year versus last year. and details on how conditional metrics interact with report filters. not to the metric as a whole. so you must have the appropriate privileges to create or modify them. Transformations are created as a separate object and then added to a metric. These restricted metrics are called compound metrics. for example. information on conditional metrics with multiple conditions and levels. Metrics that do not accept a condition Certain types of metrics can only have a level applied to their constituent parts. A transformation is not required in a metric’s definition. A transformation metric is a metric that assumes the properties of the transformation applied to it. Transformations are useful for discovering and analyzing time-based trends in your data. such as “four months ago. page 247. this is an optional metric component.

or the sum of revenue this month. open the metric in the Metric Editor by double-clicking the metric you want to see the definition for. . Inc. The following image illustrates this example: Any transformation can be included as part of the definition of a metric. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide transformation metric) calculates month to date revenue. and multiple transformations can be applied to the same metric. 224 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. up to today’s date. To determine whether a metric has a transformation applied to it 1 In Desktop.

• In the example below. Transformation = (nothing). Inc. [Month to Date]. as illustrated in the images below: • In the example below. © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Designers 7 2 If the metric has a transformation. The transformation calculates and displays last year’s revenue up to today’s date. Transformation = [Last Year’s]. it is shown in the upper pane of the Metric Editor. so this metric has no transformation applied to it. so this metric has a transformation as part of its definition. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 225 .Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries.

see Smart totals. not to the metric as a whole. not to the metric as a whole. and for more information on metrics that use transformations.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. and /) . conditions. Metrics that do not accept a transformation Certain types of metrics can only have a transformation applied to their constituent parts. see the MicroStrategy Project Design Guide. see the MicroStrategy Functions Reference. *. These metrics are called compound metrics. For information on creating transformations. These restricted metrics are called compound metrics. refer to the Advanced Metrics chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. it that compound metrics can use smart totals. 226 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. . Inc. • Each of these compound metric types is described with examples below. (For details on the all functions available in MicroStrategy. condition. page 240. -.) A metric is a compound metric if it consists of two or more existing metrics joined by an arithmetic operator (+. For more information on smart totals. page 226 for a description and examples of these types of metrics. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide For details to use a transformation with a metric. which includes OLAP functions and scalar functions. If a metric contains any of the following elements. and transformations applied to its individual parts: • A metric is a compound metric if it uses a non-group function. it is a compound metric and can only have levels. One advantage compound metrics have over simple metrics. Metrics made up of metrics: Compound metrics Certain types of metrics can only have a level. Smart totals define the evaluation order for the final calculation. or transformation applied to their constituent parts. See Metrics made up of metrics: Compound metrics.

condition. conditionality. it is a compound metric because it contains a non-group function. The compound metric’s formula contains a non-group function. As described above. The Cost metric is part of the definition of the RunningAvg(Cost) compound metric. condition. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 227 . Running Average.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Running Average. or transformation with a compound metric. or transformation to the Cost metric within the RunningAvg(Cost) compound metric. and transformation) in the upper pane because you cannot use a level. In the example below. Compound metric with an arithmetic operator The following example shows a compound metric that uses an arithmetic operator to create a metric formula out of existing metrics: Sum(Cost) + Sum(Profit) © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Designers 7 Compound metric with a non-group function The following example shows a compound metric that uses a non-group function: RunningAvg(Cost) where Cost is a metric. The same metric is shown in the Metric Editor in the image below. Inc. you can only apply a level. Notice that you cannot see the metric components (level. It also contains the Cost metric (in bold) as part of its formula.

The same metric is shown in the Metric Editor in the image below. no level. Inc. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide where Cost and Profit are metrics. refer to the Advanced Metrics chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Levels. and you can change the default level for the individual metrics. or transformation exists for the entire compound metric as a whole. Cost and Profit. and transformations cannot be set on a compound metric. It is a compound metric because it contains an arithmetic operator (+) that creates a formula out of two existing metrics. although they can be applied separately on the constituent metrics that make up the compound metric. conditions. While you can see in the upper pane the default report level for each of the constituent metrics. The addition operator (+) between the two metrics makes this a compound metric. 228 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. For more information on compound metrics and examples of compound metrics used in reports. condition. .7 Building Query Objects and Queries.

for Designers 7 Creating a metric You create a metric using the Metric Editor. The Metric Editor opens. in the Object Browser navigate to the Facts folder and locate the Revenue fact. To define the metric’s formula 2 A metric definition must contain a formula. • • If the Object Browser is not visible. and select Metric. When you create a metric. or other metrics to use in the metric’s definition. To create a metric To access the Metric Editor 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. You can also use the Metric Editor to modify an existing metric. To use sample Tutorial data to create a sample metric. you can then include it on a report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. from the File menu. After you create a metric. enable a total or subtotal if you want. facts. from the View menu select Object Browser. page 209. When placed on a report. select New.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. For an image of the Metric Editor. see Reports: Adding metrics to a report. see Viewing and working with metrics: The Metric Editor. Use the Object Browser area on the left side of the Metric Editor to locate attributes. and determine a function for dynamic aggregation if you have the OLAP Services product. For steps to add a metric to a report. • If you are prompted to select a metric type. The Metric Editor is accessible from Desktop. choose Empty Metric and click OK. The following procedure walks you through this process in the Metric Editor. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 229 . Inc. page 344. you define its formula. the metric becomes part of the report’s definition and affects the data displayed each time the report is executed.

page 233. Inc. For steps to use the wizard. including its formula and calculation level. As you create the metric. 4 When you drop the object into the Definition pane. • To use sample Tutorial data. see Easy function creation: The Insert Function Wizard. 6 You can add arithmetic operators by positioning your cursor in the appropriate place within the formula and clicking an operator on the toolbar above the Definition pane. drag and drop the Revenue fact into the Definition pane. You can also use the Insert Function Wizard to easily create a more complex function using a wizard interface. The metric formula appears as follows: Sum(Revenue) {~} 5 You can modify the function by using the Object Browser on the left to navigate to Functions and Operators. 230 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. the default mathematical function is applied automatically to your formula. Double-click on a function in the Object Browser to use it as a replacement for the function in the Definition pane on the right. this Definition pane displays the entire metric definition. Open the folders to see all functions available in MicroStrategy. 7 You can validate your new formula by clicking Validate.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. . for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 3 Drag objects from the Object Browser and drop them in the Definition pane on the lower right side of the Metric Editor.

© 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. page 237 for details on grand totals and subtotals. used to calculate the grand total and the subtotal values you want to be displayed for the metric. such as Sum. select the function from the Total subtotal function drop-down list. Count. To enable subtotals for this metric. shown in the image below: You can determine the aggregation function. Average. for Designers 7 To select a total or subtotal function 8 You apply totals and subtotals on the Subtotals/Aggregation tab in the Metric Editor. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 231 . To enable a grand total for this metric. select the subtotals in the lower left pane and use the arrows to move them to the pane on the right. and so on. See Totals and subtotals.

for example. page 18. see OLAP Services. see the following sections in this chapter: • • • Level of calculation for a metric.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. page 344. page 223 Joins for rank metrics If you create a rank metric. or transformation to your metric. you can define the function to aggregate values by when users move objects off the report grid and into the Report Objects pane. The metric you created can now be added to a report. you must set the metric’s join type to outer. . see the Reports chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. and vice versa. condition. A metric definition can also include a level. If the default inner join is used on a rank metric. For details to set up and use dynamic aggregation. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide To select a dynamic aggregation function for OLAP Services 9 If you have the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product. page 215 Conditionality. name the metric My Revenue Metric. some of the ranks 232 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. For steps. To save your new metric 10 On the Metric Editor’s toolbar. • If you created a sample metric using the sample Tutorial data. condition. see Reports: Adding metrics to a report. Inc. and transformation. and click Save to save the metric in that folder. 1 through 10. which is a metric that ranks attribute elements by numbering them. Dynamic aggregation is only available with the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product. To apply a level. click Save and Close. Then navigate to the My Objects folder. Select the function from the Dynamic aggregation function drop-down list. page 220 Transformation. For an overview of the OLAP services product and dynamic aggregation.

With the wizard. all rows are displayed on the report even if there is no result displayed for some of the elements for some of the metrics on the report. For steps to set a metric’s join type. and any other required parameter. Inc.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. BreakBy parameter. for Designers 7 (and therefore. The wizard helps you locate a function and define its arguments. SortBy parameter. Analyzing Data. see Determining how metric data is combined: Metric join types. you can use any of the functions available in MicroStrategy to include in the formula for a metric. But an element with a null value may have a rank. as shown below: © 2006 MicroStrategy. the ranked attribute elements) may not appear on the report because an inner join does not include elements with null values in the result set. With an outer join. Easy function creation: The Insert Function Wizard An easy way to define a function for a metric’s formula is to use the Insert Function Wizard within the Metric Editor. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 233 . page 89 in Chapter 3. These components of a function are described in the procedure below. You open the Insert Function Wizard using the f(x) button in the Metric Editor.

7 Building Query Objects and Queries. 1 In Desktop. You can access the Functions Reference by clicking Help on any page in the wizard and then clicking the link for the reference. from the File menu. 234 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. open the Metric Editor. The Functions Reference describes and provides examples for every function available in MicroStrategy. To do this. select Empty Metric and click OK. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide To create a function within a metric using the Insert Function Wizard If you want to be able to refer to the details of each function as you use the wizard. The Metric Editor opens. select New. • If you are prompted to select a metric type. and select Metric. Inc. . have the MicroStrategy Functions Reference nearby.

For each argument listed.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. you can select the Profit fact as the argument of the Average function. When you select a function. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 235 . 4 Click Next. example syntax and a description are displayed at the bottom of the wizard. type a value or Browse to find an object to use. click F(x). Required arguments for your chosen function are listed at the bottom of the wizard. for Designers 7 2 From the toolbar above the metric definition pane. © 2006 MicroStrategy. 6 Click Next. The Insert Function Wizard opens. • An argument is the input value of a function. as shown in the image below: 3 Browse through the folders displayed in the left and center panes to locate the function you want to use. you may need to determine arguments for the function. 5 Depending on the function you selected. For example. to calculate the average profit. Inc.

236 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 7 Depending on the function you selected. You can open the Functions Reference by clicking Help and then clicking the link for the reference. Relative functions require a BreakBy parameter. Ascending controls whether the NTiles are ordered in ascending or descending order. Enter a value for the parameter or select one of the parameter’s options from the drop-down list. • The BreakBy parameter restarts the calculation for each attribute or hierarchy designated as a BreakBy parameter. you may need to determine a Sortby parameter for your function. 9 Depending on the function you selected. RunningSum. you may need to determine a BreakBy parameter for your function. Click Add to select the objects to include as SortBy parameters for your function. 10 Click Next. see the MicroStrategy Functions Reference. • The SortBy parameter determines how objects are sorted for the calculation. Examples of relative functions include RunningStdevP. 12 Click Finish to enter your new function into the metric’s expression. while Tiles determines the number of splits. 11 Depending on the function you selected. and NTile. For example. the NTile function requires two parameters. and is required for various functions such as First. Last. Rank.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Inc. 8 Click Next. Then use the sort order arrows to modify the order in which the objects should be used in the calculation. For guidance on parameters for your chosen function. and FirstInRange. . Ascending and Tiles. you may need to define parameters. • Parameters determine the behavior of the function. Click Add to select objects to use as BreakBy parameters for your function.

You must decide what function will be used to calculate a subtotal or grand total for a given metric. in the Tutorial project open the Subtotals report. so that analysts can display them on a report at run time. To see an example of a report with subtotals and a grand total. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 237 . an additional subtotal for each quarter © 2006 MicroStrategy. You can enable several different subtotals from which analysts can choose. Totals and subtotals You can enable subtotals and grand totals for a metric.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. The example below shows subtotals for each region. which is displayed below. depending on their analysis needs. see the MicroStrategy Functions Reference. Inc. for Designers 7 Click Help at the bottom of the wizard to see detailed steps for each option within the wizard. For information on the purpose of functions in a metric expression and the role of arguments and parameters in functions.

Grand totals (usually called totals) and subtotals allow users to control how metrics are further calculated at different levels (such as by quarter. by region.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. count. and so on). . When you enable a total or subtotal for a metric. minimum. 238 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. by year. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide (encompassing all regions). This is just a sample of the report. you select a function by which the metric should be aggregated to display the total or subtotal. You can use one of many standard functions such as total. and a grand total at the bottom of the report. and others. Inc. maximum. and they can be applied dynamically by the analyst to any report on which a metric is used that has the totals or subtotals enabled. standard deviation. not all data is displayed in the image below.

To enable totals or subtotals for a metric 1 In Desktop. Inc. 4 To enable one or more subtotals. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. its definition and syntax appear. 3 To enable a grand total. © 2006 MicroStrategy. select the function to use when the metric displays a grand total on a report. For details on creating your own function. For details on all the options in this Subtotals/Aggregation tab of the Metric Editor.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Applying a grand total or subtotals to a metric The following steps describe the procedure to enable a grand total or subtotals for a metric. The metric opens for editing in the Metric Editor. click Help. for Designers 7 For the full list of functions available. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Click > to move your selections to the Available subtotals for metric list. double-click the metric for which you want to enable a grand total or subtotals. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 239 . You can also create your own functions to be used with subtotal calculations. see the following procedure. When you select a function. select the functions to be available for the subtotal calculations. from the Available project subtotals list. 2 Click the Subtotals / Aggregation tab. from the Total subtotal function drop-down list. 5 Click Save and Close to save the metric with its newly enabled total and/or subtotals. For more advanced information on subtotals.

double-click the metric that contains the subtotals you want to remove. or disable. For example. Inc. 1 In Desktop. see Metrics made up of metrics: Compound metrics. 5 Click Save and Close. subtotals may be irrelevant and should therefore not be displayed on a report. select any subtotals in the Available subtotals for metric list and move them to the Available project subtotals list. Smart totals Smart totals are also referred to as smart metrics. if the metric counts inventory numbers. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide To remove a grand total or subtotals from a metric You may want to remove. use the Allow Smart Metric check box 240 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. Smart totals allow you to change the default evaluation order of a compound metric. 4 To prevent any subtotals from appearing when the metric is used on a report. For example. The metric opens for editing in the Metric Editor. To enable or disable smart metrics. page 226. from the Total subtotal function drop-down list select None. When this metric is used on a report in the future. 2 Select the Subtotals/Aggregation tab. a grand total or subtotals for a particular metric. 3 To prevent a grand total from appearing when the metric is used on a report. .7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Smart totals are used on compound metrics. a smart metric uses the formula Sum (Metric1) / Sum (Metric2) rather than Sum (Metric1/Metric2). For details on what a compound metric is. The smart metric property is available for compound metrics and for some simple metrics which combine two or more calculation formulas with arithmetic operators. Smart totals calculate subtotals on individual elements of the compound metric. the removed totals or subtotals cannot be displayed as part of the report.

Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. see To create a metric. you get the following results. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 241 . the Total value in the last column is incorrect. To calculate a meaningful total value for this metric. page 229. it is displaying a sum of the percentages of the Ratio of Discount to Revenue metric. For example. Year 2005 2006 Revenue $200 $100 Discount $50 $50 Ratio of Discount to Revenue 25% 50% If you choose to display the grand total for the report without using smart totals for the Ratio of Discount to Revenue metric. Year 2005 2006 Total Revenue 200 100 300 Discount 50 50 100 Ratio of Discount to Revenue 25% 50% 75% However. To access this check box. consider the following report. Inc.33% A more complex business example for smart totals is provided in the Advanced Metrics chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. for Designers 7 at the bottom of the Subtotals/Aggregation tab in the Metric Editor. you get the following correct results. enable smart totals by editing them in the Metric Editor and selecting the Allow Smart Metric option. © 2006 MicroStrategy. When you select the Allow Smart Metric check box. Year 2005 2006 Total Total Sales 200 100 300 Discount Sales 50 50 100 Ratio of Discount Sales to Total Sales 25% 50% 33.

see Viewing and working with metrics: The Metric Editor. while profit data appears in a bold green font. page 374. • 242 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. You can apply special formatting to numeric values that appear when a metric is calculated. and date format style. page 209. you can format the metric’s column or row header. You can apply special font styles and sizes. Find and Replace feature: Use this method to format a number of metrics at one time with the same format.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Formatting a metric Metrics can be formatted independently of the report(s) on which they appear. Metric formatting can be performed using either of the following interfaces: • Metric Editor: Use this method to format one metric at a time. For information to format metric data on a report so that the formatting applies to that report only. For specific steps to use the feature. and you can determine cell background colors or patterns. as well as information on each option in the software. Inc. and then click Help. For details on accessing the Metric Editor. you might have all sales data appear in a blue font. such as currency. For example. . percentages. see Formatting metrics on a specific report. This formatting can help analysts more easily identify specific data. Formatting changes made using this method affect the metric no matter which report the metric is included on. and you can also format the data that will appear for that metric. For information about using the Find and Replace feature to format metrics. open the Find and Replace feature from Desktop’s Tools menu. When you format a metric. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.

Borders: Format the report’s borders by adjusting the style and color of the line. as described below: • Numbers: For example. you cannot format the data. 3 Format the metric header or values as desired. display values as dollars and cents.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. and then choose either Headers or Values. or as scientific notation. You can also determine whether the values appear with or without decimal places. as percentages. Backgrounds: Apply a background pattern and color for metric headers and data cells. point to Formatting. 2 On the Tools menu. Inc. You can also make borders disappear. for Designers 7 Formatting a metric’s header and values You can specify formatting properties for a metric’s report header and for the numeric values associated with the metric. Number formatting is only relevant for metric values. 4 Set the number formatting for the metric. Fonts: Format the font and color of data in a cell or metric headers in a report. • • • Alignment: Control vertical and horizontal alignment of data within a cell. © 2006 MicroStrategy. The Format Cells dialog box opens. If a number appears in your report results that does not reflect a metric calculation. such as a list of product identification numbers. • To format metric values or headers in Desktop 1 In Desktop. You can format many aspects of a metric cell and the value inside it. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 243 . and configure word wrapping. Click Help to see details on all the options you can use to format report headers and values as you desire. Click Help to see details on all available options. double-click the metric you want to format. The metric opens for editing in the Metric Editor.

The metric opens for editing in the Metric Editor. border or background as you desire. Click Help to see details on all the available options. Include strings that always appear with the calculated value. • • • To create a custom metric format in Desktop 1 In Desktop. Click Help to see a table of formatting symbols you can use and examples you can replicate. 06 or 01h 32m. Inc. select Custom. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 5 Format the alignment. Align decimals down a column.”. font. 244 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. 4 Enter your custom format syntax in the drop-down field. Customizing a metric number format You can create a custom format syntax for metric values to be displayed on the report. or truncate the leading zero in a decimal so that 0. and then choose Values. . double-click the metric you want to format. 6 Click OK to save your selections and close the Format Cells dialog box. 7 Click Save to save the metric with your new formatting. such as Feb 3. such as “this month”. The Format Cells dialog box opens. 5 Click OK to save your settings and close the Format Cells dialog box. or “Customer no. point to Formatting. Provide a specialized date or time format. rather than left-aligning or right-aligning. Following are some examples of common customized formatting you can apply to a metric: • Cut off decimal numbers automatically after a certain number of digits. 2 On the Tools menu.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. 3 On the Number tab.2.2 becomes . “sales=”.

see Adding a prompt to a metric’s definition in the Metric Editor. You can make use of prompts in any metric where you want to let each user impact the formula of the metric. Thus. to decide for himself certain aspects of the metric’s formula. The metric opens for editing in the Metric Editor. page 357. use the following high-level steps: 1 Decide what prompt type you need for your metric. For example. To add a prompt to your metric’s definition. the report’s results will reflect the information each user wants to see. page 299. Calculating data on a report: Metrics 245 . The metric is ready to be edited. Inc. you can let each user who executes the report enter the sales tax for his own state. © 2006 MicroStrategy. double-click the metric you want to format. by having the user enter a specific number that makes sense for that user. you include a prompt in the metric’s definition. see Creating a prompt. To do this. 3 Then follow the steps in this chapter to add the prompt to your metric’s definition.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Editing a metric You can open an existing metric in the Metric Editor in Desktop. Asking for user input into a metric’s definition You can allow the user who executes the report that contains the metric. This lets each individual user define the report results he sees. if you create a tax metric that calculates tax numbers on sales. for Designers 7 6 Click Save to save the metric with your custom format. for the appropriate procedure. Prompt types that you can use in a metric definition are listed in the table in Reports: Adding prompts to a report. page 351. 2 Follow the steps in this chapter to create that prompt. 1 In Desktop.

page 239. grouping. page 243. see Customizing a metric number format. and how to use level metrics with filters. • • • • Adding a metric to a report To add one or more metrics to a new or existing report. page 244. page 219. • 246 Calculating data on a report: Metrics © 2006 MicroStrategy. filtering. page 211 or Easy function creation: The Insert Function Wizard. see Reports: Adding metrics to a report. and additional information and examples. . see Required metric components. and transformation metrics. along with additional information and examples. Inc. Additional metric functionality In the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. you build on your knowledge of metrics that you have learned in this guide. see Applying a grand total or subtotals to a metric. how they work with smart subtotals. You learn about creating various types of advanced metrics such as level metrics. To change or add totals or subtotals. page 344. To edit the appearance of a metric or its values.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. as follows: • To change the formula or the function in the formula. see Formatting a metric’s header and values. To change or add an arithmetic operator. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 2 Use the information above for various metric components and types of metrics to edit your metric according to your needs. non-aggregatable metrics. Level metrics: Learn about targets. To create a custom number format. see Optional metric components. page 233. You can find information on the following advanced metrics topics in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide: • Compound metrics: Learn details about compound metrics.

because you can copy parts of an existing filter’s definition when creating a new filter. page 104. Filtering data on a report: Filters 247 . This can be a useful way to create an effective filter. data type. how they work with report filters. and byte length. Metric creation using Command Manager: Learn how to automate the metric creation process. Metric functions: Learn how to use various functions that are particularly useful or commonly used in metrics. © 2006 MicroStrategy. a filter is equivalent to the WHERE clause in a SQL statement. • • • • • • Filtering data on a report: Filters A filter is the part of a MicroStrategy report that screens data in your data source to determine whether the data should be included in or excluded from the calculations of the report results. A brief introduction to filters is provided for report analysts in Chapter 4. Custom plug-in functions: Learn how to use custom functions to make a metric relevant to your business environment. for Designers 7 • Conditional metrics: Learn about conditional metrics with multiple conditions and with metric levels. User-defined subtotals: Learn about these custom subtotals by following the detailed examples. such as the column name as it appears in the SQL for a report. Answering Questions about Data. Review this information if you are new to creating report filters. Metric-specific VLDB properties: Learn how to use certain VLDB (Very Large Database) properties in MicroStrategy to customize the SQL queries to your database. and additional information and examples. Metric column aliases: Learn about the information you can change for a metric. You can even use an existing filter within a newly created filter. If you are familiar with SQL syntax.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Inc. in the section Filtering data. It describes how to view a filter’s definition for a given report.

For example. such as on a metric. You place the Delivery Location and Delivery Time attributes on your report. and February 2005. the data displayed when the report is executed is limited to that geographical region and season. A filter placed on a metric only filters data related to that metric. so reports show users what they really need to see. and using that filter on the report. Inc. However. You also place the Number of Reported Injuries metric on the report. You also want to know the time of day when most injuries occurred. you would have to sift through a lot of report data on your own.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. to filter all the data the report would otherwise retrieve from the data source and display to users. which shows a table of data filtered by three different filters. It is important to design the correct filter to retrieve the desired data. you want to determine the number of injuries to your delivery personnel in 2005 that may have been due to bad winter weather in the northeastern U. When used on a metric. January 2005. By creating a filter that includes Northeast Region. . filters can also be used with a specific object on a report. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Filters are helpful in clarifying large quantities of data and only displaying subsets of that data. In another example. Without a filter. a filter essentially “goes with” the metric so that 248 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. Each filter returns a different result set. Filters are most commonly used on reports. Filters ensure that the report results contain only the data that answers the specific business query the report was designed to answer. But you only want the report to display injuries in your northeast region during the winter of 2005.S. consider the following diagram.

page 5 in Chapter 1. A note on terms: filter. Creating or editing filters: The Filter Editor You can create and save a filter using the Filter Editor. for example. Understanding how to create a filter is an important skill in making the best use of the data in your data source.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Qualifications define the conditions that the data must meet to be included in a report. Filtering data on a report: Filters 249 . page 226. "Region = Northeast" or "Revenue > $1 million". For information on the Tutorial project and how to access it. (This type of metric is called a conditional metric. the filter is always part of that metric. see Metrics made up of metrics: Compound metrics. for Designers 7 whatever report the metric is placed on. condition A filter is composed of one or more qualifications.) Filters are an important part of almost all reports. This section describes the different types of filters available in MicroStrategy and shows you how to create a simple filter of each type. For details on using operators to join filter qualifications. or you can view the saved samples in the Tutorial project. see Joining filter qualifications with operators. You can also use the Filter Editor to modify an existing filter. Introduction to Reporting. qualification. The Filter Editor is accessible from MicroStrategy Desktop. see About sample data. the qualifications are joined by an arithmetic operator such as AND or NOT. If a filter contains more than one qualification. You can follow the steps presented in this chapter to create filters. Basic knowledge of formal logic is useful in understanding report filters and their concepts. For details. Inc. page 281. but it is not a prerequisite to learn how to create filters. Many of the reports and filters used as examples in this section already exist in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. © 2006 MicroStrategy.

double-click in the Filter definition pane at the top right. The Filter Editor opens. 2 To see the various types filters you can create. The Filter Editor is shown in the image below. Inc.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. with the Filtering Options pane displayed: 250 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. on the File menu point to New. The Filtering Options pane opens. click OK. . • If you are prompted with the New Filter dialog box. and then choose Filter. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide To access the Filter Editor 1 In Desktop.

see the appropriate section below. and then specify the information that is required for the type of filter you are creating. and so on. and Birth Date. Last Name.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. the attribute Customer has the elements John Smith. see page 253. The results show a list of customers whose last names start with the letter H. • For example. Types of filters When you open the Filter Editor and double-click in the Filter definition pane at the top right. Filters data related to a business attribute’s elements. Filter Name Attribute form qualification Create a filter based on attribute forms. page 251 to determine which kind of filter you need. © 2006 MicroStrategy. the operator Begins With. Filter types include the following: Filter Type Attribute qualifications These types of qualifications restrict data related to attributes on the report. and the letter H. for Designers 7 To create a filter. For steps to include a filter on a report. such as ID or description. William Hill. You select a filter type from this list. double-click on the filter in MicroStrategy. see page 258. • For example. Then follow the related procedure for the filter type you choose to create. After you create a filter. Inc. a filter becomes part of the report’s definition and affects the data displayed each time the report is executed. For details. Attribute element list qualification Create a filter based on attribute elements. First Name. or some other report object. Address. Jane Doe. a metric. Washington. For details on each option in the software. you can then include it in a report. To edit a filter. When placed on a report. such as New York. click Help. Filtering data on a report: Filters 251 . see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. seeTypes of filters. The filter opens within the Filter Editor. For details. which are elements of the attribute City. the attribute Customer has the forms ID. An attribute form qualification might filter on the form Last Name. An attribute element list qualification can filter data to display only those customers that you specify in the qualification. page 346. and San Francisco. For details on each filter type. a list of filter types appears in the Filtering Options pane. What Data It Is Designed To Filter Filters data related to a business attribute’s form(s).

in a report. or with additional conditions. rank. • For example. and adding a new filter qualification for Month of Year = December. filters can also 252 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. • For example. filter as part of report This chapter primarily describes how to create stand-alone filters. You can also create advanced qualifications such as attribute-to-attribute qualifications and prompted filters. For details. Uses the result set of an existing report as is. • For example. Relationship set qualification Create a filter based on relationships between attributes. A stand-alone filter is a filter created as an independent MicroStrategy object. refer to the Advanced Filters chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. or percentage of a metric. • For example. see page 278. What Data It Is Designed To Filter Filters data related to a set of attributes that are determined based on the metrics associated with those attributes. However. as well as on metrics and other objects. Filter Name Metric set qualification Create a filter based on metric value or rank. For details. For details. you might use a shortcut-to-a-report qualification by taking the result set of one report showing all customers in the Southwest region. in MicroStrategy. For more information on all types of advanced filters. a relationship set qualification might filter data to display those stores selling Nike shoes in the Washington. or with additional conditions. Stand-alone filter vs. Shortcut qualifications These types of qualifications restrict data related to existing report results or an existing filter. or based on the relationships between the attributes on the report. see page 273. placing it in a report. Shortcut-to-a-filter qualification Create a filter based on an existing filter. Shortcut-to-a-report qualification Create a filter based on the results of an existing report. a metric set qualification might filter data to display sales data for only those products with an inventory count below a specified number. DC area. The stand-alone filter can then be used on many different reports. you might use a shortcut-to-a-filter qualification by taking an existing filter for Region = Northeast and Year = 2006. . for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Filter Type Set qualifications These types of qualifications restrict data based on the value. see page 267. placing that result set as a filter into a new report. see page 270. Filters data based on a specific relationship between two attributes. Uses an existing filter as is. For details. adding a new filter qualification for active customers in the current year. Inc.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. as a filter in a different report. and displaying all currently active customers in the Southwest region.

Report filters are saved with the report’s definition. Inc. attributes are chosen to build the report. a report filter cannot be used on any other report. Filtering data on a report: Filters 253 . 2006 and 2007 are elements of the Year attribute . Therefore. For a report containing the attributes Region. However. the attribute’s elements are displayed in the rows or columns. On a report. and Income Range.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. These kinds of filters are generically called report filters. you use an attribute qualification. Both stand-alone filters and report filters accomplish the same results: the filter’s qualifications determine the data to use when calculating the data displayed in a report. The filter type called an attribute element list qualification qualifies (or filters) report data based on a list of attribute elements belonging to an attribute. Filtering data based on business attributes: Attribute qualifications When you want to restrict report data to a certain subset of information. the attribute Customer has elements which are individual customer names. you can use an attribute © 2006 MicroStrategy. see the procedure in Quick report creation: Building a new report. Filtering data based on business attribute elements: Attribute element list qualification The elements of a business attribute are the unique values for that attribute. while New York and London are elements of the City attribute. but once the report is executed. page 196. Attribute qualifications come in two types: attribute element list qualifications and attribute form qualifications. for Designers 7 be created as part of a given report. For example. For example. Customer. a report filter can use any of the qualification types described in this chapter. and your restriction conditions are defined by an attribute’s forms or elements. For an example of a report filter and steps to create one during the report creation process. at the same time the report itself is being created.

To do that. and profit by month for all employees last year. The example after the procedure shows how a report is affected when this filter is applied. However. and then choose Filter. and December. point to New. It uses the sample MicroStrategy Tutorial project. To filter data based on business attribute elements 1 In Desktop. cost. The Filter Editor opens. on the File menu. 3 Select Add an Attribute Qualification and click OK. 2 Double-click in the Filter definition pane at the top right. May. certain months are not representative of the normal business cycle. click OK. Inc. which are elements of the Month attribute. you create an attribute element qualification that excludes the months April.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Creating a filter based on attribute elements This procedure creates an attribute element list qualification based on the example described above. 254 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide element qualification on the attribute Customer to obtain income data for only those customers you specify in your filter’s list. The steps to create this attribute element list qualification are in the procedure below. Attribute element list qualification example You want to create a report that includes the revenue. so they should be excluded from the report calculations. The Filtering Options pane opens. • If you are prompted with the New Filter dialog box. The Attribute Qualification pane opens. .

select Elements. similar to the image below: 5 Create the list of elements from which the user can choose. 255 . To do this. select the attribute.. browse to the Attributes folder and select the Month of Year attribute. for Designers 7 4 Select the attribute that has the elements on which you want to qualify. in other words. and click OK. The Attribute Qualification pane expands. the elements that you want to filter the report’s data for. Drag the attribute from the Object Browser into the Attribute field. In the Open dialog box. navigate to your project’s attributes folder.) to locate the attribute. Browse (click ..Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. 6 From the Operator drop-down list. Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. you can select either In list or Not in list: • In list lets you define what attribute elements the filter should include data for. from the Qualify On drop-down list. You can do this in one of the following ways: • • Type the name of the attribute in the Attribute field and click OK. Inc. • For the Tutorial example described above.

. 12 Navigate to a project folder in which to save the filter. located in Public 256 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Open the Basic Report from the Tutorial project. The filter you created can now be added to a report. and then click > to add them to the Selected objects list. click Add. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. name the filter Month and save it in the My Objects folder. For this example. For this Tutorial example. The Save Filter As dialog box opens. select Not in List. and December. The Select Objects dialog box opens. May. and give the filter a descriptive name so you or other users will be able to use the filter on other reports in the future. Now see what happens to report data when the filter is used on a report. 10 Click OK to close the Attribute Qualification pane. select April. page 346. you created the Month filter which excludes the months April. 13 Click Save. 11 Click Save and Close on the Filter Editor toolbar. May. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide • Not in list lets you define what attribute elements the filter should exclude data for. Inc. 7 To create the list of attribute elements. If you followed the Tutorial example in the procedure above. and December. 8 In the Available objects list. For this Tutorial example. 9 Click OK to close the Select Objects dialog box. For steps. select attribute elements.

and December is not retrieved from © 2006 MicroStrategy. and profit for all months of the year: In the Basic Report. May.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. the data for the months April.) In this filtered report. Use the Object Browser to navigate to where you saved your Month filter. Inc. part of which is shown below. cost. Next. The Basic Report.786. the metrics have different values than in the unfiltered Basic Report. for Designers 7 Objects\Reports\Advanced Reporting Guide. located in Public Objects\Reports\Advanced Reporting Guide. Leanne Sawyer’s contribution to revenue is $316.976. the first region looks like the following image: (If you want to see the filtered report shown above. from the View menu select Design View.Month Report Filter from the Tutorial project. When you re-execute the report. and drag and drop the filter into the report’s filter pane. displays employee revenue. Filtering data on a report: Filters 257 . the data was retrieved from the data warehouse for all months of the year. In the unfiltered Basic Report. In the filtered report. To do this. Sawyer’s contribution to revenue is now $198. open the report named Filter . add your Month filter.

May. For example. As this filtered report shows. create a filter that qualifies on the Last Name form of the attribute Employee. Most attributes only have the forms ID and Description. and the letter H as the value. you can create an attribute form qualification defined with the form Last Name. Attribute form qualifications allow you to filter report data based on an attribute form. the attribute Customer has the forms First Name. E-mail Address. Filtering data based on business attribute forms Attribute forms are additional descriptive information about a business attribute. and December. cost. and profit for all employees. your top revenue-producing employees may be very different if you exclude the months April. For example. the operator Begins With. A form is a descriptive category for any data your organization saves about any of its attributes. Creating a filter based on business attribute forms This procedure creates an attribute form qualification based on the example described above.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. To do this. . It uses the sample MicroStrategy Tutorial project. to return data for only those customers whose last names start with the letter H. You want to view the data of only those employees whose last name begins with the letter B. so the metrics cannot include this data in their calculations. 258 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. The steps to create this attribute form qualification are listed below. Inc. Attribute form qualification example A report includes the revenue. But an attribute can have many other forms. and so on. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide the data warehouse. Last Name. The example after the procedure shows what happens to report data when the filter is used on a report. Address.

for Designers 7 To filter data based on business attribute forms 1 In Desktop. and then choose Filter. Drag the attribute from the Object Browser into the Attribute field • For this Tutorial example. In the Open dialog box. The Attribute Qualification pane opens. © 2006 MicroStrategy. • If you are prompted with the New Filter dialog box. and click OK. choose Customer. navigate to your project’s attributes folder.. The Filtering Options pane opens. 4 Select the attribute whose form you want to qualify data on. 2 Double-click in the Filter definition pane at the top right. Browse (click .Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. The Filter Editor opens. on the File menu.) to locate the attribute. Inc.. Filtering data on a report: Filters 259 . click OK. 3 Select Add an Attribute Qualification and click OK. point to New. select the attribute. You can do this in one of the following ways: • • Type the name of the attribute in the Attribute field and click OK.

click Last Name. Depending on the operator you have selected. 10 Navigate to a project folder in which to save the filter. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide The Attribute Qualification pane expands. For this example. 8 Click OK to close the Attribute Qualification pane. For this Tutorial example. Inc. and give the filter a descriptive name so you or other users will be able to use the filter on other reports in the future. 9 Click Save and Close on the Filter Editor toolbar. 7 In the Value field. you may need to enter multiple values. similar to the image below: 5 From the Qualify on drop-down list. For example. This is the value that will be compared against the data in your data source. the operator Between requires two values.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. type the value to use to qualify on the attribute form. . type B. For the Tutorial example. The Save Filter As dialog box opens. 6 Click an operator in the Operator list. click the attribute form on which you want to qualify the report. click Begins With. 260 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy.

for Designers 7 For this Tutorial example.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. To do this. The filter you created can now be added to a report. page 346. located in Public Objects\Reports\Advanced Reporting Guide. you created the Employee Last Name = B filter which excludes all employees except those whose last name begins with the letter B. Filtering data on a report: Filters 261 . If you followed the Tutorial example in the procedure above. Now see what happens to report data when the filter is used on a report. For steps. shown in the image below. name the filter Employee Last Name = B and save it in the My Objects folder. Open the Basic Report from the Tutorial project. Use the Object Browser to navigate to where you saved your Employee Last © 2006 MicroStrategy. displays all employee revenue: Next. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. 11 Click Save. Inc. The Basic Report. from the View menu select Design View. add your Employee Last Name = B filter.

for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Name = B filter. • If you are prompted with the New Filter dialog box. Creating a filter based on dates This procedure creates a date qualification based on the example described above. and February 12. Inc. For example. point to New. When you re-execute the report. 262 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. on the File menu. To qualify on a date 1 In Desktop. Filtering data based on dates This filter is an attribute form qualification that enables you to filter data based on an attribute with a date data type. 2006.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. The example after the procedure shows what happens to report data when the filter is used on a report. 2006. you can create a date qualification on the Day attribute to return data for only those days between January 1. click OK. It uses the sample MicroStrategy Tutorial project. Use the following procedure to create a date qualification filter. and then choose Filter. it looks like the following image: The report displays the revenue of only those employees whose last names begin with the letter B. and drag and drop the filter into the report’s filter pane. .

Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Filtering data on a report: Filters 263 . You can do this in one of the following ways: • • Type the name of the attribute in the Attribute field and click OK. select an operator. The Attribute Qualification pane expands. select the Day attribute. Browse (click . 4 Select the attribute with a date datatype on which you want to qualify. and click OK.. 3 Select Add an Attribute Qualification and click OK. for Designers 7 The Filter Editor opens. Inc. Drag the attribute from the Object Browser into the Attribute field • For this Tutorial example. select an attribute form. select the attribute. In the Open dialog box. click the ID attribute form. 6 From the Operator drop-down list.) to locate the attribute. For this Tutorial example. The Filtering Options pane opens. 2 Double-click in the Filter definition pane at the top right. © 2006 MicroStrategy. similar to the image below: 5 In the Qualify on drop-down list. navigate to your project’s attributes folder. The Attribute Qualification pane opens..

The filter you created can now be added to reports. use the drop-down buttons to select the date range January 1. 2006. The Date Editor is displayed. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide For this example. 11 Click Save. 7 In the Value field. select Between. The Save Filter As dialog box opens. Select Static date or Dynamic date. for example. depending on the operator you selected. Now see what happens to report data when the filter is used on a report. For steps. A calendar appears. Monday of this week. click Help. 2006 to February 12. 2006. For more information on the Date Editor. Inc. For this example.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. If you followed the Tutorial example in the procedure above. 264 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. name the filter Date Filter and save it in the My Objects Folder. enter a date. Click on a date from the calendar. 9 Click Save and Close on the Filter Editor toolbar. Open the Basic Report from the Tutorial project. or the 3rd Wednesday in May of this year. For this Tutorial example. Click the Calendar icon. . 8 Click OK to close the Attribute Qualification pane. A dynamic date is a fixed offset of the current date. For more information on dynamic dates. You can also enter a date range. and give the filter a descriptive name so you or other users will be able to use the filter on other reports in the future. the fourth of this month. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. 10 Navigate to a project folder in which to save the filter. page 346. Use one of the following methods: • • Click the drop-down button. you created the Date Filter which excludes all data except the data gathered between January 1 and February 12.

displays all employee revenue: © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. The Basic Report. for Designers 7 located in Public Objects\Reports\Advanced Reporting Guide.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Filtering data on a report: Filters 265 . shown in the image below.

and drag and drop the filter into the report’s filter pane. Filtering data based on attribute relationships or metrics: Set qualifications This type of filter allows you to generate data in a report based on a set of attributes. For example. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Next. Use the Object Browser to navigate to where you saved your Date Filter. it looks like the following image: The report displays the revenues of employees for only the specified date range. To do this. When you re-execute the report. The set of attributes is generated dynamically based on either the metrics associated with those attributes or the relationships between the attributes.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. a metric set qualification might limit the data displayed on a report to sales numbers for only those products whose current inventory count falls below a certain 266 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. from the View menu select Design View. add your Date Filter. . Inc.

A metric set qualification lets the manager restrict data based on a set of attributes. see Required metric components. The system must first generate the set of products with the specified inventory count. For an explanation of levels. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. and rank A metric set qualification is additionally defined by an output level and a break by setting. in this case. or rank percentage of a metric associated with the attributes. in this case certain products. Inc. In this example. or rank percentage. The resulting report displays the sales data for only those products with inventory counts below the threshold value. This report does not necessarily display the inventory figures for those products. Filters and metric calculations: Output. then it can generate the subset of those customers without savings accounts. and the break by setting allows you to choose the level at which to restart counting rank or percent values for a metric. for Designers 7 number. Break By. page 211. a store manager wants to see sales numbers for products whose current inventory count falls below a certain level. inventory count below a certain level. based on a metric value. Filtering data based on metric value or rank: Metric set qualification A metric set qualification lets you define the attributes to be used in a filter by restricting the attributes in the set based on the value. A relationship set qualification might limit the data displayed on a report to those bank customers who have checking accounts but not savings accounts. Filtering data on a report: Filters 267 . © 2006 MicroStrategy. For example.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. the system must first generate the set of customers with checking accounts. For more information and examples on output level and break by. then it can generate the sales numbers for that set of products. The output level specifies the level at which the metric is calculated. rank. rank.

The Filtering Options pane opens. on the File menu. To filter data based on a metric value. . • If you are prompted with the New Filter dialog box. and then choose Filter. or rank percentage 1 In Desktop. rank. click OK. point to New. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide You can also designate a level at which to stop counting rank or percent values for a metric and then restart the count. 2 Double-click in the Filter definition pane at the top right. 268 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. See the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide for details and an example to use the BreakBy property in a metric set qualification. Creating a filter based on metric value or rank This procedure provides instructions to create a simple metric set qualification. For more details on any of the options within the procedure. click Help for a description of each option.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Inc. The Filter Editor opens.

navigate to the folder that contains the metric.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries.. Filtering data on a report: Filters 269 . (For a definition of levels. The Set Qualification pane opens. or Percent. The default is the metric’s level. similar to the image below: 4 Select Metric from the Type drop-down list. page 115. see How data is aggregated on a report: metric level. select the metric. Output levels are discussed in detail in the Advanced Filters chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.) to locate the metric. In the Open dialog box. Drag the metric from the Object Browser into the Metric field. Inc.. Rank. for Designers 7 3 Select Add a Set Qualification and click OK. Browse (click . select the part of the metric that will be filtered on: Metric Value. Use one of the following methods: • • Type the name of the metric in the Metric field and click OK. • 7 From the Function drop-down list. for simple filters. 5 The Output Level is the level at which the metric results are calculated. the output level can be left as the default. and click OK. © 2006 MicroStrategy.) 6 Select the metric on which you want to qualify.

For steps. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 8 From the Operator drop-down list. 12 Navigate to a project folder in which to save the filter. You can create relationship filters using either the Set qualification or Advanced qualification option in the Filter Editor. in this case Product (Nike shoes) and City (Washington. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. The Save Filter As dialog box opens. 11 Click Save and Close on the Filter Editor toolbar. Filtering data based on relationships between attributes: Relationship set qualification Consider a buyer who wants to see all the stores selling Nike shoes in the Washington. A relationship qualification allows you to define a relationship between two attributes and place a filter on that relationship.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. select a logical operator. 13 Click Save. A relationship set qualification lets the buyer restrict data based on the relationship between two attributes. Inc. and give the filter a descriptive name so you or other users will be able to use the filter on other reports in the future. DC area. enter the value to use for the metric qualification. Their relationship is defined by the metric Sales. You can use it to restrict data based on a set of elements from an attribute. DC).) 10 Click OK to close the Set Qualification pane. which is determined based on that attribute’s relationship with another attribute. 9 Beside the Value field. This is the value against which the metric calculation will be compared. The Set qualification option provides an interface to guide you through the process. whereas the Advanced qualification option allows you more control by letting you 270 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. click Help. The filter you created can now be added to a report. (For information on additional options for this field. . page 346.

Using the example above. The Filtering Options pane opens. DC area. For more information on the Advanced qualification option. • If you are prompted with the New Filter dialog box. The Set Qualification pane opens. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. to create a report that shows all the stores selling Nike shoes in the Washington. page 115. and the relation to the fact Sales. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. © 2006 MicroStrategy. For more details on any of the options within the procedure. Creating a filter based on relationships between attributes This procedure provides instructions to create a simple relationship set qualification. the filter qualification to Nike shoes in DC. click OK. on the File menu. you need to set the output level to Stores. and then choose Filter. 2 Double-click in the Filter definition pane at the top right. which is the level at which the set should be calculated. Filtering data on a report: Filters 271 . click Help for a detailed description of each option. for Designers 7 use commands. Inc. The Filter Editor opens. and click OK. For details on levels. point to New.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. For more information on the output level. Filters and attributes: Output level A relationship set qualification lets you determine the output level. To create a filter based on relationships between attributes 1 In Desktop. 3 Click the Add a Set qualification option. see How data is aggregated on a report: metric level.

see How data is aggregated on a report: metric level. click Browse. choose a filter in one of the following ways: • To use an existing filter. The Set Qualification pane expands. similar to the image below: 5 Set the output level.) 6 In the Filter Qualification area. To build a new filter. . To do this. (For an explanation of levels. browse (click . 8 Click Save and Close on the Filter Editor toolbar. click Create. When you are finished. select the filter. Inc. click OK.. (You may notice that this editor is similar to the Filter Editor. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 4 Select Relationship from the Type drop-down list. next to the Output Level) to locate the level at which you want the set calculated. and click OK. The Save Filter As dialog box opens.) Click Help for steps to use the Qualification Editor to create a filter. The Qualification Editor opens. and click OK. navigate to the folder that contains the filter. Select it. 272 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 115. In the Open dialog box.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. which is the level at which the set is calculated. • 7 Click OK to close the Set Qualification pane..

because you are creating a shortcut to an existing report or to an existing filter. For steps. These types of filters are called shortcut qualifications. The filter you created can now be added to a report. Inc. Microsoft Analysis Services (Analysis Services).Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. for Designers 7 9 Navigate to a project folder in which to save the filter. a report cannot contain any of the following objects or be of any of the following report types: – Consolidations – Custom groups – Datamart reports – Freeform SQL reports: Reports created using MicroStrategy’s Freeform SQL functionality – OLAP cube reports: Reports that draw their data from an OLAP cube source such as SAP Business Intelligence Warehouse (SAP BW). You can use the first report itself as a filter inside a new report. 10 Click Save. To be used as a shortcut-to-a-report qualification. and give the filter a descriptive name so you or other users will be able to use the filter on other reports in the future. or Hyperion Essbase (Essbase) © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 346. Filtering data based on the results of another report: Shortcut-to-a-report qualification The results of an existing report can be used as a filter for another report. Filtering data on a report: Filters 273 . This type of filter is called a shortcut-to-a-report qualification. Filtering data based on existing filters or report results: Shortcut qualifications You can use existing report results or existing filters as the basis of a new filter.

Next. . Notice that Leanne Sawyer has earned $316. which has no filter. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide For example. to use the Revenue By Brand report as a filter in the Basic Report. Inc. you place the Revenue By Brand report into the Report filter pane of the Basic Report.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Then you re-execute the Basic Report. consider the Basic Report shown below. 274 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy.786 in revenue.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

7

With its new filter, the Basic Report displays the revenue generated by each employee only for those brands specified in the results of the Revenue by Brand report. The filtered Basic Report is shown below. Notice that Leanne Sawyer has now earned only $203,355. in revenue.

You can perform the example above on your own. The Basic Report and the Revenue By Brand report are located in Public Objects\Reports\Advanced Reporting Guide. You can also use a report as a filter and then add additional qualifications to expand the overall filter definition. For example, you can take the result set of one report showing all customers in the Southwest region, place that result set as a filter into a new report, and add a new filter qualification for active customers in the current year. The new report displays all currently active customers in the Southwest region. This approach shows you the value of creating some basic, relatively simple reports in your project, such as a report for customers in a specific region. Then you can make use of these basic reports within shortcut-to-a-report filters to make the filter creation process quicker.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Filtering data on a report: Filters

275

7

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

Basic Reporting Guide

Shortcut-to-a-report qualification and OLAP Services If you have MicroStrategy OLAP Services, be aware that a report’s view definition does not affect how the report is used in a shortcut-to-a-report qualification. A report’s data definition is the query that is sent to the database to retrieve information for the report, whereas the report’s view definition determines how much of the retrieved information is displayed in the report. When you use a report as a filter, the report’s entire data definition is considered; any view definitions do not influence the filter conditions. For an introduction to the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product, see Determining whether you have OLAP Services, page 18 in Chapter 1, Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting.

Creating a filter based on the results of a report: Shortcut-to-a-report qualifications
This procedure provides instructions to create a simple shortcut-to-a-report qualification. For more details on any of the options within the procedure, click Help for a detailed description of each option.
To use a report as a filter in a shortcut-to-a-report qualification

1 In Desktop, from the File menu, point to New, and then choose Filter. • If you are prompted with the New Filter dialog box, click OK.

The Filter Editor opens. 2 Double-click in the Filter definition pane at the top right. The Filtering Options pane opens.

276 Filtering data on a report: Filters

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

7

3 Select Add a Shortcut to a Report and click OK. The Shortcut to a Report pane opens. The image below shows the pane after a report is selected.

4 Select the report you want to use as a filter, using one of the following methods: • • Type the name of the report in the Report field and click OK. Browse (click ...) to locate the report. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the folder that contains the report, select the report, and click OK. Drag the report from the Object Browser into the Report field. You cannot use a report containing a consolidation or custom group, a Freeform SQL report, an OLAP cube report, or a data mart report as a shortcut to a report. 5 Click OK to close the Shortcut to a Report pane. 6 Click Save and Close on the Filter Editor toolbar. The Save Filter As dialog box opens. 7 Navigate to a project folder in which to save the filter, and give the filter a descriptive name so you or other users will be able to use the filter on other reports in the future.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Filtering data on a report: Filters

277

7

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

Basic Reporting Guide

8 Click Save. The shortcut-to-a-report filter you created can now be added to a report. For steps, see Reports: Adding a filter to a report, page 346.

Filtering data based on an existing filter: Shortcut-to-a-filter qualifications
A shortcut-to-a-filter qualification allows you to move an existing filter into a new filter, and apply the new filter to a report. You can also add additional conditions to the new filter and then apply the new filter to the report. For example, Filter 1 contains two conditions, A and B. You can use Filter 1 as the basis of a new filter, and then add another condition C to the new filter. The data that is filtered for must then satisfy all three conditions A, B, and C to be included in any report which uses the new filter. Note that Filter 1 remains unchanged throughout this process. For example, you are a manager in New England, responsible for stores in Boston, Providence, and Greenwich. Your project contains a filter called Stores In My Region, which is defined as the Boston, Providence, and Greenwich stores. A second filter, called the Women’s Clothing filter, includes the categories Blouses and Dresses. A third filter, All Days in December 06, is a date range that includes all the days in the month of December, 2006. To study December sales in your stores for women’s clothing, you create a new filter. The new filter includes a shortcut to each of the three filters. Use this new filter in your report. The original three filters are unchanged, which is useful for other reports that use one or more of those filters. You can also use an existing filter as a base for a new filter and then add additional qualifications to expand the overall filter definition. For example, you can take a filter that screens data for all customers in the Southwest region, place that filter into a new filter, and add a new filter qualification for active customers in the current year. The new filter screens data for all currently active customers in the Southwest region.

278 Filtering data on a report: Filters

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

7

This approach shows you the value of creating some basic, relatively simple filters in your project, such as a filter for customers in a specific region. Then you can make use of these basic filters within shortcut-to-a-filter filters to make the filter creation process quicker.

Creating a filter based on another filter
This procedure provides instructions to create a simple shortcut-to-a-filter qualification. For more details on any of the options within the procedure, click Help for a detailed description of each option.
To create a filter based on another filter

1 In Desktop, from the File menu, point to New, and then choose Filter. • If you are prompted with the New Filter dialog box, click OK.

The Filter Editor opens. 2 Double-click in the Filter definition pane at the top right. The Filtering Options pane opens.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Filtering data on a report: Filters

279

7

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

Basic Reporting Guide

3 Select Add a Shortcut to a Filter and click OK. The Shortcut to a Filter pane opens. The image below shows the pane after a filter is selected.

4 Select a filter using one of the following methods: • • Type the name of the filter in the Filter field. Browse (click ...) to search for the filter. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the folder that contains the filter, select the filter, and click OK. Drag a filter from the Object Browser into the Filter field.

5 Click OK to close the Shortcut to a Filter pane. 6 Click Save and Close on the Filter Editor toolbar. The Save Filter As dialog box opens. 7 Navigate to a project folder in which to save the filter, and give the filter a descriptive name so you or other users will be able to use the filter on other reports in the future. 8 Click Save. The filter you created can now be added to a report. For steps, see Reports: Adding a filter to a report, page 346.

280 Filtering data on a report: Filters

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

7

Joining filter qualifications with operators
When a filter has multiple qualifications, they are always joined by operators. When qualifications are joined, operators govern the interaction between different filtering conditions. Whenever you have more than one qualification in a report filter, you can define the operator as any of the following: • • • • AND OR OR NOT AND NOT

The AND operator is the operator assigned by default when more than one qualification is added to a filter. You can change the default AND operator by simply right-clicking on the word AND in the filter’s definition pane, pointing to Toggle Operator, and selecting a different operator. Each of the operators listed above is described below, with a report example. For more information on advanced operators to apply to a report limit, see Appendix B: Logical and Mathematical Operators for Filtering in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide.

The AND operator
By default, the operator AND is inserted between filter qualifications.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Filtering data on a report: Filters

281

7

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

Basic Reporting Guide

The following images show the initial report with no filter, and the resulting report after two filter qualifications are applied and joined with AND. The initial report with no filter appears as follows:

After the filter (Year = 2006) And (Region = Northeast) is applied, the report appears as follows:

282 Filtering data on a report: Filters

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

7

The following diagram shows the impact of the AND operator on a result set:

The shaded area represents the report’s result set, which contains only revenue generated in the Northeast in 2006.

The OR operator
For those familiar with logic terminology, the OR operator acts as an inclusive OR, not an exclusive OR.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Filtering data on a report: Filters

283

Inc. . for Designers Basic Reporting Guide The following images show the initial report with no filter.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. The initial report with no filter appears as follows: 284 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. and the resulting report after two filter qualifications are applied and joined with OR.

or in both 2006 and the Northeast. Filtering data on a report: Filters 285 . the report appears as follows: The following diagram shows the impact of the OR operator on a result set: As represented by the shaded areas. or the Northeast. is returned in the result set. revenue generated in either 2006. © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Designers 7 After the filter (Year = 2006) Or (Region = Northeast) is applied. Inc.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries.

Inc.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. . for Designers Basic Reporting Guide The OR NOT operator The following images show the initial report with no filter. The initial report with no filter appears as follows: 286 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. and the resulting report after two filter qualifications are applied and joined with OR NOT.

or revenue generated in all other years in any region except for the Northeast. is returned in the result set. In this case. the report appears as follows: The following diagram shows the impact of the OR NOT operator on a result set. Inc. for Designers 7 After the filter (Year = 2006) Or Not(Region = Northeast) is applied. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Filtering data on a report: Filters 287 .Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. revenue generated in 2006 in any region (including the Northeast).

for Designers Basic Reporting Guide The AND NOT operator The following images show the initial report with no filter. Inc. .7 Building Query Objects and Queries. The initial report with no filter appears as follows: 288 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. and the resulting report after two filter qualifications are applied and joined with AND NOT.

As shown by the shaded area. Filtering data on a report: Filters 289 . Changing the operator which joins filter qualifications The following procedure shows how to change the operator that joins filter qualifications. revenue generated in 2006 in any region except the Northeast is returned in the result set. Inc.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. the report appears as follows: The following diagram shows the impact of the AND NOT operator on a result set. for Designers 7 After the filter (Year = 2006) And Not(Region = Northeast) is applied. © 2006 MicroStrategy.

2 Add more than one qualification to the Filter definition pane.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. To do this. page 249. point to Toggle Operator. For steps to create filter qualifications. see Creating or editing filters: The Filter Editor. Inc. see Creating or editing filters: The Filter Editor. by 290 Filtering data on a report: Filters © 2006 MicroStrategy. 3 In the Filter definition pane. as shown in the image below: Asking for user input into a filter’s definition You can allow the user who executes the report that contains the filter. This lets each individual user define the report results he sees. For steps. page 249. . right-click the operator. to decide for himself certain aspects of the filter’s formula. and then choose the desired operator. you include a prompt in the filter’s definition. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide To change the operator between filter qualifications 1 Open the Filter Editor. You can make use of prompts in any filter where you want to let each user impact the results of the filter.

page 292. To add qualifications. To add a prompt to your filter’s definition. you may add a new qualification or remove a qualification that is part of the filter’s definition. page 290. Filtering data on a report: Filters 291 . see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. 2 Follow the steps in this chapter to create that prompt. then use the appropriate section for the type of filter you choose. see Adding a prompt to a filter’s definition in the Filter Editor. for the appropriate procedure. Inc. use the following high-level steps: 1 Decide what prompt type you need for your filter. Editing a filter You can make changes to an existing filter using the Filter Editor. You can also change operators. as described in To change the operator between filter qualifications. page 351. page 359. page 249. When you edit a filter. or text that makes sense for that user. Adding a filter to a report To add one or more filters to a new or existing report.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. date. Prompt types that you can use in a filter’s definition are listed in the table in Reports: Adding prompts to a report. see Asking for user input: Prompts. see Creating a prompt. For an image of the Filter Editor and more information on working with filters. for Designers 7 having the user enter a specific number. 3 Then follow the steps in this chapter to add the prompt to your filter’s definition. page 251 to determine the type of qualification you want to add. © 2006 MicroStrategy. For examples of prompts. page 299. see Creating or editing filters: The Filter Editor. page 346. see Types of filters.

for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Additional filtering functionality The MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide provides detailed information about the following advanced features: • Attribute-to-attribute qualifications: Learn about creating reports that compare two attributes. . Custom expressions: Learn about creating custom metric expressions to fit particular needs. Report object prompts: Learn how to have the results of one report be included in a prompt. Inc. Metric-to-metric comparisons: Learn how to create a filter that dynamically compares the values of two metrics. using their respective attribute forms.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Imported filter elements: Learn how lists of data from existing files can be imported into the filter definition. Break by property for set qualification filters: Learn about the level at which to restart counting rank or percent values for a metric. How the user answers the question determines what data is displayed on the report when it is returned from your data source. and how to specify a search object or specify a predefined list of objects to choose from during report execution. Dynamic dates: Learn how to filter on fixed offsets of the current date. Joint element lists: Learn about using attribute elements from different attributes to filter the report result set. 292 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. • • • • • • • • Asking for user input: Prompts A prompt is a question the system presents to a user during report execution. Output levels for set qualification filters: Learn how to specify the level at which the metric is calculated for a set qualification.

part of the MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Developer Kit (BIDK). and another prompt that asks users what year they want to see data for. When the analyst executes the report. • © 2006 MicroStrategy. he is prompted to answer these questions before the report’s SQL query is sent to the data source. using more inclusive objects. However. The report described above can be found in the Financial Reporting Analysis Module. Effectively. Inc. For details on the BIDK. and as a result the report displays revenue and forecast numbers for only those corporations and year that this analyst is interested in seeing.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. more specific reports that are individualized to each analyst. each user creates his own filter for the report. for Designers 7 For example. because: • Prompts allow each user who executes the report to request individualized sets of data from your data source when he answers the prompts and runs the report. Asking for user input: Prompts 293 . an analyst in an accounting company needs a report designed to show actual revenue and forecasted revenue for his company’s clients. Prompts are an effective tool for the report designer. page xii in the Preface. The report designer places the prompts on a report. A report designer can include one or more prompts in any report. he is only interested in seeing revenue and forecasts for certain corporations and only for the current year. rather than having to create numerous. the analyst does not want to see data for every corporation his company does business with. see How to find business scenarios and examples. The report designer can create one prompt that asks users to select which corporations they want to see data for. Prompts can allow the report designer to create a smaller number of reports overall.

The difference. or excluded from. each time a user executes the report. a prompt dynamically modifies the contents of a report. Then the user can choose which filter to apply to the report. • With prompts. For example: • Users can choose from among several existing filters to determine exactly what filter will screen the data on the report they are about to execute. Inc. and so on) they want to be part of. 294 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. you can let the user decide how to restrict the data to be returned from the data source. When a user launches a prompt by running a report. Therefore. This is possible using a search object in a prompt. Prompts allow users to keep the objects on their saved reports up-to-date. create an object prompt that contains existing filters and place that object prompt on a report.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. attribute elements. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide • Prompts allow the report designer to ensure that the objects on a report are the latest available objects in the project. the report can reflect those changes the next time the prompted report is run. metrics. users can determine the objects (attributes. Thus. A filtered report then displays the same set of data to every user who executes that report. no matter when the prompt was created. because users can save a prompted report so that the objects within the prompt remain connected to the original objects within the project that they were originally based on when the prompt was created. A prompt is similar to a filter (see Filtering data on a report: Filters) because a prompt determines the specific data to be displayed on a report. the report query that is sent to the data source. specific definition for the report. To achieve this. the user chooses prompt answers from a list of the most up-to-date objects available in the project. If objects are modified or deleted in the project. With prompts. In contrast. a prompt can be seen as a way for users to create their own filter for a given report. is that you create a filter for a report to provide a single. the search object goes through the project and retrieves the latest objects that fit the search criteria the report designer defined. including objects that may not have existed when the prompt was created. . from a report designer’s perspective.

even when the prompt creator has explicitly defined a broader set of prompt answers to be available to users of that report.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. this manual assumes that no security filter restricts an individual user’s access to certain objects or object elements. For prompts. but a set of users may have a security filter assigned to their MicroStrategy user accounts that limits the display of data to only the Northeast region. Consider this possibility when designing a specific prompt for your users’ reporting needs. Prompts and security filters Security filters in MicroStrategy restrict a user’s ability to access or view certain objects within a given MicroStrategy project. Asking for user input: Prompts 295 . The report can be run the first time by selecting 2005 and then a second time by selecting 2006. a security filter can limit the data a user sees on a report. users are prompted to select the year for which they want the report results. which users can change each time they submit the query by choosing different answers when prompted. However.. For example. see the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. If you create an attribute prompt containing the Year attribute. so it is important to be aware of the potential impact of a security filter on a user’s experience when answering a prompt. For details on security filters. a report shows revenue data for all geographical regions of the U. this means that users who have a security filter assigned to them may only see certain prompt answers to choose from when they execute a prompted report. Inc. for Designers 7 • Prompts allow a report to have a dynamic report definition.S. As a result. When describing what prompt answers will be available to users. © 2006 MicroStrategy. even if the report is designed to display a broader set of data. most environments use security filters.

page 299 for steps to access the Prompt Generation Wizard. • • Consider your users’ needs as well as the purpose of the report and the objects on it when you decide on these options. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Components of a prompt The pieces that make up a prompt control how a prompt appears and how it functions. Title and description: This component lets you provide a useful name and description for the prompt. These components include the following: • Answer requirement: This component lets you determine whether users will be required to answer the prompt or an answer will be optional. For a table showing how various combinations of these options affect how a scheduled report is filtered when executed.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Inc. or accept and add more answers. Each prompt property is described below. which can significantly impact how straightforward or complex a user finds prompts to be. or you can make an answer optional. These prompt components are defined using the Prompt Generation Wizard. . If an answer is required. a report cannot be executed until an answer is provided. 296 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. Default prompt answers: This component lets you include a pre-selected answer for the prompt. see the Advanced Prompts chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. replace with a different answer. Answer requirements You can either require users to answer a prompt when they execute a report. If you plan to apply a schedule to a prompted report. the decisions you make about answer requirements and default answers will affect how the report is filtered when it is automatically executed on schedule. See Creating a prompt. which the user can then accept.

because they can simply accept the defaults with a single click and run the report. Default answers are particularly useful if a large percentage of your users will answer the prompt the same way. users must take the time to answer each prompt question individually. or the report cannot be executed. 1998. See the appropriate procedure below for the type of prompt you want to create. from which users can choose the attribute element (for example. Optional: An optional prompt does not require a prompt answer to be selected. or 2006) they want to see data for. consider also providing a default answer. Asking for user input: Prompts 297 . If default answers are not provided for prompts.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Default answers allow users to execute prompted reports quickly because they can simply accept the defaults. select the Prompt answer is required check box in the Prompt Generation Wizard. • If you determine that a prompt must be answered. Inc. Default prompt answers You can specify default answers for prompts. for steps to select this setting when creating a prompt. See Default prompt answers. A common example is a prompt on the Year attribute. for Designers 7 • Required: A required prompt means at least one prompt answer must be selected from the available choices. 2005. The report can be executed without any input from the user. To specify whether an answer is required or optional. If many users © 2006 MicroStrategy. Default answers are especially useful if you have a large number of users of a given report who will likely choose the same answer for the prompt. page 297. Users can then do one of the following: • • • Execute the report using the default answer(s) Select a different answer Keep the default answer and add additional answers Providing default answers allows users to execute prompted reports more quickly. unless answers are not required.

for Designers Basic Reporting Guide will choose the current year every time they run the report. keep in mind that. The maximum and minimum number of answers option does not apply specifically to default answers. from an analyst’s perspective. then providing the current year as the default answer can save users time. the more information is displayed on the report. select the Choose default prompt answers check box in the Prompt Generation Wizard. The title and description you provide for a prompt can make the difference between users finding prompted report execution confusing and users completing rapid report execution that displays exactly the data they want to see. See the appropriate procedure below for the type of prompt you want to create. When deciding on whether to limit users to a certain number of answers. for steps to select this setting when creating a prompt. Think about a name and description carefully. . It applies to the total number of answers allowed for the prompt. You name this prompt “Attribute element prompt” and you provide the following description: “Choose an attribute element.” 298 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. To specify default prompt answers and the minimum or maximum number of prompt answers allowed. with your users in mind. You select the Year attribute. for most types of prompts. Inc. You can also determine minimum and maximum numbers of answers a user can select.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. from which the user will be asked to select one or more attribute elements (years) to see data displayed for. which are displayed to users when they are answering the prompt. Example of an ineffective prompt title and description You create an attribute element prompt. Title and description You can customize a prompt’s title and description. the more answers they can select.

Example of a useful prompt title and description You create an attribute element prompt. who likely do not know what an attribute element is. Asking for user input: Prompts 299 . but also because it is more than just a repeat of the title. The description is useful not only because it uses language that users will understand. It provides basic information to the user who may never have used a prompt before.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries.” This title makes sense to all users and defines the prompt generally enough so it can be easily used by report designers on other reports. See the appropriate procedure below for the type of prompt you want to create. and metrics. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Prompts can be placed on a report. for Designers 7 This title and description are not useful to the majority of users. for steps to enter a title and description when creating a prompt. or custom group. Inc. Creating a prompt You create a prompt for a report when you want to let the user decide what restrictions the data must meet to be displayed on the report. filters. A better choice is described below. You can determine the title and description for a prompt on the last screen of the Prompt Generation Wizard. You name this prompt “Year(s)” and you provide the following description: “Select one or more years for which you want to see data. This chapter covers prompts placed on reports. and it emphasizes that more than one year can be chosen. in case a user missed that information at the top of the prompt screen. metric. Prompts used on custom groups are covered in the Advanced Prompts chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. and they then become part of the report definition. You select the Year attribute. They can also be used in a filter. from which the user will be asked to select one or more attribute elements (years) to see data displayed for.

The Prompt Generation Wizard is accessible from MicroStrategy Desktop. Inc. where you select the type of prompt you want to create. select the project you want to work in from the Folder List on the left. To access the Prompt Generation Wizard 1 In Desktop. You can also use the Prompt Generation Wizard to modify an existing prompt. The image below shows the first page of the Prompt Generation Wizard. The Prompt Generation Wizard opens. point to New. . 2 From the File menu. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Prompt Generation Wizard You create all prompts with the Prompt Generation Wizard. page 301 for details on each prompt type. See Types of prompts. 300 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. which guides you through the prompt creation process. and then choose Prompt.7 Building Query Objects and Queries.

page 331. You can see specific details on each option in each page of the wizard by clicking Help. lists of attribute elements. on a report displaying profit forecasts. “Qualify on an attribute” prompt (attribute prompt) “Choose from an attribute element list” prompt (attribute element prompt) “Qualify on a metric” prompt (metric prompt) Users can select prompt answers from a list of attribute elements from a single attribute. Prompt Name “Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy” prompt (hierarchy prompt) What Data it Allows Users to Define Users can select prompt answers from one or more attribute elements from one or more attributes. This prompt is more restrictive than the hierarchy prompt. Inc. because the user has the fewest number of attribute elements to select answers from. or metrics. see Adding a prompt to a report.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Users can define a metric qualification. while another user might select different electronics products. see the sections that follow for the type of prompt you want to create. if the prompt lets users select from the Product hierarchy. based on attributes in a hierarchy. For steps to include a prompt on a report. which determines what data should be displayed for one or more specific metrics on the report. or all media products. because the user has fewer attribute elements to select answers from. For example. Types of prompts The correct prompt type to create depends on what report objects you want users to be able to base a filter on to filter data. for Designers 7 To use the Prompt Generation Wizard. This prompt is the most restrictive of the filter definition prompts. Users can select prompt answers from a limited list of specific attribute elements. After you create a prompt. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Asking for user input: Prompts 301 . Prompt Type Filter Definition prompts This type of prompt allows users to determine how the report’s data is filtered. This prompt lets you give users the largest number of attribute elements to choose from when they answer the prompt to define their filtering criteria. The attribute elements they select are used to filter data displayed on the report. you then place the prompt on any report so it becomes part of the report’s definition and any user who executes that report must interact with the prompt. one user might choose to see forecasts for certain electronic products.

to apply a filter that is most useful for their analysis purposes. Level prompts are covered in the Advanced Prompts chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Prompt Name Object prompt What Data it Allows Users to Define Users can use this prompt to add more data to a report. and filter report data based on their selection. . which is then used as part of a filter to look for specific data with that text. Date prompt Numeric prompt Users enter a specific date for which to see data. Inc. Level prompts are covered in the Advanced Prompts chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. which is then used as part of a filter. Users can also choose from among a selection of filters. Users enter up to 9 digits. 302 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. Users select objects (such as attributes or metrics) they want to add to the report. page 215. Levels are explained in Level of calculation for a metric. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Prompt Type Object prompts This type of prompt allows users to select objects to include in a report. Value prompts This prompt type lets users select a single value.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Users can enter up to 38 digits. or filters. This prompt is used in a filter. to search for numeric data with the Big Decimal data type assigned to it. such as attributes. to search for numeric data. Users enter a word or phrase. Level prompt The first three prompt types in the table above are explained in detail in the sections that follow. Text prompt Big Decimal prompt Long prompt Level prompts This prompt type allows users to specify the level of calculation for a metric. Users enter a specific number. such as a date or a specific text string. or within a metric. metrics. to look for specific numeric data.

User Needs Restrict the amount of data displayed on a report Solutions Filter definition prompts (prompts used on filters in a report) are more restrictive than other prompts in terms of the number of attribute elements from which a user can select prompt answers. attributes. see Filtering data on an attribute. This lets users select their answers from the most up-to-date hierarchies. A search object will search for and display specific objects at the moment the user accesses the report and the prompt appears. the more information is displayed on the report. To do this. Inc. see Title and description. page 298. attributes. page 296. page 322. This can be alleviated by providing good descriptions for the prompts so that users are clear about the questions they are answering. Increase the amount of data displayed on a report Answer prompts that are easier to use Choose a report filter from among a selection of filters Select a prompt answer from the most up-to-date objects in the project © 2006 MicroStrategy. For details on filter definition prompts. The user does not have to create a filtering definition as with other prompts. To do this. then create an object prompt made up of existing filters. page 322. attribute element. page 305. create the filters you want users to be able to choose from. • Any prompt increases the complexity for a user when running a report. For steps to create a search object. create a search object. To create an object prompt. • The “Choose from an attribute element list” prompt and the object prompt are generally the simplest prompts for a user to answer. For an example of an effective prompt description.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. or metric: Filter definition prompts. or other objects in the project. • Object prompts are more inclusive in terms of the data that is displayed on the resulting report. You can use a search object in most prompts. and then place that object prompt on a report. see Answer requirements. called an answer requirement. or other objects: Object prompts. then during prompt creation choose the search object rather than choosing specific attributes or other objects to prompt the user with. to help you provide the reporting results that your users need. You can allow users to select more answers for a prompt by setting or changing the maximum number of answers. see the appropriate procedure below for the prompt you want to create. Users simply click one or more objects they want to see data for and execute the report. for Designers 7 Choosing the right prompt type Use the table below as a reference when choosing which prompt to create. Users can choose from among several existing filters to determine exactly what filter will screen the data on the report they are about to execute. metrics. To create an object prompt. Asking for user input: Prompts 303 . • In general. attributes. For details. the more answers an analyst is allowed to select for a prompt. The maximum number of answers a user can provide is determined by one component of all prompts. attribute form. see Filtering data based on metrics. or other objects: Object prompts. because the user can select additional objects to include on the report. see Filtering data based on metrics.

and place the prompt on a report. as well as on filters. at the same time the report itself is being created. However. Prompts created as part of a report are saved with the report’s definition. Stand-alone prompt vs. prompts can also be created as an intrinsic part of a given report. To create an attribute element prompt. Therefore. Allows fewer objects for users to choose answers from. • “Choose from an attribute element list” prompt (attribute element prompt): The most restrictive of the three prompts. Therefore. Place this filter in the attribute element prompt. and can be used by other report designers. metrics. Allows the fewest objects for users to choose answers from. a prompt created as part of a report cannot be used on any other report. see “Choose from an attribute element list” prompt (Attribute Element prompt). and other objects. . in MicroStrategy.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide User Needs Restrict the number of attribute elements users can choose from when answering a prompt Solutions If you are creating one of the filter definition prompts. Prompts can also be created as an intrinsic part of a filter. page 316. the three hierarchy/attribute prompts are designed to be increasingly restrictive in the number of objects they allow users to select answers from. Inc. you create a filter to display the top 20 customers in terms of revenue or the top 10 employees in terms of sales. These three prompts are listed below. A stand-alone prompt gives report designers flexibility. For example. prompt as part of report or filter This chapter primarily describes how to create stand-alone prompts. A stand-alone prompt is a prompt that is created as an independent MicroStrategy object. 304 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. in increasing order of restrictiveness: • “Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy” prompt (hierarchy prompt): Allows users the widest number of objects to choose answers from. for example. A stand-alone prompt can then be used on many different reports. You can use this option to create a filter that will display to users a specific list of attribute elements. a prompt created as part of a filter cannot be used on any other filter. Select from a reasonable subset of a long list of attribute elements. at the same time the filter itself is being created. • “Qualify on an attribute” prompt (attribute prompt): More restrictive than the hierarchy prompt. The “Choose from an attribute element list” prompt (attribute element prompt) provides a filter option. based on the condition defined in the filter. a list of customer names. Prompts created as part of a filter are saved with the filter’s definition.

You create the prompt to define constraints for which objects can be used to create the filter. Asking for user input: Prompts 305 . and the answers determine the data used when calculating the results displayed on a report. Filtering criteria might include certain attributes in a hierarchy. each approach allows you to create most prompt types described in this chapter. for Designers 7 No matter how a prompt is created. if you create a Hierarchy prompt. specific attribute forms or attribute elements. attribute form. you can specify a hierarchy from which users can select attributes or attribute elements to create a filter with.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. the user actually goes through the process of creating a filter for the report. Both stand-alone prompts and prompts created as part of another object accomplish the same results: the user is presented with one or more questions to answer. While answering the prompt. or certain metrics. Inc. For example. whether stand-alone or as part of another object. (The option to create this prompt in the Prompt Generation Wizard is called © 2006 MicroStrategy. attribute element. Filtering data on an attribute. or metric: Filter definition prompts This type of prompt lets users define the filtering criteria for a report.

Then the user drags a desired attribute or element into the filter’s Definition pane on the right-hand side.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. You can add a filter definition prompt to a stand-alone filter.) By being able to interact with this prompt. the report designer chose the Organization hierarchy. (Alternatively. 306 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. a filter definition prompt allows users to specify conditions that data must meet to be included in report results. so that the prompt is presented to any users who run a report on which that filter is placed. Alternatively. each user can create his own filter with which to screen the data that appears on the resulting report. . for Designers Basic Reporting Guide “Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy”. so users could choose any attribute within that hierarchy for which to see data. you can place a filter definition prompt directly on a report. or the user can also browse to a specific attribute’s elements and select one or more of those elements. Either way. The prompt shown above is asking the user to select from the attributes listed. Inc.) Users are presented with a prompt similar to the following image when they execute the report: When creating the prompt shown above. the user can use the Attribute Qualification pane to select an attribute for the filter.

Inc. you can incorporate it into a report as described in Reports: Adding prompts to a report.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. After you have created a filter definition prompt. To create a Metric prompt. page 308. see Reports: Adding prompts to a report. see “Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy” prompt (Hierarchy prompt). © 2006 MicroStrategy. You can create the following types of filter definition prompts: • Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy (Hierarchy prompt): This type of filter definition prompt lets the user create a filter by selecting from any attribute or attribute element that is part of one or more hierarchies you specify. see “Choose from an attribute element list” prompt (Attribute Element prompt). page 312. To create a Hierarchy prompt. page 319. • • • Creating a filter definition prompt The procedures for creating each of these types of filter definition prompts are described below. see “Qualify on a metric” prompt (Metric prompt). To create an Attribute prompt. Qualify on an attribute (Attribute prompt): This type of filter definition prompt enables the user to filter (or qualify) the report based on the attribute forms or the attribute elements of the specified attribute. see “Qualify on an attribute” prompt (Attribute prompt). The attribute elements the user selects then become the filter for the report when it is sent to your data source. Choose from an attribute element list (Attribute element prompt): This type of prompt enables the user to filter the report based on a specified set of attribute elements from a given attribute. Asking for user input: Prompts 307 . for Designers 7 For a table of where to use all prompts. page 351. Qualify on a metric (Metric prompt): This type of prompt enables the user to filter (or qualify) the report based on a specific metric. To create an Attribute Element prompt. page 351. page 316.

(This image shows only part of the resulting report.) 308 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide “Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy” prompt (Hierarchy prompt) The “Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy” prompt. You create a hierarchy prompt which asks the user to choose an attribute or attribute elements from the Organization hierarchy. . Answering Questions about Data. when they execute the report. For example. the report appears as shown in the following image. page 112 in Chapter 4.) You want users to be able to select any corporations or parent corporations to view past-due amounts for. see Hierarchies. Then you add the hierarchy prompt to the report.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. allows users to create their own report filter using attributes and attribute elements from: • • • A specific hierarchy All hierarchies in the project Specific hierarchies returned by a search object For an explanation of what a hierarchy is. analysts want to be able to monitor the aging of various accounts receivable transactions by customer. Using the MicroStrategy Financial Reporting Analysis Module project data. Inc. when you execute the report and respond to the prompt by choosing the Global Enterprises HQ corporation. also called a Hierarchy prompt. You create a report with the Customer attribute and various Accounts Receivable-related metrics on it. (The report and its metrics are shown below.

on the File menu. Inc. as necessary. Then.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. • Use the results of a search object: A search object will search for and display specific project objects when the user executes the report. 3 Choose one of the following options and. in the list of filter definition prompts. To select the hierarchy Select the hierarchy which contains the attributes the user will be prompted to choose from as they create the filter for the report. point to New. Browse to and select the hierarchy or specify the name of the hierarchy. and the Attribute Element prompt is the most restrictive. the Hierarchy prompt allows users to select from the widest number of attribute elements when they are choosing prompt answers to define their filtering criteria. specify the required information for your chosen option: • Choose a hierarchy object: Select this option to present the user with a specific hierarchy from which to choose attributes and elements. The Prompt Generation Wizard opens. allowing users to choose from the fewest number of attribute elements to define their filter criteria. Asking for user input: Prompts 309 . for Designers 7 Of the three filter definition prompts for attributes. 2 Select the Filter definition prompt option. select Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy and click Next. To create a Hierarchy prompt 1 In Desktop. This lets you © 2006 MicroStrategy. and then choose Prompt. The Attribute prompt is more restrictive.

.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Then browse to and select your new search object or specify the name of the search object. 4 From the Displayed forms drop-down list. select one of the following options: • All attribute forms: This option allows users to see and select from attribute elements within all attribute forms. Inc. Browse forms: This option allows users to see and select from only the attribute forms defined as browse • 310 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. for browsing purposes (the browse forms). which is made up of ID numbers that represent each attribute element (each product). the Product attribute has an attribute form called ID. click Add. • List all hierarchies: Select this option to let the user choose attributes from all hierarchies in the project. An attribute form is a descriptive aspect of an attribute. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide prompt the user with the most up-to-date objects in the project. the prompt displays the related attributes and attribute elements for users to select their filter criteria from. such as each customer in the Customer attribute. For example. and which attribute forms users can see displayed in the Object Browser. browse to and select the search object or specify the name of the search object. Enter your search criteria and save the search. You can select which of these display types users can select from when they answer the prompt. – If you have previously created a search object. ID and description (Desc). The attribute forms can also be displayed. or each employee in the Employee attribute. – To create a new search object. To determine the attribute forms which are displayed to the user Once users select a hierarchy. The attribute form Last Name contains the last names for each attribute element. It is the default choice. Most attributes have at least two forms. Your project designer determines which attribute forms users see directly in a report’s results (the report display forms).

select the Choose default prompt answers check box and click Next. For considerations when determining a default answer. • Report display forms: This option lets users see only the attribute forms defined as report display forms.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. 7 Click Next. Asking for user input: Prompts 311 . and click OK. Select a prompt style from the list. All attribute forms defined as browse forms are displayed in the Data Explorer when the user browses the related attribute. click Modify. for Designers 7 forms. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. 5 To specify default prompt answers. 10 If you choose. To finish creating your prompt 8 Specify a title and description for the prompt. since they do not need to answer the prompt but can simply run the report using the default answer. 6 Set the maximum and minimum number of prompt answers allowed. see Answer requirements. if you choose. For considerations when determining a title and description. you can select the Prompt answer required check box to require users to answer the prompt before running the report. page 298. see Title and description. see Default prompt answers. For considerations about required and optional prompt answers. Click Add. All attribute forms defined as report display forms are included in report results for a report that uses the related attribute. You do not need to specify a default answer if you do not want a default answer to appear for users. select the answer(s) you want to be default(s). To specify a default answer and restrict the number of answers A default answer can allow users to complete report execution more quickly. page 297. page 296. 9 To specify how the prompt will appear in MicroStrategy Web. and click OK.

you might choose the following default answers for the prompt: • • • • Northeast Northwest Southeast Southwest 312 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. You want users to be able to select specific geographical regions of the country for which to see revenue data. your report contains the attribute Region and the metric Revenue.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. see Reports: Adding prompts to a report. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 11 Click Finish. which prompts the user to choose attribute elements from the Region attribute. and then select elements from their chosen attribute. You can now add your new prompt to a report. Inc. You create an attribute prompt. from among all regions. You define a single attribute from which each user who executes the report can select elements to define his report filter. can be used to create a more focused prompt than the hierarchy prompt. You can also let users select an attribute from a set of attributes. Using the MicroStrategy Tutorial project data. For example. also called an Attribute prompt. “Qualify on an attribute” prompt (Attribute prompt) The “Qualify on an attribute” prompt. page 351. . For a table showing how to add each prompt type to a report. 12 Save the prompt.

The attribute element prompt is the most restrictive. select Qualify on an attribute and click Next. 2 Select the Filter definition prompt option. allowing users to choose from the fewest number of attribute elements to define their filter criteria.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. for Designers 7 When you apply this prompt to the report and execute the report using the default answers. Then. (Alternatively. you can present the users with a list of attributes from which the user selects one attribute. the attribute prompt is more restrictive than a hierarchy prompt but less restrictive than an attribute element prompt. To select the attribute from which the user can create the filter You must determine which attribute will be displayed to the user when the user is prompted. 3 Choose one of the following options: • Choose an attribute: You can present the user with a specific attribute to select elements from. on the File menu. Inc. Of the three filter definition prompts for attributes. the report appears as shown in the following image. The Prompt Generation Wizard opens.) The user then selects elements from that attribute to be part of the filter he creates to filter data for the report. in the list of filter definition prompts. © 2006 MicroStrategy. To create an Attribute prompt 1 In Desktop. point to New. and then choose Prompt. The hierarchy prompt allows users to select from the widest number of attribute elements when they are choosing prompt answers to define their filtering criteria. Asking for user input: Prompts 313 .

– To create a new search object. Then browse to and select your new search object or specify the name of the search object. Your project designer determines which attribute forms users see directly in a report’s results (the report display forms). Enter your search criteria and save the search. and which attribute forms users can see displayed in the Object Browser. An attribute form is a descriptive aspect of an attribute. This lets you prompt the user with the most up-to-date objects in the project. 314 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. The attribute form Last Name contains the last names for each attribute element. the Product attribute has an attribute form called ID. Most attributes have at least two forms. ID and description (Desc). Inc. such as each customer in the Customer attribute. It is the default choice. select one of the following options: • All attribute forms: This option allows users to see and select from attribute elements within all attribute forms. Use this option to present the user with a list of attributes. 4 From the Displayed forms drop-down list. To determine which attribute forms to display to the user The prompt displays the related attribute elements for users to select their filter criteria from. . For example. for browsing purposes (the browse forms). which is made up of ID numbers that represent each attribute element (each product). – If you have previously created a search object.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. You can select which of these display types users can select from when they answer the prompt. or each employee in the Employee attribute. from which they can choose one. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Browse to and select the attribute or specify the name of the attribute • Use the results of a search object: A search object will search for and display specific project objects when the user executes the report. The attribute’s forms can also be displayed. browse to and select the search object or specify the name of the search object. click Add.

see Default prompt answers. since they do not need to answer the prompt. Click Add. Inc. Report display forms: This option lets users see only the attribute forms defined as report display forms. All attribute forms defined as report display forms are included in report results for a report that uses the related attribute. Select a prompt style from the list. 6 Set the maximum and minimum number of prompt answers allowed. click Modify. 5 To specify default prompt answers. page 297. To finish creating your prompt 8 Specify a title and description for the prompt. for Designers 7 • Browse forms: This option allows users to see and select from only the attribute forms defined as browse forms. if you choose. 9 To specify how the prompt will appear in MicroStrategy Web. For considerations when determining a title and description. All attribute forms defined as browse forms are displayed in the Data Explorer when the user browses the related attribute. Asking for user input: Prompts 315 . and click OK. You do not need to specify a default answer if you do not want a default answer to appear for users. 7 Click Next. see Title and description. and click OK. • To specify a default answer and restrict the number of answers A default answer can allow users to complete report execution more quickly. select the Choose default prompt answers check box and click Next. For considerations when determining a default answer. select the answer(s) you want to be default(s).Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. page 298. © 2006 MicroStrategy. but can simply run the report using the default answer.

see Reports: Adding prompts to a report.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. you might use all three regions as default answers for the prompt: 316 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. You create the specific attribute elements to be displayed in the prompt. You want users to be able to select specific geographical regions of the country for which to see revenue data. because it offers the fewest number of answers to choose from and does not require the user to create a filtering “statement”. your report contains the attribute Region and the metric Revenue.S. 12 Save the prompt. You create an attribute element list prompt. see Answer requirements. . For considerations about required and optional prompt answers. you can select the Prompt answer required check box to require users to answer the prompt before running the report. Using the MicroStrategy Tutorial project data. regions. page 296. also called an Attribute Element prompt. Inc. You can now add your new prompt to a report. For a table showing how to add each prompt type to a report. 11 Click Finish. by using one of the following methods: • • • Selecting all elements associated with an attribute Creating a filter that returns a limited list of elements from one attribute Selecting specific attribute elements one by one For example. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 10 If you choose. allows a user to choose from a list of attribute elements to be included in a filter or custom group. which prompts the user to choose from three attribute elements in the Region attribute. from among only eastern U. page 351. This is generally the simplest prompt for users to answer. “Choose from an attribute element list” prompt (Attribute Element prompt) The “Choose from an attribute element list” prompt.

Asking for user input: Prompts 317 . 3 Browse to and select the attribute or specify the name of the attribute and click Next. The Prompt Generation Wizard opens. The Attribute prompt is more restrictive than the Hierarchy prompt. for Designers 7 • • • Northeast Mid-Atlantic Southeast When you apply this prompt to the report and execute the report using the default answers. Inc. point to New.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. select Choose from an attribute element list. To create an Attribute Element prompt 1 In Desktop. and click Next. on the File menu. in the list of filter definition prompts. 2 Select the Filter definition prompt option. and then choose Prompt. the Attribute Element prompt is the most restrictive. The Hierarchy prompt allows users to select from the widest number of attribute elements when they are choosing prompt answers to define their filtering criteria. the report appears as shown in the following image. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Of the three filter definition prompts for attributes. allowing users to choose from the fewest number of attribute elements to define their filter criteria. Then. but less restrictive than the Attribute Element prompt. To determine the attribute whose elements the user will be able to choose from The prompt will display the related attribute elements for users to select their filter criteria from.

• Use a pre-defined list of elements: This option lets you select specific attribute elements to display to the user. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide To define the specific elements the user will be able to choose from 4 Choose one of the following options: • List all elements: This option displays all of the attribute’s elements to the user when he is answering the prompt. 5 To specify default prompt answers. You do not need to specify a default answer if you do not want a default answer to appear for users. the top 100 customers this month. You can create a filter that returns a specific set of customers. select the Choose default prompt answers check box and click Next. page 297. Click Add. for example. and click OK. 6 Set the maximum and minimum number of prompt answers allowed. Browse to and select the filter or specify the name of the filter. Click Add. but can simply run the report using the default answer. such as Customer or Employee. select the answer(s) you want to be default(s).7 Building Query Objects and Queries. To specify a default answer and restrict the number of answers • A default answer can allow users to complete report execution more quickly. . Use a filter to reduce the number of elements: This option is useful for attributes with a large number of elements. Then click Preview to see the list of elements that will be displayed to the user. then click OK. if you choose. For considerations when determining a default answer. see Default prompt answers. since they do not need to answer the prompt. select the elements. Inc. 7 Click Next. 318 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy.

see Reports: Adding prompts to a report. For a table showing how to add each prompt type to a report. You can now add your new prompt to a report. see Title and description. Asking for user input: Prompts 319 . You create a Metric prompt by selecting one or more metrics. allows users to create their own instant filter for data returned for one of the metrics on the report. 9 To specify how the prompt will appear in MicroStrategy Web. also called a Metric prompt.000. your report contains the attribute Region and the metric Revenue. which prompts the user to enter a value for which all revenue data will be displayed that is greater than the value entered by the user. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Users will be able to define their filters based on these metrics. Select a prompt style from the list. You want users to be able to define the amount of revenue they want to see data for. 10 If you choose to.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Using the MicroStrategy Tutorial project data. “Qualify on a metric” prompt (Metric prompt) The “Qualify on a metric” prompt. showing any geographical region which satisfies the user’s selected metric condition. page 298. page 351. You create a metric prompt. click Modify. and click OK.000. For example. For considerations when determining a title and description. see Answer requirements. 12 Save the prompt. For considerations about required and optional prompt answers. you might define the default answer for the prompt to be Revenue > $1. for Designers 7 To finish creating your prompt 8 Specify a title and description for the prompt. 11 Click Finish. you can select the Prompt answer required check box to require users to answer the prompt before running the report. Inc. page 296.

For example. on the File menu. The metric(s) you choose for the prompt do not have to appear on the report itself.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. 2 Select the Filter definition prompt option. To select the metric(s) for which users can define their filters The prompt will display the metric(s) on which users define their filter criteria. or percentage of the metric. 3 Choose one of the following options: • Choose a metric object: Browse to and select a specific metric to use in the prompt. rank. Inc. Then. However. and then choose Prompt. The Prompt Generation Wizard opens. When answering the prompt. a store manager needs a report to show sales data for products whose current inventory falls below a certain count. the report does not necessarily need to display inventory counts for those products. the report appears as shown in the following image. select Qualify on a metric and click Next. . for Designers Basic Reporting Guide When you apply this prompt to the report and execute the report using the default answer. in the list of filter definition prompts. users can define their filters based on the value. point to New. Users will be able 320 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. To create a Metric prompt 1 In Desktop.

click Help. 4 To specify default prompt answers: • • Select the Choose default prompt answers check box and click Next. for Designers 7 to filter their report data based on the metric you select. You do not need to specify a default answer if you do not want a default answer to appear for users. – If you have previously created a search object. select the object you want to use to the create the default answer. if you choose. 6 Click Next. Use the options to define your default answer. Inc. browse to and select the search object or specify the name of the search object. For example. © 2006 MicroStrategy. – To create a new search object. Asking for user input: Prompts 321 . For considerations when determining a default answer. and click OK. Click Add. but can simply run the report using the default answer. • Use the results of a search object: A search object will search for and display specific project objects when the user executes the report. and drag and drop it into the Definition pane. This lets you prompt the user with the most up-to-date objects in the project. To specify a default answer and restrict the number of answers A default answer can allow users to complete report execution more quickly. for example. revenue greater than 500. since they do not need to answer the prompt. page 297.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. click Add. Enter your search criteria and save the search. you can let the user select a metric from a search for all metrics with “Revenue” in the name. Then browse to and select your new search object or specify the name of the search object. • 5 Set the maximum and minimum number of prompt answers allowed. For details on each option. see Default prompt answers.

or other objects: Object prompts Object prompts provide users the ability to add additional objects to a report. page 351. 10 Click Finish. page 298. you can create a prompt that displays the Day. Or. For considerations about required and optional prompt answers. 8 To specify how the prompt will appear in MicroStrategy Web. Select a prompt style from the list. 322 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. 11 Save the prompt. For a table showing how to add each prompt type to a report. You can let users select from almost any object available in MicroStrategy.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. For considerations when determining a title and description. see Title and description. so the user can specify the granularity of the report. The objects the user selects in the prompt are placed on the report. you can select the Prompt answer required check box to require users to answer the prompt before running the report. you can create a prompt that allows users to choose from a list of existing stand-alone filters to apply to the report. Object prompts enable you to provide versatile reports to users. see Answer requirements. This essentially allows users to create their own reports. For example. 9 If you choose to. Quarter. Inc. see Reports: Adding prompts to a report. and Year attributes to users. and click OK. You can now add your new prompt to a report. attributes. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide To finish creating your prompt 7 Specify a title and description for the prompt. click Modify. Month. although you use the object prompt to control what objects they can choose to include on their reports. . page 296. Filtering data based on metrics.

contains another set of attributes users can choose from. Customer Household Count. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Answer choices include the attributes Customer Income Range. data for various combinations of demographics and psychographics can be compared by running the report again and answering the prompts differently. contains a set of attributes that users select one or more answers from.) The report’s display is shown below: The first prompt. (This report is from the Customer Analysis Module of the MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Developer Kit. the designer is able to group the attributes according to user analysis needs. Customer Marital Status. Customer Age Range. By separating the user’s choices into two object prompts. Its answer choices include the attributes Customer Education. Inc. Customer Housing Type. a user can focus on customer demographics and customer psychographics separately when the user is considering what data to see in the resulting report. Additionally. and Customer Gender. The second prompt.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. for Designers 7 The Customer Distribution Trend report contains two object prompts. Asking for user input: Prompts 323 . In this case. called Demographics List. and so on. called Psychographic List.

Including a search object in the object prompt. allows users to select from new objects that might not have been part of the project when you first created the prompt. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Object prompts can be used in many places. or you can define a specific search that presents an up-to-date set of objects for users to select from. 3 Choose one of the following options: • Use a pre-defined list of objects: This option lets you define a specified list of objects. you can include metrics or attributes in a single object prompt. you must create an object prompt for each object type. Object prompt containing metrics: Embedded in a Set qualification filter. see Reports: Adding prompts to a report. as well as any place that accepts metrics. page 351. For a table of where to use all prompts. 324 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. For example. . and then choose Prompt. Creating object prompts When you create an object prompt. 2 Select the Object prompt option and click Next. The Prompt Generation Wizard opens. but not both. you can decide whether users can select from a specified list of MicroStrategy objects.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. on the File menu. To create the list of objects from which the user can select You can only use objects of one type in an object prompt. To create an object prompt 1 In Desktop. point to New. Inc. To prompt for multiple object types in the same report. rather than specifying the exact object names. including the following: • • Object prompt containing attributes: Any place that can accept a list of attributes.

– If you have previously created a search object.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. browse to and select the search object or specify the name of the search object. To specify a default answer and restrict the number of answers A default answer can allow users to complete report execution more quickly. page 297. see Title and description. but can simply run the report using the default answer. 4 To specify default prompt answers. © 2006 MicroStrategy. To finish creating your prompt 7 Specify a title and description for the prompt. see Default prompt answers. for Designers 7 Click Add. – To create a new search object. 8 To specify how the prompt will appear in MicroStrategy Web. • Use the results of a search object: A search object will search for and display specific project objects when the user executes the report. if you choose. 6 Click Next. You do not need to specify a default answer if you do not want a default answer to appear for users. This lets you prompt the user with the most up-to-date objects in the project. and click OK. Click Add. click Modify. For considerations when determining a title and description. Enter your search criteria and save the search. Then browse to and select your new search object or specify the name of the search object. Select a prompt style from the list. since they do not need to answer the prompt. For considerations when determining a default answer. Asking for user input: Prompts 325 . 5 Set the maximum and minimum number of prompt answers allowed. select the Choose default prompt answers check box and click Next. and click OK. click Add. Inc. page 298. select the objects. and click OK. select the answer(s) you want to be the default(s).

11 Save the prompt.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. page 351. For a table showing how to add each prompt type to a report. Inc. such as a specific date. page 296. The Numeric value prompt contains the Employee Age attribute. a number. see Reports: Adding prompts to a report. You create a report with the Employee attribute and the Employee Age attribute. or a specific word or phrase. You can now add your new prompt to a report. and a Maximum Value set at 50. . you want a report that lists all employees whose age is less than 40 years. 10 Click Finish. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 9 If you choose. Filtering data based on a single value or string: Value prompts Value prompts are useful when the result desired on the report is a single value. 326 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. For example. the operator Less than. see Answer requirements. The value prompt is designed to return report results based on the data type assigned to the data in your data source. you can select the Prompt answer required check box to require users to answer the prompt before running the report. For considerations about required and optional prompt answers. You create a Numeric value prompt while you are creating the report.

© 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. page 351. so it cannot be added to another filter. value prompts can be created directly in the Filter Editor at the same time you create the filter in which you want to place the value prompt. create it in the Prompt Generation Wizard. a value prompt is part of the filter’s definition and is not a stand-alone prompt. for Designers 7 Using the MicroStrategy Tutorial sample data. The filter or metric is then placed on a report. This gives you and other designers the flexibility to create a value prompt once and add it to various filters. To create a stand-alone value prompt.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. where they become part of the filter’s definition. if you execute the report and answer the prompt by specifying 40 as the Employee Age. the final report looks like the following: Value prompts are typically used on a filter. When created this way. but they can also be used on a metric as part of the metric’s formula. Because they are often used in filters. Asking for user input: Prompts 327 . For a table of where to use all prompts. see Reports: Adding prompts to a report.

Numeric prompts can be used in any filter that needs a number input from the user. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide The different types of value prompts are: • Date prompt: This value prompt type asks users to type or select a date. Big Decimal prompts should be used only in expressions that require high precision. For information on metric qualification filters. Numeric value prompts accept integers or decimals up to 15 digits of precision. see Filtering data based on business attribute forms. For example. such as qualifying on a Big Decimal attribute ID. select My Preferences. the Date prompt can be useful when added to a filter that screens data based on Year=2006. page 258. from the Tools menu. Big Decimal value prompts accept integers and decimals up to 38 digits of precision. • • • 328 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy. click the Advanced tab. To enable the long value prompt. Long prompts accept integer numbers up to 9 digits. page 267. and select the Add long prompts to the list of available value prompts check box. . Text prompt: This value prompt type asks users to type a string of text. Big Decimal prompt: This value prompt type asks users for a “big decimal” value. see Filtering data based on metric value or rank: Metric set qualification. The ability to create a long value prompt is not enabled in the Prompt Generation Wizard by default. The prompt lets users select a specific date within the year of the filter’s condition. In the My Preferences dialog box.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. • Long prompt: This value prompt type asks users for a long integer value. Inc. For information on attribute form qualification filters. Text prompts are commonly used in attribute form qualification filters. Date prompts are used in filters which qualify on a date. and returns data that has the date data type assigned to it and that matches the user’s entered date. Numeric prompt: This value prompt type asks users to type a numeric value. such as a metric qualification.

since they do not need to answer the prompt. Numeric prompt: This prompt lets users filter numeric data. but can simply run the report using the default answer. You do not need to specify a default answer if you do not want a default answer to appear for users. To define the prompt type to be presented to the user 3 Specify the type of value prompt: • • • • • Date prompt: This prompt lets users filter for data related to either a specific date or a range of dates.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. on the File menu. Big Decimal prompt: This prompt lets users filter data based on a big decimal value for a metric. for Designers 7 Creating value prompts To create a value prompt 1 In Desktop. Long prompt: This prompt lets users filter data based on a long integer value for a metric The long value prompt is displayed only if it is enabled in the My Preferences dialog box. To specify a default answer and restrict the number of answers A default answer can allow users to complete report execution more quickly. usually based on attribute forms. 4 Click Next. and then choose Prompt. see Default prompt answers. page 297. usually based on a metric. Asking for user input: Prompts 329 . on the Advanced tab. The Prompt Generation Wizard opens. 2 Select the Value prompt option and click Next. Text prompt: This prompt lets users filter text data. © 2006 MicroStrategy. For considerations when determining a default answer. Inc. point to New.

if you choose. this is the latest date. page 298. . and specify a valid range for the prompt answer. Select a prompt style from the list. For considerations when determining a title and description. you can select the Prompt answer required check box to require users to answer the prompt before running the report. see Title and description. click Modify. To finish creating your prompt 8 Specify a title and description for the prompt. To define a range within which the user’s answer must fall 6 To restrict the user to entering values within certain ranges: • Select the Minimum value check box and enter the lowest value allowed for the prompt answer. For considerations about required and optional prompt answers. 330 Asking for user input: Prompts © 2006 MicroStrategy.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. and click OK. this is the maximum number of characters allowed in the text string. see Answer requirements. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 5 Select the Default value check box to specify a default prompt answer. – For a Text prompt. 11 Click Finish. – For a Date prompt. – For a Text prompt. – For a Date prompt. 9 To specify how the prompt will appear in MicroStrategy Web. 10 If you choose to. this is the earliest date. 7 Click Next. 12 Save the prompt. page 296. • Select the Maximum value check box and enter the highest value allowed for the prompt answer. Inc. this is the fewest number of characters allowed in the text string.

Adding a prompt to a report To add one or more prompts to a new or existing report. Editing a prompt You can edit any prompt by double-clicking it in Desktop. For a table showing how to add each prompt type to a report. page 351. Additional prompt functionality The MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide provides detailed information about the following advanced features: • System prompts: Learn about these special built-in prompts. For steps to edit a prompt. ready for editing. Inc. Prompts in scheduled reports: Learn about how prompted reports work when they are on a set schedule to be executed. and then use the appropriate section to make changes to any aspect of the prompt. The prompt opens in the Prompt Generation Wizard. page 301 to determine the type of prompt you are editing. see Reports: Adding prompts to a report. and what the special requirements are for scheduled reports with prompts.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. • © 2006 MicroStrategy. see Reports: Adding prompts to a report. page 351. for Designers 7 All value prompts must be added to either a metric or a filter (depending on the type of value prompt and what you want it to do). and then the metric or filter is added to a report. see Types of prompts. Additional information and examples can be found in the MicroStrategy System Administration Guide. Asking for user input: Prompts 331 .

the data related to all the objects on the template that have satisfied the filtering conditions of the report filter are displayed on the report using the format specified by the template. Filters and prompts further restrict and refine the data displayed on the executed report. Inc. and so on. The New Grid dialog box opens whenever you create a new report. and it also determines the structure in which the information is displayed in the report’s results.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. as well as any target or grouping associated with the metric’s level. you place various MicroStrategy objects on the report’s template. • Designing a report’s structure: Templates A template is the structure that underlies any report. such as showing that metrics have been placed in the report’s columns. and this is where you can 332 Designing a report’s structure: Templates © 2006 MicroStrategy. and attributes have been placed in the rows. metrics. A template’s structure is the location of objects on the template. MicroStrategy comes with a set of pre-created report templates which you can use to build your own reports. as well as other objects such as custom groups and consolidations which are introduced in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. you can start with an existing template. . for Designers Basic Reporting Guide • Level prompts: Learn about creating a level prompt that lets users determine what level a metric is aggregated at. which will shorten the time it takes to produce the finished report. and prompts. When you are creating a report. Dynamic dates: Learn details and examples for defining a date that is a fixed offset of the current date. A template specifies the set of information that the report should retrieve from your data source. Objects can include attributes. the Revenue metric has been placed to the left of the Revenue Forecast metric so that a user reading left to right can see current revenue before seeing forecasted revenue. When you create any new report. filters. These templates let you create a new report quickly because the template already contains common objects and basic filters. When a report is executed.

as well as the executed report that results from what is defined on the template. for Designers 7 select an existing template on which to base the new report. a template and empty filter are a logical part of every report’s definition. the system automatically creates a template and a basic. empty report filter. The templates within the New Grid dialog box are shown in the image below: The diagram below shows the template and filter for a report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Whenever you initiate the creation of a new report. Inc. Designing a report’s structure: Templates 333 .Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Although you may not specifically define and use a separate template or report filter object.

refer to the following: • • • • • • Attributes: See Providing business context to a report: Attributes. it returns a list of all the attribute elements for that attribute. and run the report. page 197. Metrics: See Calculating data on a report: Metrics. page 206. Consolidations and custom groups: See the Consolidations and Custom Groups chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Prompts: See Asking for user input: Prompts. Inc. you see a list of names for every customer who has done business 334 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. This section assumes you have a basic understanding of each object presented in this chapter. as described in MicroStrategy objects. but the data returned is more meaningful if all these objects are present in the report. In this case. such as Customer. .7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Templates: See Designing a report’s structure: Templates. and one filter. page 208. In its most basic form it consists of two parts: • • A report template (usually simply called a template). To create a report that accurately answers a specific business query. one metric. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Creating a grid report A report is a MicroStrategy object that represents a request for a specific set of formatted data from your data source. For example. page 292. metrics. page 332. A simple report generally has at least one attribute. The report-related objects placed on the template. page 247. Filters: See Filtering data on a report: Filters. It is not necessary to have all these objects in the report. be sure you understand the fundamental MicroStrategy objects that make up a report. such as attributes. if you create a report with just one attribute. For information on the specific objects that make up a report. filters. and prompts. which is the underlying structure of the report.

for Designers 7 with your company and is in your database. and prompts to the report. If you add a metric and an attribute to the same report. in MicroStrategy Desktop and Web using the Report Editor. adding the Region and Year attributes to the report lets the report’s users see the context of the report’s results. If you use the MicroStrategy Tutorial project to perform the examples in the procedures that follow. It also provides a procedure to modify an existing report. you can define a specific geographic region and a time period by adding a few additional attributes to the report. you must have a MicroStrategy project already created. The Tutorial project offers an opportunity to use MicroStrategy even if your organization does not yet have its own data available in a MicroStrategy project.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. This section describes how to design a report with basic reporting components. such as Region and Year. In this example. such as attributes. this is still a prohibitively large report. Then you can add a filter to see only your most profitable Northeast region customers for the past year. and filters. you can limit the data to a specific area of interest. Prerequisites To create a report that displays your organization’s data. If you add a report filter to the report. The resulting report can display those customers in your Northeast region who brought in the most revenue last year. metrics. Likewise. metrics. if you add just one metric to an otherwise blank report. for all regions. you see all revenue data for all time. However. Inc. you can become familiar with the Report Editor environment and the features it offers. For example. for most organizations. Creating a grid report 335 . It provides procedures to create a new report and add attributes. such as the Customer attribute and the Revenue metric. the report data begins to become useful because you can view what revenue each customer brought to your stores. and you must have the appropriate MicroStrategy privileges to © 2006 MicroStrategy. filters. It is not required that the objects in a filter are also part of the report itself.

Your project may already contain other objects in addition to attributes and facts.) A project must contain objects that reflect your business data. when the report is executed. Attributes provide a context for reporting those facts. The Tutorial project is discussed below. If you plan to use the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and its sample data with the following procedures. which take the form of data stored in your data source. you must have a working MicroStrategy project containing objects that reflect your business data. They are used to create metrics as well as other objects in MicroStrategy. on a report that contains the Year attribute and a Units Sold metric (based on a Units Sold fact). you only need the privileges. such as metrics. the report can provide information only about how many units were sold overall. the appropriate business data can be retrieved from your data source. and so on. For example. you can use the Tutorial project to practice procedures in this book. Facts and attributes are the minimum objects that must already be created. A working project with data objects Before you create your own reports. Business objects that must already be created within a project include the following: • Facts. are business measurements. Facts are typically numeric and suitable for aggregation. for example Revenue or Units Sold. . filters. and so on.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. or variables. and prompts. so that those objects can be placed on a report and. it cannot answer questions about who purchased the units. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide perform the necessary tasks. Inc. (If you do not yet have your own working project. They are usually created by your project designer when the project itself is created. where. Each of these requirements is discussed below. Without any attribute on this report. when. Attributes are business concepts that answer questions about facts. • 336 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. such as when. you can view how many units were sold during a given year. where.

See your administrator for any questions about privileges assigned in MicroStrategy. page 5 in Chapter 1. as well as any formatting applied to the report. Design View displays the report’s template and lets you see the report’s definition. Report design and creation privileges As a MicroStrategy user. It also allows you to modify that report definition. Creating a grid report 337 . © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Designers 7 Detailed information about creating projects. When you create a new report or edit an existing report. the group of privileges assigned to most report designers is called Web Professional. You can use the Report Editor to create a new report or modify an existing report. attributes. Introduction to Reporting. as follows: • • For Desktop. Inc. you can use the Tutorial project with the procedures in this chapter to learn how to create the various report objects in MicroStrategy. The Report Editor is available in both MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. see About sample data. the report always appears in Design View within the Report Editor. A report’s definition is the definitions of all the objects that are included on the report when the report is designed. If you do not have a working project yet. For information on the Tutorial project and how to access it. and how to create these objects can be found in the MicroStrategy Project Design Guide. For MicroStrategy Web.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. to be able to create reports and report objects. Creating a report with the Report Editor The Report Editor is where you design reports. you must have the appropriate privileges assigned to you. as well as about facts. the group of privileges assigned to most report designers is called Desktop Designer.

so you can create a new report. Once you finish creating a report in Report Builder. To access an empty report in MicroStrategy Desktop 1 In Desktop. and it also determines the structure in which the information is displayed in the report’s results. To use Report Builder to create a quick report. point to New. However.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. and you need to create a report quickly. page 332. you can use MicroStrategy’s Report Builder to create a report. . You can access the Report Editor in either MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. • If you are using the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and its sample data. Inc. the Report Builder tool limits you to only adding certain objects to the report while you are using the tool. and choose Report. Once objects are added to it. see Quick report creation: Building a new report. log in to the Tutorial project. 338 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 196. 2 On the File menu. log in to the project in which you want to create a report. Both procedures are presented below. Opening the Report Editor with an empty report template Templates are introduced in Designing a report’s structure: Templates. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Creating a quick report If you are already familiar with MicroStrategy objects that are used to create a report. a template specifies the set of information that the report should retrieve from your data source. you can continue to modify the report in the Report Editor and add additional objects. This section contains procedures to open the Report Editor with a blank or empty report template.

page 405 in Appendix A. You are ready to design a new report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. select Empty Report and click OK. depending on what you have selected to be visible and the MicroStrategy products you own. showing a set of pre-created templates. see Finding your way around the Desktop Report Editor. To display or hide various Report Editor panes. For a description of each area or pane of the Desktop Report Editor. Inc. The Report Editor opens. displaying an empty report template. The following image shows the Report Editor displaying an empty report template in MicroStrategy Desktop. Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy. Some of the panes shown in the image above may not appear in the Report Editor. use the View menu. Creating a grid report 339 . for Designers 7 • If the New Grid dialog box opens.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries.

7

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

Basic Reporting Guide

3 Almost all reports have at least one attribute, one metric, and a filter. Use the following sections of this manual to add objects to your new report: • • • • Attributes: See Reports: Adding attributes to a report, page 341. Metrics: See Reports: Adding metrics to a report, page 344. Filters: See Reports: Adding a filter to a report, page 346. Prompts: See Reports: Adding prompts to a report, page 351.

To access a blank report in MicroStrategy Web

1 In MicroStrategy Web, log in to the project in which you want to create a report. • If you are using the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and its sample data, log in to the Tutorial project.

2 Select Create Report from the top toolbar. 3 Click Blank Report. A blank report template is displayed, and you are ready to design a new report. The following image shows the Report Editor displaying a blank report template in MicroStrategy Web.

340 Creating a grid report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

7

For a description of each area or pane of the MicroStrategy Web Report Editor, see MicroStrategy Web Report Editor interface, page 411 in Appendix A, Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy. 4 Use the following sections to add attributes, metrics, filters, and prompts to your new report. Almost all reports have at least one attribute, one metric, and a filter. • • • • Attributes: See Reports: Adding attributes to a report, page 341. Metrics: See Reports: Adding metrics to a report, page 344. Filters: See Reports: Adding a filter to a report, page 346. Prompts: See Reports: Adding prompts to a report, page 351.

Reports: Adding attributes to a report
Attributes are MicroStrategy objects that represent the business concepts reflected in your stored business data in your data source. Attributes provide a context in which to report on and analyze business facts or calculations. While knowing your company’s total sales is useful, knowing where and when the sales took place is much more helpful for analysts. For details on attributes, see Providing business context to a report: Attributes, page 206.

Selecting the right attributes
When you choose attributes to place on a report, select attributes that make sense together. For example, Product Supplier and Customer Income Bracket do not make much sense when their related data is displayed side-by-side on a report. It is difficult to imagine a metric that can be included on a report with these attributes, which would calculate useful report results which would be meaningful for both these attributes.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating a grid report

341

7

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

Basic Reporting Guide

However, the Customer Income Bracket attribute makes sense when it is combined with the Product attribute on a report, where they might allow an analyst to consider a list of products preferred by higher and lower income bracket customers. The Product Supplier attribute makes more sense when combined with any or all of the attributes Ship Date, Rush Orders, Weeks to Ship, or some other attribute related to the supply chain.
To add an attribute to a report

If you are using one of your organization’s projects, this procedure assumes attributes have been created. Attributes are usually created by your project’s designer. If attributes need to be created, see the MicroStrategy Project Design Guide. 1 If it is not already open, open the Report Editor. • • In Desktop: See To access an empty report in MicroStrategy Desktop, page 338. In MicroStrategy Web: See To access a blank report in MicroStrategy Web, page 340.

2 In the Object Browser pane, navigate to your project’s attributes folder and open it. • • If the Object Browser pane is not visible, from the View menu, select Object Browser. If you are using the Tutorial project, open the Schema Objects folder, then open the Attributes folder. Select any attribute to use for the next step. In this procedure, Category is used.

342 Creating a grid report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

7

3 Right-click the attribute you want to add to the report and select Add to Row (in Web, select Add to Grid), as shown in the image below:

Attributes are commonly displayed in a report’s rows, although you can add attributes to a report’s column, if you wish. 4 The attribute appears in the rows section of your report’s template, as shown in the image below:

5 Repeat the steps above to add additional attributes to your report, if you wish. 6 Almost all reports have at least one attribute, one metric, and a filter. If you need to, use the following sections of this manual to add additional objects to your new report:

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating a grid report

343

7

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

Basic Reporting Guide

• • •

Metrics: See Reports: Adding metrics to a report, page 344. Filters: See Reports: Adding a filter to a report, page 346. Prompts: See Reports: Adding prompts to a report, page 351.

7 Save the report. For details on how a report is saved, see Saving a report, page 366.

Reports: Adding metrics to a report
Metrics are MicroStrategy objects that represent business measures and key performance indicators. From a practical perspective, metrics are the calculations performed on data stored in your database, the results of which are displayed on a report. For details on metrics, see Calculating data on a report: Metrics, page 208.
To add a metric to a report

If you are using one of your organization’s projects, this procedure assumes at least one metric has been created. If you need to create metrics, see Calculating data on a report: Metrics, page 208. 1 If it is not already open, open the Report Editor. • • In Desktop: See To access an empty report in MicroStrategy Desktop, page 338. In MicroStrategy Web: See To access a blank report in MicroStrategy Web, page 340.

2 In the Object Browser pane on the left, navigate to your project’s metrics folder and open it. • • If the Object Browser pane is not visible, from the View menu, select Object Browser. If you are using the Tutorial project, open the Public Objects folder, then open the Metrics folder. Select

344 Creating a grid report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

7

any metric to use in the next step. In this procedure, Average Revenue is used. 3 Right-click the metric you want to add to the report and select Add to Column (in Web, select Add to Grid), as shown in the image below:

Metrics are commonly displayed in a report’s columns, although you can add metric’s to a report’s row, if you wish. 4 The metric appears in the rows section of your report’s template, as shown in the image below:

5 Repeat the steps above to add additional metrics to your report, as needed.

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating a grid report

345

7

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

Basic Reporting Guide

6 Almost all reports have at least one attribute, one metric, and a filter. If you need to, use the following sections of this manual to add additional objects to your new report: • • • Attributes: Reports: Adding attributes to a report, page 341. Filters: Reports: Adding a filter to a report, page 346. Prompts: Reports: Adding prompts to a report, page 351.

7 If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source, once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it, from the View menu select Grid View. 8 Save the report. For details on how a report is saved, see Saving a report, page 366.

Reports: Adding a filter to a report
A filter screens data in your data source to determine whether the data should be included in or excluded from the calculations of the report results. A filter is not required in a report, although reports without filters are more likely to return too much data to be displayed effectively. If a filter is added, it should make sense with the objects already on the report. For details on filters in general and the various types of filters, see Filtering data on a report: Filters, page 247. You need to know what type of filter you want to have when you add it to a report. Filters can be added to a report in two ways: • If a filter object has already been created in your project (this is a stand-alone filter), use the To add a stand-alone filter to a report procedure below.

346 Creating a grid report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Basic Reporting Guide

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

7

If a separate filter has not already been created, you can create a filter directly in the report. However, be aware that the filter cannot be used as an independent object on other reports. To create a filter within the report, use the To create a filter directly within a report procedure below.

To add a stand-alone filter to a report

If you are using one of your organization’s projects, this procedure assumes at least one filter has been created. If you need to create filters, see Filtering data on a report: Filters, page 247. 1 If it is not already open, open the Report Editor. • • In Desktop: See To access an empty report in MicroStrategy Desktop, page 338. In MicroStrategy Web: See To access a blank report in MicroStrategy Web, page 340.

2 In the Object Browser pane on the left, navigate to the folder where your filter is located and open it. • • If the Object Browser pane is not visible, from the View menu, select Object Browser. If you are using the Tutorial project, open the Public Objects folder, then open the Filters folder. Select any filter to use in the next step. In this procedure, Top 5 Products By Revenue is used.

3 Add the filter to the filter pane:

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating a grid report

347

7

Building Query Objects and Queries, for Designers

Basic Reporting Guide

In Desktop, drag and drop the filter into the Report Filter pane, as shown in the image below:

In Web, click Edit Filter. Then right-click on the filter and select Add to Filter.

4 Repeat the steps above to add additional filters to your report, as needed. 5 Almost all reports have at least one attribute, one metric, and a filter. If you need to, use the following sections of this manual to add additional objects to your new report: • • • Attributes: Reports: Adding attributes to a report, page 341. Metrics: Reports: Adding metrics to a report, page 344. Prompts: Reports: Adding prompts to a report, page 351.

6 If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source, once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it and you have added a filter, from the View menu select Grid View. 7 Save the report. For details on how a report is saved, see Saving a report, page 366.

348 Creating a grid report

© 2006 MicroStrategy, Inc.

for Designers 7 To create a filter directly within a report You can create a filter within an existing. see the following: © 2006 MicroStrategy.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. The Filtering Options pane expands. • • In Desktop: See To access an empty report in MicroStrategy Desktop. page 338. The report opens in the Report Editor. saved report by double-clicking the report. as shown in the image below: • In MicroStrategy Web: Click Edit Report Filter above the report template. In MicroStrategy Web: See To access a blank report in MicroStrategy Web. page 340. open the Report Editor. 2 Open the Report Filter pane: • In Desktop: Double-click in the Report Filter pane on the right. ready for editing. 3 Select the type of filter you want to create. and for steps to create your chosen type of filter. For complete details on each type of filter you can create. Inc. Creating a grid report 349 . 1 If it is not already open.

Set qualification filter: See Filtering data based on attribute relationships or metrics: Set qualifications. 350 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 278. page 344. page 253. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide • Attribute qualification filter: See Filtering data based on business attributes: Attribute qualifications. one metric. Shortcut-to-a-filter filter: See Filtering data based on an existing filter: Shortcut-to-a-filter qualifications. If you need to. • • • • 4 Repeat the steps above to add additional filters to your report. use the following sections of this manual to add additional objects to your new report: • • • Attributes: See Reports: Adding attributes to a report. 6 If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source. page 341. page 276. Metrics: See Reports: Adding metrics to a report. For details on how a report is saved. 7 Save the report. 5 Almost all reports have at least one attribute. Prompts: See Reports: Adding prompts to a report. once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it and you have added a filter. see the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. page 351. Inc. from the View menu select Grid View. Advanced qualification filter: For details and examples to create an advanced filter. page 366.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. see Saving a report. . as needed. page 266. Shortcut-to-a-report filter: See Creating a filter based on the results of a report: Shortcut-to-a-report qualifications. and a filter.

For details on prompts in general and the various types of prompts. see Types of prompts. You need to know what type of prompt you will be using when deciding where and how to add it to a report. Inc. Creating a grid report 351 . Use the following table when considering how and where to add a prompt to a report: Add To Report Editor: Template Definition Pane Add To Report Editor: Report Filter Pane Add To Report Editor: Page-by Area Add To Metric Editor: Definition Pane Filter Name Add To Filter Editor: Filter Definition Pane Filter Definition Prompts “Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy” prompt “Qualify on an attribute” prompt “Choose from an attribute element list” prompt “Qualify on a metric” prompt Object Prompts Object prompt of attributes Object prompt of metrics Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Added as part of an advanced qualification Added as part of a set qualification. but can also be placed in the condition part of a metric’s definition in the Metric Editor. For example. depending on the type of object in the object prompt.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. and any place that accepts metrics No Yes No No Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 301. How the user answers the question determines what data is displayed on the report when it is returned from your data source. for Designers 7 Reports: Adding prompts to a report A prompt is a question the system presents to a user during report execution. object prompts are most commonly placed directly on a report.

on an attribute form of Date data type Added as part of a set qualification.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. (For steps. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. on an attribute form of a text data type Numeric prompt. Inc. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Filter Name Add To Report Editor: Template Definition Pane No Add To Report Editor: Report Filter Pane Yes Add To Report Editor: Page-by Area No Add To Metric Editor: Definition Pane Yes Add To Filter Editor: Filter Definition Pane Object prompt of filters Value Prompts Date prompt Yes No No No No Added as part of an attribute form qualification. page 344. Long prompt. page 356 Add To Metric Editor: Definition Pane Adding a prompt to a metric’s definition in the Metric Editor. to add a prompt to a report you must first add the prompt to a filter or metric in Desktop. as a metric value comparison Added as part of an attribute form qualification. page 357 Add to Filter Editor: Filter Definition Pane Adding a prompt to a filter’s definition in the Filter Editor. page 354 Add To Report Editor: Page-by Area Adding a prompt to the Page-by area in the Report Editor. page 359 In MicroStrategy Web. 352 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. or Big Decimal prompt Text prompt No No No Yes No No No No Add To Report Editor: Template Definition Pane Procedure Adding a prompt to the Template definition pane in the Report Editor. Then you can add the filter or metric to the Web report. . page 346 or Reports: Adding metrics to a report. page 353 Add To Report Editor: Report Filter Pane Adding a prompt to the Report Filter pane in the Report Editor.) Use the table above to determine which prompts can be added to filters and metrics.

this procedure assumes at least one prompt has been created. open the Report Editor. For steps to do this. see Creating object prompts. To add a prompt to the Template definition pane in the Report Editor If you are using one of your organization’s projects. If you need to create prompts. from the View menu select Object Browser. for Designers 7 Adding a prompt to the Template definition pane in the Report Editor You can add object prompts to the Template definition pane of the Report Editor. Inc. For steps to create an object prompt. page 324. 1 If you have not already done so. This procedure assumes you have already created and saved a prompt. see Opening the Report Editor with an empty report template. see Asking for user input: Prompts. page 292. 2 Use the Object Browser on the left to locate the prompt you want to add to the report.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. page 338. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Creating a grid report 353 . • If the Object Browser does not appear.

once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it and you have added a prompt. For details on how a report is saved. This procedure assumes you have already created and saved a prompt. 5 If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source. as shown in the image below: 4 Add more prompts or other objects to the report if desired. page 366. page 324.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. For steps to create a filter definition prompt. Adding a prompt to the Report Filter pane in the Report Editor You can add filter definition prompts to the Report Filter pane of the Report Editor. see Creating object prompts. You can also add an object prompt that is made up of filters. page 307. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 3 Drag and drop the prompt onto the Template Definition pane. from the View menu select Grid View. Inc. 354 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. and if you want to see how a prompt works for a user. To create an object prompt. . see Saving a report. see Creating a filter definition prompt. 6 Save the report.

Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Creating a grid report 355 . © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. 2 Use the Object Browser on the left to locate the prompt you want to add to the report. 5 If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source. this procedure assumes at least one prompt has been created. from the View menu select Grid View. as shown in the image below: 4 Add more prompts or other objects to the report if desired. and if you want to see how a prompt works for a user. page 292. For steps to do this. 1 If you have not already done so. • If the Object Browser does not appear. page 338. If you need to create prompts. once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it and you have added a prompt. see Asking for user input: Prompts. from the View menu select Object Browser. open the Report Editor. for Designers 7 To add a prompt to the Report Filter pane in the Report Editor If you are using one of your organization’s projects. 3 Drag and drop the prompt onto the Report Filter pane. see Opening the Report Editor with an empty report template.

For steps to do this. . 2 Use the Object Browser on the left to locate the prompt you want to add to the report. To add a prompt to the Page-by area in the Report Editor If you are using one of your organization’s projects. see Saving a report. 356 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. This procedure assumes you have already created and saved a prompt. Analyzing Data. For steps to create an object prompt. from the View menu select Page-by. • If the page-by area does not appear. 3 Drag and drop the prompt onto the page-by area. You can add object prompts to the page-by area of the Report Editor. For background information on page-by fields. open the Report Editor. see Asking for user input: Prompts. page 366. see Creating object prompts. For details on how a report is saved. page 79 in Chapter 3. Inc.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. see Grouping data by page. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 6 Save the report. from the View menu select Object Browser. If you need to create prompts. allowing users to see manageable subsets of otherwise large quantities of data. • If the Object Browser does not appear. page 338. this procedure assumes at least one prompt has been created. The pages are created based on the objects on the report. page 324. see Opening the Report Editor with an empty report template. Adding a prompt to the Page-by area in the Report Editor Page-by is the MicroStrategy functionality that lets you turn a long report into a set of individual pages. page 292. 1 If you have not already done so.

for Designers 7 The image below shows an object prompt called Metrics in the page-by area: 4 Add more prompts or other objects to the report if desired. see Saving a report. page 329. You can also add Numeric prompts. and Long prompts. from the View menu select Grid View. Creating a grid report 357 . 6 Save the report. once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it and you have added a prompt. see Creating value prompts. For details on how a report is saved. Adding a prompt to a metric’s definition in the Metric Editor You can add Object prompts to a metric’s definition in the Metric Editor. Inc.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. and if you want to see how a prompt works for a user. © 2006 MicroStrategy. For steps to create an object prompt. page 324. page 366. 5 If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source. To create a numeric prompt. which are all types of a value prompt. see Creating object prompts. This procedure assumes you have already created and saved a prompt. Big Decimal prompts.

. and add it to a report. see Reports: Adding metrics to a report. For steps to do this. 2 Create your metric’s formula. For examples and steps. see Creating a metric. 1 If you have not already done so. page 292. page 229. see Asking for user input: Prompts. from the View menu select Object Browser. If you need to create prompts. • If the Object Browser does not appear. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide To add a prompt to a metric’s definition in the Metric Editor If you are using one of your organization’s projects. For steps to do this. page 209. 3 Use the Object Browser on the left to locate the prompt you want to add to the metric’s definition. Inc. see Viewing and working with metrics: The Metric Editor.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. this procedure assumes at least one prompt has been created. open the Metric Editor. 358 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. as shown in the image below: 5 Save the metric. page 344. 4 Drag and drop the prompt onto the Definition pane at the bottom right.

Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Options include the following: • • • • Adding a filter definition prompt or an object prompt containing filters to a report. Use the procedure below to add these prompt types to a filter. Use one of the following procedures below. from the View menu select Grid View. page 363 Adding a Text prompt to a report. For requirements for certain types of prompts if they are to be used in a filter’s definition. depending on the type of prompt you want to add to the filter. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. Inc. Adding a prompt to a filter’s definition in the Filter Editor You can add almost any kind of prompt to a filter’s definition in the Filter Editor. Creating a grid report 359 . page 361 Adding a Date prompt to a report. for Designers 7 If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source. once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it. page 364 Adding a filter definition prompt or an object prompt containing filters to a report To add any of the filter definition prompts to a report. or to add an object prompt made up of filters to a report. Then you add that filter containing the prompt(s) to a report. Once your filter containing the prompt(s) is created. and if you want to see how a prompt works for a user. or Big Decimal prompt to a report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 346 to add the filter to a report. page 351. you first add them to the Filter Definition pane of the Filter Editor. Long prompt. page 359 Adding a Numeric prompt. see Reports: Adding prompts to a report.

Inc. 1 If you have not already done so. If you need to create prompts. see Creating or editing filters: The Filter Editor. For steps to do this. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide To add a prompt to the Filter Definition pane in the Filter Editor This procedure assumes at least one prompt has been created. 360 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. For steps to do this. • If the Object Browser does not appear. . 3 Drag and drop the prompt onto the Filter definition pane on the right. from the View menu select Grid View. page 249. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. open the Filter Editor. and add it to a report. If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source. page 299. 2 Use the Object Browser on the left to locate the prompt you want to add to the filter’s definition. see Creating a prompt. page 346. as shown in the image below: 4 Save the filter. from the View menu select Object Browser. once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it and you have added a prompt. and if you want to see how a prompt works for a user.7 Building Query Objects and Queries.

a Long prompt. page 346 to add the filter to a report. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. Then you add that filter containing the prompt to a report. Long. Long prompt. To add a Numeric prompt. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Creating a grid report 361 . 1 If you have not already done so. so that when a user executes a report containing that filter. page 299. or Big Decimal prompt to a filter in the Filter Editor This procedure assumes at least one prompt has been created. and the operator is Top. Use the procedure below to add one of these Value prompt types to a filter. For steps to do this. the function is Percent. which defines the top percentage of revenue that user wants to see displayed in the report’s results. If you need to create prompts. Each user who executes the report is prompted to provide a number. You create a Numeric prompt asking for a number between 0 and 100. page 249.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. see Creating a prompt. you first add the prompt to a set qualification in the Filter Editor. based on some top percentage. see Creating or editing filters: The Filter Editor. Then you use the procedure below to create a filter that includes your Numeric prompt. You want to let each user determine what the percentage number should be. or Big Decimal prompt to a report You can add integer-based Value prompts to a filter. Inc. the user is prompted to provide a number. This filter is then placed on a report that includes the Revenue metric as part of its report definition. The number entered by the user is then used to filter data that is displayed on the resulting report. open the Filter Editor. The filter is defined so that the metric is Revenue. for Designers 7 Adding a Numeric prompt. To add a Numeric. you might create a filter that screens data displayed for the Revenue metric. For example.) Once your filter containing the prompt is created. or a Big Decimal prompt to a report. (You can add more than one prompt to a filter.

or Big Decimal prompt. whereas your prompt allows users to filter for numeric values. Rank. browser to locate your Numeric. and drag and drop the prompt into the field to the right of Value. Long. once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it and you have added a prompt.. Inc. select Metric. 5 In the Metric field.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. The Set Qualification pane opens.. page 346. 6 From the Function drop-down list. depending on what type of filtering you want to perform. These two options do not allow you to use your prompt in the filter. 9 Click OK to save your filter definition and close the Set Qualification pane. 362 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. from the View menu select Grid View. select either Metric Value. The Filtering Options field opens.) to locate and select the metric. 11 Add the filter containing your prompt to a report. 4 From the Type drop-down list. For steps to do this. type the name of the metric you want to base the filter on. You can also browse for the metric (click . because they filter only for null values in the report’s results. or Percent. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. 3 Select Add a Set qualification and click OK. and if you want to see how a prompt works for a user. 8 Using the Object Browser on the left. Do not select Is Null or Is Not Null. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 2 Double-click in the Filter definition pane on the right. 10 Click Save and Close to save your filter and close the Filter Editor. . 7 From the Operator drop-down list. select the value you need to complete your filter’s definition. If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source.

Then you use the procedure below to create a filter that includes your Date prompt. open the Filter Editor.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. © 2006 MicroStrategy. you might create a filter that screens data displayed for the Revenue metric by calculating revenue from a certain date. The Filtering Options field opens. 3 Select Add an Attribute qualification and click OK. Then you add that filter containing the prompt to a report. 2 Double-click in the Filter definition pane on the right. 1 If you have not already done so. For steps to do this. the user is prompted to provide a specific date.) Once your filter containing the prompt is created. (You can add more than one prompt to a filter. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. Each user who executes the report is prompted to provide a date. To add a Date prompt to a filter in the Filter Editor This procedure assumes at least one prompt has been created. page 249. If you need to create prompts. which defines the period of time that user wants to see reflected in the report’s results. see Creating or editing filters: The Filter Editor. Creating a grid report 363 . This filter is then placed on a report that includes the Day attribute and the Revenue metric as part of its report definition. You create a Date prompt asking for a specific date in the year 2006. You want to let each user determine what the date should be. page 299. The Attribute Qualification pane opens. page 346 to add the filter to a report. so that when a user executes a report containing that filter. The filter is defined so that the attribute is Day and the operator is Exactly. Use the procedure below to add a Date prompt to a filter. you first add the prompt to an attribute qualification in the Filter Editor. The date entered by the user is then used to filter data that is displayed on the resulting report. To add a Date prompt to a report. Inc. see Creating a prompt. for Designers 7 Adding a Date prompt to a report You can add Date prompts to a filter. For example.

) to locate and select the attribute. select Date. For example. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. Not in list. The text entered by the user is used to filter data that is displayed on the resulting report. 10 Add the filter containing your prompt to a report. and drag and drop the prompt into the field to the right of Value. Inc. You can also browse for the attribute (click . You want to let each user determine which customer last 364 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. Is Null. Adding a Text prompt to a report You can add Text prompts to a filter. type the name of the attribute you want to base the filter on. so that when a user executes a report containing that filter.. browser to locate your Date prompt. you might create a filter that screens data displayed for the Revenue metric by searching for revenue amounts from subsets of customers.7 Building Query Objects and Queries.. For steps to do this. 8 Click OK to save your filter definition and close the Attribute Qualification pane. once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it and you have added a prompt. 9 Click Save and Close to save your filter and close the Filter Editor. 6 From the Operator drop-down list. the user is prompted to type a specific text string (set of characters) to be used within the filter. . and if you want to see how a prompt works for a user. 7 Using the Object Browser on the left. page 346. from the View menu select Grid View. If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source. or Is Not Null. select an operator that suits your filtering definition. Be sure to select an attribute that has an attribute form of the Date data type. Do not select In list. 5 From the Qualify On drop-down list. based on last names. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 4 In the Attribute field.

see Creating a prompt. If you need to create prompts. For steps to do this. 3 Select Add an Attribute qualification and click OK. see Creating or editing filters: The Filter Editor. To add a Text prompt to a filter in the Filter Editor This procedure assumes at least one prompt has been created. page 299. For example. The Attribute Qualification pane opens. page 346 to add the filter to a report. 2 Double-click in the Filter definition pane on the right. To add a Text prompt to a report. for Designers 7 names are reflected in the revenue shown in the report results.) Once your filter containing the prompt is created.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Use the procedure below to add a Text prompt to a filter. you use the procedure below to create a filter that includes your Text prompt. open the Filter Editor. Each user who executes the report is prompted to provide a text string. one user might enter “J” to see revenue for all customers whose last name begins with J. Creating a grid report 365 . 1 If you have not already done so. and the operator is Begins With. (You can add more than one prompt to a filter. You create a Text prompt asking for a specific letter or last name. © 2006 MicroStrategy. The Filtering Options field opens. The filter is defined so that the attribute is Customer. page 249. Then you add that filter containing the prompt to a report. you first add the prompt to an attribute qualification in the Filter Editor. After your Text prompt is created. while another user might enter “Jackson” to see only revenue from customers whose last name is Jackson. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. which defines the last name or beginning of the last name for the customers whose revenue that user wants to see reflected in the report’s results. This filter is then placed on a report that includes the Customer attribute and the Revenue metric as part of its report definition. it qualifies on Last Name. Inc.

10 Add the filter containing your prompt to a report. Not in list. You can also browse for the attribute (click . select an operator that suits your filtering definition..) to locate and select the attribute. and if you want to see how a prompt works for a user. see Reports: Adding a filter to a report. report filtering criteria.. select the attribute form that suits the type of data you want to filter. Is Null. Do not select In list. Inc. 8 Click OK to save your filter definition and close the Attribute Qualification pane. and drag and drop the prompt into the field to the right of Value. 7 Using the Object Browser on the left. For steps to do this. page 346. 9 Click Save and Close to save your filter and close the Filter Editor. 366 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. type the name of the attribute you want to base the filter on. Saving a report After you create or modify a report. and report formatting information are stored in the MicroStrategy metadata repository. browser to locate your Text prompt. 5 From the Qualify On drop-down list. When you save a report. its name and its definition such as the template. once your report has one or more attributes and metrics in it and you have added a prompt. If you want to see what your report looks like when executed against the data source. you must save the report so that you and others can execute it in the future.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. 6 From the Operator drop-down list. Do not select ID or DATE. from the View menu select Grid View. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 4 In the Attribute field. or Is Not Null. .

page 371. After you create and save a report. To save a report This procedure assumes you have either finished creating a new report or modifying an existing report. each project’s My Personal Objects folder (and the folders within it) is available only to the user who is logged in at the time a report or other object is saved to this folder. and they can limit or reformat the data results according to their own analysis needs. Inc. and you have the report open in the Report Editor. double-click the report to retrieve and display the most recent data from your data source. Other users can then execute that report to analyze the data it shows. you can include additional functionality on the report for users. 4 Click Save. Example for creating a new report This section provides tutorials for designing a basic grid report in MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Web. © 2006 MicroStrategy. select Save As. 1 From the report’s File menu. see Adding features for users. 3 Give your new report a name that reflects its use as a business intelligence data analysis tool. In contrast.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. for Designers 7 Saving a new report creates a predefined report. so they can explore report data more effectively and see related data. To execute the report. Each project’s Public Objects folder is available to all users who have access to that project. Creating a grid report 367 . For details on additional options you can add to a report. 2 Navigate to the location in which you want to save the new report.

The report on which it is based can be found in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project in the following location: Public Objects\Reports\Subject Areas\Sales and Profitability Analysis. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Using the appropriate procedure below. Inc. For details on the Tutorial project. 368 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. see About sample data. page 5. Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy for an introduction to the Report Editor functionality. The report is shown in the image below: Designing a report in Desktop The following procedure assumes you are using report objects from the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and are making use of the sample Tutorial data. . you design the report called My Revenue by Region using the Region attribute and the Revenue metric. page 402 in Appendix A. see Navigating through Desktop. This procedure also assumes you are familiar with the Report Editor in MicroStrategy Desktop.

10 Navigate to the location in which you want to save the report. and choose Report. 3 From the File menu. and select My Reports. • If the New Grid dialog box opens. • If you cannot see the Object Browser. Creating a grid report 369 . usually in the My Reports folder. browse to the Public Objects folder and double-click the Metrics folder. Inc. Name the report My Revenue by Region and click Save. browse to the Schema Objects folder. 7 In the Object Browser. in the Folder List. from the View menu select Object Browser. then double-click the Sales Metrics folder. select Save As. The Save Report As dialog box opens.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. The Report Editor opens. point to New. log in to a project source that contains the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. © 2006 MicroStrategy. 2 Expand the MicroStrategy Tutorial project. 8 Double-click the Revenue metric to add it to the Template pane. 4 In the Object Browser on the left. 9 From the File menu. 6 Double-click the Region attribute to add it to the Template pane. for Designers 7 To design the My Revenue by Region report in Desktop 1 In MicroStrategy Desktop. select Empty Report and click OK. expand the My Personal Objects folder. 5 Double-click the Attributes folder and then the Geography folder to display the attributes within that folder.

log in to the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and select Create Report. Designing a report in MicroStrategy Web The following procedure assumes you are using report objects from the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and are making use of the sample Tutorial data. 3 In the Object Browser on the left. Open the Attributes folder and then the Geography folder. this view provides actual revenue numbers an analyst can use for detailed reporting purposes. page 5. When a report like this is built using your organization’s objects. click Schema Objects to open the Schema Objects folder. This procedure also assumes you are familiar with the Report Editor in MicroStrategy Web. 370 Creating a grid report © 2006 MicroStrategy. For details on the Tutorial project. see MicroStrategy Web Report Editor interface. This view provides an opportunity to perform a high-level assessment of how various regions are doing in terms of revenue. 12 From the View menu. Inc. see About sample data. 4 Double-click the Region attribute to add it to the Template pane. page 411 in Appendix A.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy for an introduction to the Report Editor functionality. choose Graph View to see the report as it is displayed in the matching sample report in the Tutorial project. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 11 From the View menu. . choose Grid View. This runs the report and displays the report results showing sample data retrieved from the sample data warehouse. 2 Select Blank Report. To design the Revenue by Region report in MicroStrategy Web 1 In MicroStrategy Web.

page 374 Adding usability to a Report Services document. 9 From the View menu. The Save As dialog box opens. navigate back to MicroStrategy Tutorial. page 378 Adding features for users 371 . (To do this. When a report like this is built using your organization’s objects. then select Public Objects. Browse to the folder where you want to save your report. browse to the Public Objects folder. showing sample data from the sample data warehouse. usually the My Reports folder. Inc. User features you should consider adding include: • • • • • • © 2006 MicroStrategy. Double-click the Revenue metric to add it to the Template pane. select Metrics. Save the report as My Revenue by Region Web and click OK. select Graph View. Formatting row and column headers and cells. by either enabling them or creating and adding them to an existing report. 6 In the Metrics folder. page 372 Formatting empty cells and null values. 8 Click Run newly saved report to execute the report and display the results.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. for Designers 7 5 In the Object Browser. Adding features for users You can provide several report manipulation capabilities for report analysts. this view provides actual revenue numbers an analyst can use for detailed reporting purposes. page 378 Customizing drill maps. 7 Click Save Report. open the Sales Metrics folder. page 373 Formatting metrics on a specific report. page 377 Confirming your choice of graph style. This lets analysts compare data on a higher level to see how various regions are doing in terms of revenue. These options provide an interactive reporting experience to your users.) In the Public Objects folder.

To format row and column headers and cells 1 Open the report you want to format. Make sure the report is visually pleasing. page 381 Specifying maximum and minimum values: Report limits. the report’s designer can apply a broader range of formatting options to a report. Formatting a Report. page 379 Hierarchical display of grouped attribute elements. Fine-tuning your report’s formatting is described below.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Formatting options available to analysts are described in Chapter 2. page 382 Determining evaluation order of calculations. Inc. or to simply achieve a pleasing and easy-to-read look. Additional formatting ideas can be found in the Reports chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. be sure to execute and look at your new report in MicroStrategy Web as well. However. page 380 Adding consolidations and custom groups. and if necessary apply an autostyle to ensure the report is easy to read. Formatting row and column headers and cells Analysts can apply a number of formatting characteristics to a report they have executed. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide • • • • • • • Including totals and subtotals. page 383 Each of these features is described below. so that users can more effectively understand the data displayed on the report. Formatting for easier data analysis If you created a report in Desktop. page 380 Grouping data by page: Adding page-by fields to a report. 372 Adding features for users © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 379 Including sorted data. .

see Formatting null values and blank cells. the description cannot be displayed because it has not been retrieved from the data source. Analysts can apply formatting for null values to a given report.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. null values can occur when the report references unavailable objects. the project-level settings are used. along with other reasons. If you choose the Use default option. under the Report Definition category. 3 The Format Cells dialog box opens. Click Help for details on every option within each tab of the Format Cells dialog box. Then select one of the following: • • Headers to format the heading of rows or columns. select either Rows or Columns. Determining a specific format for null values can be helpful for analysts who might otherwise be confused on seeing one or more blank cells in a report. page 34 in Chapter 2. © 2006 MicroStrategy. For steps to format empty cells or null values. Adding features for users 373 . for Designers 7 2 From the Format menu. For example. These are found in the Project Configuration Editor. Formatting empty cells and null values Some cells within the tables in your data source may be empty because the data was not available. When the report is executed. you map the attribute description and ID forms of the Region attribute. but you only include the ID in the SELECT clause. In Freeform SQL reports. Formatting a Report. You can determine how these empty or null values are handled for display within a report. Values to format the cells that make up the rows or columns. if they wish. Inc. can cause cells in some reports to be empty. This.

an analyst can instantly understand what a particular metric’s values mean when they are preceded by a currency sign. For more details on aliasing and steps to create an alias on a report. The end users may not need or want to know what the level is. . Certain formatting choices can help analysts more quickly identify important values or perform data comparisons. Formatting a Report. Use an alias to display the Sales metric as Revenue for Sales department reports. Inc. see Renaming row and column headers. Consider the type of data that is returned on the report you are formatting. The Sales department commonly refers to this metric as Revenue. Formatting metrics on a specific report You can format the data related to individual metrics on a report. they simply want to know what the metric represents on their specific report. The procedure below formats a metric only within the context of the report that is open when the formatting is applied to the metric. Financial numbers are generally easier to work with when a decimal is in place. However. and apply formatting choices that enhance understanding of that data. including the level and condition in the name. For example. you create a metric named Sales. which can be helpful while you are designing reports. without changing the original name of the metric or its name on other reports. If the metric is also used on 374 Adding features for users © 2006 MicroStrategy. For example. Different departments of the same company may have different names for the same business measurement. Aliases also allow you to initially name metrics descriptively.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. while Marketing calls it Sales. page 35 in Chapter 2. Aliases provide a second opportunity to name the metric for those users. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Renaming row and column headers: Aliasing Creating different aliases for different reports enables you to create flexible reports for many different users. that name is often too long and technical to be displayed for analysts on a report. Metric aliases help provide greater flexibility for naming conventions in situations such as this one.

12/4/2006. • To format the metric’s column or row header. • To format numbers: Select the Number tab. April 12. page 337. and so on. page 242. on the Format menu. you can determine the number of decimal places to be displayed. To format a metric on a specific report 1 Open the report containing the metric to be formatted. Inc. then use the Settings area to choose how to format numbers for this metric. 3 Format any or all of the following aspects of the metric. Choose a Category. If you select Fixed as your category. To format the metric’s values. To open a report in the Report Editor. such as 4/12/06. point to the metric’s name and select Headers. 2006. To format a metric so that the formatting appears on every report in which the metric is used.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. for © 2006 MicroStrategy. and whether negative numbers are allowed to be displayed. the formatting applied with this procedure does not appear on that other report. see Creating a report with the Report Editor. the Settings area lets you choose which date format to use. Text alignment determines how the content of each cell is aligned. for details on every option in each tab. The following steps describe the most commonly used options. For example. on the Format menu. Adding features for users 375 . click Help. if you select Date as your category. and you can format the metrics’ values that appear when the report is executed against your data source. whether you want numbers to be separated every three decimal places. 2 You can format the metric’s column or row header. point to the metric’s name and select Values. see Formatting a metric. • The Format Cells dialog box opens. • To format the alignment: Select the Alignment tab. for Designers 7 another report. using the Report Editor. Select an alignment option.

Select the Font Name you want values to appear in. Inc. • To format borders: See Formatting report borders. patterns do not appear in reports because HTML cannot display patterns as the background of cells. You can also select a Size.00. Clear the Use defaults check box. 376 Adding features for users © 2006 MicroStrategy. If there is not enough data to fill the width of a cell. and a Color in which text should be displayed. However. Cyrillic. if a cell’s data is $39.00$39. select the Fill option for horizontal alignment. To do this. click OK to apply the formatting. Italic.00$39.00. the data is repeated and displayed as $39. • 4 When you are finished formatting this metric. To format the background: Select the Background tab.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. and whether to wrap the text. and so on). You can also select Horizontal and Vertical alignment. The pattern settings define how to fill the cell background. cells that have the horizontal Fill option applied appear centered. because HTML does not have the ability to display Fill characteristics. and so on). you can have the data repeat until it fills the cell. Formatting a Report. In MicroStrategy Web. and if you select Fill for horizontal alignment. For example. The Fill color is used for the cell background. You can choose a Script for the displayed text (Western. • To format the font: Select the Font tab. and the Pattern color is used to draw a pattern. and select Fill and Pattern colors. centering the text. Greek. If you click None in the Pattern area. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide example. page 47 in Chapter 2. in MicroStrategy Web. a style (Bold. Then select your desired pattern if you want to use one. any fill and pattern you have selected are lost and no pattern or fill are applied. .

Adding usability to a Report Services document Report Services documents are described in Report Services documents. you add prompts to a report. look carefully at your final document before making it available to users. page 292. Adding features for users 377 . For example. but it is better to make this explicit in the title of that dataset. a general title such as Customer Behavior which appears above a list of products and percentages for each product. and consider the following issues: • Consider usability carefully. before the report is executed against your data source. An object prompt that is made up of filters lets each analyst choose from among your chosen set of filters. A filter definition prompt allows analysts to design their own filters. page 15 in Chapter 1. within the constraints that you define. If you created a Report Services document. © 2006 MicroStrategy. see Asking for user input: Prompts. This provides an opportunity for individual analysts to define the data that is returned from your data source. to apply the most useful filter for that analyst’s reporting needs. For details on object prompts and filter definition prompts.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Perhaps from the context of the overall document it seems clear that the percentages represent purchasing behavior by customers for each of the products listed. You can also let users design their own filters. makes it difficult for a user to intuitively understand what to do with the numbers displayed. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Reporting. Inc. Be sure you have named the individual datasets on the document with usable names. To provide this functionality to users. for Designers 7 Letting users choose their own report filter You can let each user choose the report filter that suits his analysis needs. within your chosen constraints.

A good alternative might be a bar graph. see Drilling into related data. . After you have made this decision. Most graph styles have specific requirements for the type of data that must exist on the report for the graph style to appear properly. and distracting document. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide • Spend a higher percentage of your design time making the information understandable. which can leave an analyst unclear about specific numbers. How easy is it for an analyst to get detailed data from the graph report? For example. 378 Adding features for users © 2006 MicroStrategy. as described in Choosing a graph style. A clean. but it usually only shows percentages. consider your graph report from a usability perspective. For complete details on requirements and recommendations for each graph style available in MicroStrategy. Customizing drill maps Analysts can drill through a report by clicking on an object on the report. page 53 in Chapter 2. minimalist document is always easier to derive useful information from than a busy. which usually lists actual numbers for each attribute element. a pie graph is useful in many circumstances. page 115 in Chapter 4. Confirming your choice of graph style When you first decide on a graph style to use.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Answering Questions about Data. Formatting a Report. to analyze data that is closely related to the original report data. see the Graphing chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. If you need an introduction to drilling or a better understanding of how users experience drilling. rather than adding “bells and whistles”. you generally choose a style that is compatible with the data you want to display. cramped. They can use drilling to expose an entirely different object on a report to see what the data looks like within a different context. Inc.

page 237. for Designers 7 A drill map is a set of restrictions you can define that shape the directions that users can drill (called a drill path) on a report. But the report designer can have report data appear automatically in a given sorted order. see Totals and subtotals. You can also create a selection of subtotals from which users can choose the subtotal function that best suits their analysis purposes. the default paths available are based on the system hierarchy of the project. Answering Questions about Data. see Controlling drilling behavior to affect report results. You can sort on any object placed on the report. examples. saving analysts time and making some data trends clear immediately. see the Drilling chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. If a report does not have a drill map specifically defined. For information. and steps and examples for creating a new drill map. For more information on the default drill map. Inc. You create a drill map using the Drill Map Editor. Including totals and subtotals If you enable grand totals and/or subtotals for a metric. Analysts can perform several procedures to personalize their drilling experience in a given report. Adding features for users 379 . and steps to enable grand totals and subtotals for a metric. For example. Including sorted data Analysts can sort data in various ways on a report. page 121 in Chapter 4. Any customized drill map you create can override the default. © 2006 MicroStrategy.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. an analyst can determine whether the drilled-from attribute automatically appears on the drilled-to report. an analyst can choose to display or hide them on any report that contains the metric. For more information on the personalizations related to drilling that an analyst can define.

for either a grid report or a graph report. Inc. allowing users to see manageable subsets of otherwise large quantities of data. called a Quick Sort. see the Custom Groups and Consolidations chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Grouping data by page: Adding page-by fields to a report Page-by is the MicroStrategy functionality that lets you turn a long report into a set of individual pages. Quick sorting is limited to one row or column of data. For images of the page-by feature and steps to place one or more report objects into the page-by area of a report. Users can place report objects in the page-by area of a report. Analyzing Data.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. the user is presented with a subset of what would otherwise be a long list of data. if they wish. the report’s designer can also place report objects into the page-by area of a report. Hierarchical display of grouped attribute elements For custom groups to display hierarchically. For information about creating custom groups and setting hierarchical display. The pages are created based on the objects on the report. When a user executes the report. see Grouping data by page. and pages. Advanced sorting lets you sort by multiple rows and columns. page 66 in Chapter 3. Analyzing Data. However. see the Advanced Sorting section in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. . page 79 in Chapter 3. For information on creating a more advanced sort for rows. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Information and an example for how to sort data in a column or row in either ascending or descending order. hierarchical display must be enabled for the custom group and the item display of at least one custom group element must be expanded. 380 Adding features for users © 2006 MicroStrategy. columns. is in Sorting data.

this can be done. Top 5 Employees. you might create filters to bring back data that is displayed as Top 5 Customers. and highlights the differences between them. For example. this cannot be done. so that you can use the consolidation (the newly consolidated elements) just like a regular attribute on a report. Groups of attribute elements.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. When you create a consolidation. and Top 5 Items on the same report. and so on. For example. These names appear on the resulting report. and February and call the consolidation Winter. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Groups of filters. Consolidation Example Grouping specific months into seasons. Custom Group Displaying Top 5 Customers. you might group the Month elements into December. Creates a virtual attribute to allow reporting on an attribute that does not exist in the data model. Top 5 Employees and Top 5 Items on the same report. The table below shows ways you can take advantage of consolidations and custom groups. Consolidations allow users to filter a report on a row-by-row basis. Yes. for Designers 7 Adding consolidations and custom groups A consolidation is a group of attribute elements grouped in a new way. and displaying the seasons on the report. A custom group is a group of filters that bring back from your data source a specifically defined set of attribute elements to be displayed on the report. April. Structure Usage Arithmetic operations (row level math) No. Inc. Applies different filters to different rows of a report. you do not change your organization’s data source definitions or the MicroStrategy metadata definitions. and May into a consolidation called Spring. Custom groups allow you to group and display attribute elements in a way that is not defined in your data source. Adding features for users 381 . January. then you group March.

For an introduction to report limits and steps to apply a simple report limit. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Consolidation Site of final calculation SQL efficiency Recursive definition Display mode Subtotals MicroStrategy Analytical Engine. Yes. Fixed at element level only. One pass for each custom group element. see the Filtering chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. No. Analyzing Data. Flexible and expandable. For an explanation of the difference between a filter and a report limit. Low. Specifying maximum and minimum values: Report limits A report limit specifies a set of criteria used to restrict the data returned in a result set after the report’s metrics are calculated.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. see Report limits and filters. . Yes. For details on using consolidations and custom groups in reports and for business examples. see the Consolidations and Custom Groups chapter of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Inc. as well as examples of each and how they affect a report. Custom Group Your data source. No. A report limit can make a report more efficient to run. Because it is based on the report’s final metric values. page 87 in Chapter 3. High. because less information is returned from the data source. 382 Adding features for users © 2006 MicroStrategy. the report limit is applied after all the metrics are calculated.

rows from left to right Then. For additional information on changing the evaluation order of objects on a report. columns from top to bottom 3 Report limits 4 Subtotals Notice that the metrics that are included in the evaluation order are compound smart metrics. For steps to change the evaluation order of these objects on a report. For more information on compound metrics and smart totals. page 95 in Chapter 3. for Designers 7 Determining evaluation order of calculations You can change the evaluation order of various objects on a report to affect how data is calculated for a given report.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. You can change the evaluation order of consolidations. For the evaluation order of all other report objects. see Evaluation order of calculations. A metric must have smart totals enabled for the evaluation order to affect it. see Metrics made up of metrics: Compound metrics. report limits. otherwise the metric is always calculated first. see the Custom Groups and Consolidations chapter. see the Reports chapter. The default evaluation order on a report is 1 Compound smart metrics 2 Consolidations. Inc. Analyzing Data. which are evaluated by their relative position on the report grid: • • First. and subtotals. Only compound metrics can have smart totals enabled. page 240. see the following chapters of the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide: • • For the evaluation order of multiple consolidations. compound smart metrics (which are compound metrics with smart totals enabled). © 2006 MicroStrategy. Adding features for users 383 . page 226 and Smart totals.

page 2. At the bottom of the image. you can see the 384 Modifying an existing report © 2006 MicroStrategy. with the report’s template displayed.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. You can access the Report Editor in either MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. . for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Modifying an existing report This section shows you how to open the Report Editor with an existing report template displayed. so you can modify the report. The following image shows the Report Editor in Desktop displaying the template for the sample report called Sales by Region. For steps. To modify an existing report in MicroStrategy Desktop 1 Log in to MicroStrategy Desktop and open the project that contains the report you want to modify. 3 Double-click the report. Both procedures are presented below. see Starting MicroStrategy. Inc. 2 In the Folder List on the left side of Desktop. navigate through the folders to locate the report you want to modify. The Report Editor opens.

Some of the panes shown in the image above may not appear in the Report Editor. Inc. depending on what you have selected to be visible and the MicroStrategy products you own. © 2006 MicroStrategy. the Revenue metric. To display or hide various Report Editor panes. and the Units Sold metric. Modifying an existing report 385 . the Subcategory attribute.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. for Designers 7 report objects on the template: the Region attribute. the Category attribute. use the View menu.

see your project designer or the MicroStrategy Project Design Guide. double-click the object. depending on what object you want to edit and the changes you want to make to it: – To modify a metric. see Adding features for users. see Editing a filter. see Editing a prompt. as follows: • To add an object to the report. page 366. Click Yes to confirm your action.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. page 351 • To modify an object on the report. depending on what you want to add: – Reports: Adding attributes to a report. Inc. you must first save and close the report. To add usability features to a report. see the appropriate procedure in this chapter. page 346 – Reports: Adding prompts to a report. see Saving a report. – To modify a prompt. • To remove an object from the report. For details on how a report is saved. If you modify an object on a report and want to execute the report to see how your changes appear. page 371. 386 Modifying an existing report © 2006 MicroStrategy. See the appropriate procedure(s) in this chapter. page 341 – Reports: Adding metrics to a report. page 245. – To modify a filter. page 291. right-click the object on the report’s template and select Remove. then re-open the report to see your changes. see Editing a metric. page 344 – Reports: Adding a filter to a report. page 331. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 4 Modify the report in whatever way you wish. • 5 Save the report. . – To modify an attribute.

you can see the report objects on the template: the Subcategory attribute. The Report Editor opens. 3 Double-click the report. Inc. 2 In the Object Browser on the left. For steps. with the report’s template displayed. On the right side of the image.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Modifying an existing report 387 . The following image shows the Report Editor in MicroStrategy Web displaying the template for the sample report called Revenue Forecast. see Starting MicroStrategy. for Designers 7 To modify an existing report in MicroStrategy Web 1 Open MicroStrategy Web and log in to the project that contains the report you want to modify. navigate through the folders to locate the report you want to modify. page 2. the Quarter attribute and the Revenue Forecast metric: © 2006 MicroStrategy.

To add usability features to the report. 388 Modifying an existing report © 2006 MicroStrategy. Click Yes to confirm your action. double-click the object.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. see the appropriate procedure in this section. • To remove an object from the report. page 351 • To modify an object on the report. • 5 Save the report. page 344 – Reports: Adding a filter to a report. For details on how a report is saved. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide 4 Modify the report in whatever way you wish. depending on what object you want to edit and the changes you want to make to it: – To modify a metric. page 331. depending on what you want to add: – Reports: Adding attributes to a report. then re-open the report to see your changes. you must first save and close the report. as follows: • To add an object to the report. see Editing a filter. see Editing a prompt. see Saving a report. page 245. see Adding features for users. . open the object in Desktop to make your changes. The changes appear when you save the object and report in Desktop and then open the report in Web. – To modify an attribute. Inc. see your project designer or the MicroStrategy Project Design Guide. If you modify an object on a report and want to execute the report to see how your changes appear. page 291. To modify an object in a MicroStrategy Web report. page 346 – Reports: Adding prompts to a report. – To modify a filter. see Editing a metric. – To modify a prompt. See the appropriate procedure(s) in this chapter. page 341 – Reports: Adding metrics to a report. page 366. right-click the object on the report’s template and select Remove. page 371.

you can also see window-specific information on graphing options by clicking Help. viewing report data in a graph can often highlight trends or allow comparisons that are difficult when viewing data in a grid. This data is positioned and formatted. If you are working on a graph report. and for graph-related options and other details. for Designers 7 Creating other types of reports Creating a graph report A graph report provides a different way to display report data than in the standard grid format. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Creating a Report Services document A MicroStrategy Report Services document contains datasets (report results) from one or more reports. resulting in a single display of presentation quality.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. Inc. see the Graphing chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. Creating other types of reports 389 . Depending on the graph style you choose. For details on designing a graph report.

and sales representative. and subtotaling of data. All of these capabilities allow you to create reports that are suitable for presentation to management and for printing boardroom quality material. you can insert pictures and draw borders in the document. In addition. grouping. and specify the position of page breaks. Inc. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide The sample document shown here is from the MicroStrategy Sales Analysis Module (SAM). The image above shows a sample production and operational report document. . control the layout. you can specify the data that appears. and it groups those opportunities based on sales region. sales district. formatting. This document 390 Creating other types of reports © 2006 MicroStrategy. When you create a document. It lists all sales opportunities in the pipeline. part of the MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Developer Kit (BIDK).7 Building Query Objects and Queries.

Sales managers can use this document to see a general overview of the sales pipeline and to identify key opportunities and opportunity statuses. these documents provide a distilled view of the business. The document types that can be created in MicroStrategy include the following: • Scorecards and dashboards: designed for visual impact. • • • • © 2006 MicroStrategy. Production and operational reports: designed for production operations management. collection. and customer service. You must have the MicroStrategy Report Services product to be able to design and work with Report Services documents. these documents present lists of metrics or process-driven tabular views of the business. The data in this document can help you evaluate sales opportunities for each sales representative and to prioritize those opportunities that have a greater probability of being closed. for Designers 7 also provides a snapshot of each opportunity’s current status and measures key metrics such as unweighted and weighted sales forecasts. Managed metrics reports: with a quantitative focus. these documents present data in hierarchical categories or bands and can span hundreds of printed pages. Inc. these documents present comprehensive data in print and electronic forms. Detailed information to create and modify Report Services documents can be found in the MicroStrategy Report Services Document Creation Guide. Creating other types of reports 391 . Business reports: designed for financial and other statutory business reporting. organized in adaptive sections or zones. Invoices and statements: these documents use transaction and sub-transaction level data necessary for billing.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries.

Dashboards and scorecards display and distribute data from business intelligence projects. hyperlinks. Designing reports that use OLAP Services OLAP Services is a MicroStrategy product that lets MicroStrategy Desktop. Inc. If you own OLAP Services and analysts will be taking advantage of it. . When you design a report. Dashboards. to include text. and one or more report objects. 392 Designing reports that use OLAP Services © 2006 MicroStrategy. you should take into account the fact that users can view subsets of data easily with an OLAP Services “view report”. see the HTML Documents chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. tend to provide key metrics along with summary information. This can allow you to create larger and more inclusive reports. made up of only that data they want to see. Web. on the other hand. For details on how to create HTML documents. called view reports. tables.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. its features can be useful for a report designer to understand. HTML documents in the MicroStrategy platform are HTML containers or shells into which you can place MicroStrategy reports and other graphics. and Office users make use of features that slice and dice data in reports without re-executing SQL against the data source. Scorecards typically follow a specific methodology and are focused on key metrics within a business area. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Creating an HTML document HTML documents are a popular way to create dashboards and scorecards to display a group of reports within the MicroStrategy platform. You can modify the appearance of an HTML document just like any other HTML page. and control the formatting and appearance with style sheets. images. since analysts can later create smaller reports. This improves performance by resulting in quicker data display within a report as users analyze and manipulate the data.

This capability translates to improved response time and decreased database load. view filters can be used on any report on which a user wants to use them. which is the result of a view filter. A view filter does not trigger re-execution against the data source. For additional information on report caches and how they work with your data source. The analyst can then use a view filter to change the data displayed. It also allows different users to access the same report cache but see different data according to their needs. OLAP Services surfaces in a grid report in two places: • • The Report Objects pane The View Filter pane Each of these features is described below. The advantage of using both standard report filters and view filters on a report is that the report can use the standard report filter to bring back more data than can usefully be displayed at any one time. A report designer does not need to enable view filters for users to take advantage of them. Designing reports that use OLAP Services 393 . page 150 in Chapter 5. © 2006 MicroStrategy. see Report caches. as long as it falls within the data already retrieved from the database. parent report. For steps to use a view filter. see Appendix A. a view filter dynamically limits the data being displayed on a report without re-executing the report against the warehouse. Answering Prompts and Refreshing Data. This feature allows analysts to create multiple reports out of a larger.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. The analyst generates a view report. without stressing the system or your data source. If you have the OLAP Services product. for Designers 7 Specifically. see the online help. To see descriptions and images of these panes in the Report Editor. View filters and view reports Unlike a report filter that restricts how much data is retrieved from the data source. Inc. Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy.

Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Since derived metrics are evaluated in memory. Inc. or on Intelligence Server for MicroStrategy Web. page 211. To see an image of the Report objects pane. their computation does not require any SQL execution in the database. If you have the OLAP Services product. see Appendix A. Derived metrics are created based on existing metrics in the report.) The analyst can make the change on the fly. Dynamic aggregation occurs when report objects (such as an attribute or an attribute form) are moved from the grid to the Report objects pane. metric values are dynamically recalculated at the level of the objects remaining on the grid. while reviewing the report data. dynamic aggregation can be used on any report on which a user wants to use it. A derived metric performs a calculation on the fly with the data available in a report without re-executing the report against the database. If you have the OLAP Services product. Dynamic aggregation Dynamic aggregation allows a report analyst to change the level at which the data on a report is aggregated. A report designer does not need to enable dynamic aggregation for users to take advantage of it. They are evaluated on the client for Desktop. (For an introduction to levels. 394 Designing reports that use OLAP Services © 2006 MicroStrategy. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide Derived metrics Derived metrics are metrics that a report analyst can use to perform calculations based on report results. A report designer does not need to enable derived metrics for users to take advantage of them. . As attributes are moved on and off the report between the grid and the Report objects pane. derived metrics can be used on any report on which a user wants to use them. see Required metric components.

Since you create your own SQL statements to create reports with Freeform SQL. Traditionally. for Designers 7 Building a query using alternative data access methods Freeform SQL and Query Builder are MicroStrategy tools that provide you alternative methods to access your business data and create reports. including relational databases. Building a query using alternative data access methods . This capability can save you time since you do not need to place the data into a data mart or data warehouse first. as long as they are included in the MicroStrategy environment. you can also use your own customized SQL statements to generate reports from operational systems included in a MicroStrategy project. Query Builder Query Builder is a graphical user interface that helps guide you when building SQL queries that can adapt to different data models.Basic Reporting Guide Building Query Objects and Queries. and flat files. Excel files. The Freeform SQL feature allows you to use your own SQL statements to access data from various ODBC data sources. Freeform SQL Freeform SQL is a MicroStrategy tool that allows you to write your own SQL statements to run directly against a data warehouse or operational data store. you use the MicroStrategy Engine to generate SQL to run against one specific relational database to return results for a desired report. For detailed information on how to create a Freeform SQL report. a strong knowledge of how to create and use SQL statements is essential. Inc. giving you full control over accessing your data. Query Builder allows you to run queries against © 2006 MicroStrategy. see the Custom SQL Queries chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. In addition to generating reports in the traditional way.

.) You can also import tables into a project’s Warehouse Catalog using the Query Builder feature. and joins to build queries is essential. You can create queries to be run against imported database tables. Query Builder provides an easy way to quickly access your ODBC data sources without having to write any SQL. Inc.7 Building Query Objects and Queries. Query Builder allows you more control over the SQL generated against your database systems. 396 Building a query using alternative data access methods © 2006 MicroStrategy. (The modeling step is necessary for MicroStrategy’s ROLAP Engine to define attribute and fact schemas. see the Custom SQL Queries chapter in the MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide. which is required by the Freeform SQL tool. A basic knowledge of how SQL statements use tables. without the need for extensive knowledge on how to create SQL statements. For detailed information on how to create a Query Builder report. columns. which allows you to begin reporting and analysis with MicroStrategy without performing the project creation step of modeling attribute and fact schemas. for Designers Basic Reporting Guide ODBC data sources that are not easily modeled to an attribute and fact schema. This includes databases that are a collection of flat tables rather than being defined into fact and lookup tables.

If you are already familiar with MicroStrategy.A REPORTING INTERFACES IN MICROSTRATEGY A. Inc. © 2006 MicroStrategy. use this appendix to help you become familiar with where things are in MicroStrategy Web and Desktop. Introduction If you are new to MicroStrategy. page 18. this information is useful if you own the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product. see OLAP Services. For background information about OLAP Services. use this appendix to identify icons and other features you can take advantage of for quicker access to your most commonly used functionality. This appendix includes OLAP Services features as they appear in the described interfaces. 397 .

from the View menu select Folder List. If the Folder List does not automatically appear when you log in to MicroStrategy Desktop. Simply click on a shortcut icon to jump immediately to the folder to which it is linked. the Folder List is the center pane of the Desktop interface. Shortcut icons are displayed within groups. such as reports or report objects. Inc. see Adding and removing shortcuts from the Shortcut Bar. page 398. The image 398 MicroStrategy Desktop interface © 2006 MicroStrategy. The Folder List displays all the project sources. application and schema object folders. For steps. The right pane of the MicroStrategy Desktop interface is the Object Viewer. When all panes are displayed. • Adding and removing shortcuts from the Shortcut Bar Shortcuts are icons on the left side of Desktop that provide instant access to commonly used folders. • Object Viewer: Where the contents of each folder. the Shortcut Bar is the left pane of the Desktop interface. called shortcut groups. You can create a shortcut to any folder that appears in your Folder List. are displayed as you browse through folders in the Folder List. Shortcut Bar: This pane contains icons that allow you instant access to your favorite or most frequently used folders. You can add or remove shortcuts at any time. .A Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide MicroStrategy Desktop interface The MicroStrategy Desktop interface has three panes: • Folder List: Where all the project folders that hold your reports and report-related objects are accessible. projects. and the administrative functions for your business intelligence system. When all panes are displayed.

namely Tutorial Shortcuts and Other Shortcuts. MicroStrategy Desktop interface 399 . which can be useful for large MicroStrategy implementations. add shortcut icons to groups. Tutorial Shortcuts and Other Shortcuts. You can create additional groups of shortcut icons. Creating a shortcut group Shortcut icons are displayed within groups. when you click Tutorial Shortcuts in the Shortcut Bar. the Shortcut Bar contains two shortcut groups. the Tutorial project’s My Reports © 2006 MicroStrategy.Basic Reporting Guide Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy A below shows the two default shortcut groups. called shortcut groups. For example. You can view the shortcuts within each group by clicking the group name in the Shortcut Bar. Inc. By default. and rename or remove icons and groups. The shortcut icons within the Tutorial Shortcuts group are displayed: Use the following procedures to create new shortcut groups. the Tutorial Shortcuts group expands to display the shortcuts to the Tutorial project login.

Inc. To create a shortcut group 1 Right-click an empty area of the Shortcut Bar and select Add Group. 2 In the Folder List. Adding a shortcut icon to a group When you want to create a new shortcut to a commonly used folder or project.ofthe name ofor project for icon is yousame as the name the folder which created the shortcut. . To add a shortcut icon to a group in the Shortcut Bar 1 On the Shortcut Bar. click the shortcut group to which you want to add your new shortcut. Any shortcuts which are currently in the group appear in the Shortcut Bar. 2 In the Create a new shortcut group dialog box. type a name for the new group and click OK. The image above displays the Tutorial Shortcuts group and its default shortcut icons. Your new shortcut group appears in the Shortcut Bar. You can rename any shortcut icon by right-clicking it and selecting Rename Shortcut. you must create the shortcut icon within an existing shortcut group. the Tutorial project’s Public Objects folder. and so on. the shortcut the ! By default. 400 MicroStrategy Desktop interface © 2006 MicroStrategy. right-click the project or folder for which you want to create a shortcut. and select Add to Shortcut Bar.A Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide folder. A new shortcut icon appears in the Shortcut Bar.

2 In the confirmation dialog box. MicroStrategy Desktop interface 401 . All shortcut icons within this group are also removed. the shortcut icons are deleted also. © 2006 MicroStrategy. click Yes.Basic Reporting Guide Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy A Removing a shortcut icon from the Shortcut Bar To remove a shortcut icon from the Shortcut Bar 1 Right-click the shortcut and select Remove from Shortcut Bar. 3 In the confirmation dialog box. The shortcut icons which are currently in the group appear in the Shortcut Bar. To remove a shortcut group 1 Click the shortcut group you want to remove. Renaming a shortcut icon or shortcut group By default. Removing a shortcut group from the Shortcut Bar If you remove a group that has existing shortcut icons within it. You can rename any shortcut icon by right-clicking it and selecting Rename Shortcut. Inc. click Yes to remove the shortcut group. the name of a shortcut icon is the same as the name of the folder or project for which you created the shortcut. 2 Right-click an empty area of the Shortcut Bar and select Remove Group.

type a name for the shortcut group and click OK. . Foravailable toifyou depend on example. menus. and menu ! Common Microsoft Windows-style menusEdit menu.A Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide To rename a shortcut group 1 Click the shortcut group you want to rename. options are not included here. The shortcut group is renamed. Use general Desktop tools. and so forth. 3 In the Rename a shortcut group dialog box. and Folder List. Paste. and icons ! Theyour security privileges. Navigating through Desktop Use the following menus and tools in MicroStrategy Desktop to access the different reporting features of MicroStrategy. Copy. Desktop menus From the Desktop menus. such as the which contains Cut. you do not see the Administration menu. options. you can do the following. Menu File View Description Create new objects and folders. Show or hide the Status Bar. Move one level up in the Folder List or go directly to a project’s home page. you do not have administrative privileges. Shortcut Bar. 2 Right-click an empty area of the Shortcut Bar and select Rename Group. such as: • Search Editor • Desktop Preferences • Change Password Go Tools 402 MicroStrategy Desktop interface © 2006 MicroStrategy. Change the appearance of the object icons in the Object Viewer (Desktop’s right-hand pane). Inc.

this button lets you set project preferences. Cut Copy Paste Delete Rename Renames the currently selected object. Copies the currently selected objects. MicroStrategy Desktop interface 403 . The objects you can create from this button depend on your privileges and your location in the Folder List. Use this to move or remove objects. Inc. Pastes whatever you have cut or copied.Basic Reporting Guide Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy A Menu Description Administration Access administrative functions. Use this to duplicate objects. Close all open editors with one click. If you have a project selected. Use this to move or duplicate objects. © 2006 MicroStrategy. Window Help Desktop toolbar icons From the Desktop toolbar you can do the following: Name New Icon Description Creates a new report or report-related object. Access the online help system and useful MicroStrategy websites. Cuts the currently selected objects. Deletes the currently selected object. Preferences / View Object Properties Displays details about the currently selected object. such as: • Project Configuration Editor • Database Instance Wizard • Report Scheduler • User Manager Integrity Checker • Event Viewer Schema Access project design tools such as the Project Creation Wizard and the Attribute and Fact Creation Wizards.

you can use the Report Editor in either MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web to create new reports in MicroStrategy. Use this to search for report-related objects. such as Administrator. and so on. Go to project Takes you to the home page of the current project.) Use this section to 404 MicroStrategy Desktop interface © 2006 MicroStrategy. Turns the Folder List display on and off. Moves you one level up in the Folder List. Inc. Opens the appropriate editor for the currently selected object.A Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide Name Search Icon Description Opens the Search Editor. . Use this to display your most recent business data in an existing report. Use this for quick navigation among report-related objects and their folders. Go one level up MicroStrategy Desktop Report Editor interface If you have report designer privileges. (You can of course also access these editors if you have other sets of privileges. Edit Run Report View Show or Hide the Folder List Refresh Refreshes the current display. Executes the currently selected report. Change the appearance of the object icons in the Object Viewer (Desktop’s right-hand pane). Use this to change an object’s definition.

page 18 for details.) Where you can see a summary of all the objects you have included on your report. page 190 in Chapter 7. Building Query Objects and Queries. Finding your way around the Desktop Report Editor Refer to the image above as you read about the various areas or panes in the Desktop Report Editor. Inc. for Designers. See OLAP Services. The following image shows the Report Editor in Desktop. see Report designer role. © 2006 MicroStrategy. with the sample Revenue Forecast report ready to be edited within it: For details on report designer privileges and the report designer role.Basic Reporting Guide Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy A familiarize yourself with the Report Editor interface. You can perform the following tasks within the appropriate Report Editor pane: • Report Objects pane: (top left) (This pane appears only if you have the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product. MicroStrategy Desktop interface 405 .

the MicroStrategy Engine generates SQL that includes all the objects in this Report Objects pane. page 181. page 247. advanced filter qualifications. Report Filter pane: (center right) Where you add filtering conditions to a report. because OLAP Services lets analysts quickly remove or add objects from this pane directly to the report template. view filters are applied to the overall result set after the SQL is executed and results are returned from the data source. Instead. See OLAP Services. Creating shortcuts can save you time if you repeatedly browse to the same folders.) Where you apply a special kind of filter to any object that is in the Report Objects pane. page 197. This can help improve report execution performance. When the report is executed. The Report Filter pane allows you to create a filter without having to open a separate object editor (the Filter Editor). page 392. see Quick object access: Creating shortcuts to objects. For details on using view filters. For details on creating shortcuts. For details on using the Report Objects pane. see Designing reports that use OLAP Services. My Shortcuts pane: (bottom left) Enables you to access any folder in the Object Browser quickly. metrics. not just the objects that are displayed in the report after it is executed. see Filtering data on a report: Filters. Inc. see MicroStrategy objects. Filtering conditions can be made up of attributes.A Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide There may be more objects in this pane than are displayed on the executed report. page 392. For details on creating filters. View Filter pane: (top right) (This pane is only available if you have the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product. Simple filters can be conveniently created by dragging and dropping objects from the Object Browser into this pane to create a filter. . see Designing reports that use OLAP Services. and shortcuts to an existing report filter. • Object Browser pane: (center left) Where you navigate through the project to locate objects to include on the report. View filters do not modify the SQL for the report like normal report filters do. page 18 for details. • • • 406 MicroStrategy Desktop interface © 2006 MicroStrategy. For details on report objects.

For details on templates. and preferences available on each page. and so on for your projects. and icons ! Theyour security privileges. you do not see the Administration menu. objects. you can perform the following. • MicroStrategy Web interface The MicroStrategy Web interface is a set of web pages where you can browse through folders containing reports and objects. MicroStrategy Web interface 407 . © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 332. page 79. see Grouping data by page. menus. you do not have administrative privileges. Web menus From the interface that is displayed when viewing an executed report in MicroStrategy Web. Inc. From the various pages in MicroStrategy Web. Navigating the report interface in MicroStrategy Web When you execute and view a report in MicroStrategy Web. the interface allows you to manipulate and explore the report data you are viewing. Page-by pane: (top of Template pane) Where you place subsets of your report results to be displayed as separate pages of the executed report.Basic Reporting Guide Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy A • Template pane: (bottom right) Where you define your report layouts by dragging and dropping objects from the Object Browser onto this report template pane. For details on adding page-by functionality to a report. options. see Designing a report’s structure: Templates. Foravailable toifyou depend on example. preferences. you can perform a number of tasks with the reports.

You can also show or hide the following: • Report filter • View filter • Object Browser • MicroStrategy Web toolbars • Pivot and sort buttons • Page-by axis • A list of reports related to the current report Data Manipulate objects and data on the report. and colors of various objects on the grid or graph report • Merge or lock column and row headers • Show color banding on the report • Enable outline mode • Show thresholds 408 MicroStrategy Web interface © 2006 MicroStrategy. Paste. . Graph. size. For example. Menu File View Description Create. export.A Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide and menu ! Common Microsoft Windows-style menusEdit menu. Grid. and view the details of reports. Inc. you can do the following: • Swap the columns and rows • Add objects to a report • Edit view filter conditions • Sort data • Drill on a report • View only specific data on the report by filtering on selections • Reset. and send reports to the History List. Copy. and so forth. Change how you see a report by choosing Design. such as the which contains Cut. refresh. save. options are not included here. alignment. or Grid and Graph view. you can do the following: • Format the font. For example. or re-prompt the report • Insert a new metric • Rename objects on the report • Include attribute forms on the report • Enable and customize totals Format Format various aspects of a grid or graph report. subscribe to.

Inc. The report is sent depending on the subscription schedule selected. and moves all report objects in the columns of the report to the rows of the report. Save Print Creates a printable version of the report. An action that was undone is redone. Undo The last action performed is undone. and the report returns to its status prior to the most recent action. Exports the report in PDF format.Basic Reporting Guide Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy A Web toolbar icons From the MicroStrategy Web toolbar. Saves the report. Sends the report to the e-mail address you enter. or plain text format. you can perform the following: Name Design Icon Description Switches the report to design view so you can modify the definition of your report. Shows or hides subtotals included on the report. MicroStrategy Web interface 409 . Redo Send Now Subscribe Export PDF Swap Rows and Columns Moves all report objects in the rows of the report to the columns of the report. HTML. CSV. Exports all or a portion of the report in Excel. Allows you to include or remove subtotals from the report. Toggle Totals Edit Totals © 2006 MicroStrategy. and the report returns to its status prior to undoing the most recent action. Subscribes the report to be sent to the current user logged in.

Merges multiple row headers that are identical into a single header. Inc. Defines the sort order for the objects on the report. Shows or hides thresholds on the report. . Sort Drill Grid Graph Displays the report in graph view. Provides options to drill from the attributes on the report. as determined by the autostyle chosen. Thresholds Attribute Forms Shows or hides the attribute forms of an attribute on the report. Determines the basic formatting of the report display. Persists the display of column headers when scrolling vertically in a report. Merge Column Headers Merge Row Headers Lock Column Headers 410 MicroStrategy Web interface © 2006 MicroStrategy. Merges multiple column headers that are identical into a single header. Grid and Graph Displays the report in grid and graph view simultaneously. Autostyle Banding Outline Enables or disables outline mode for the report.A Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide Name Insert New Metric Icon Description Opens a dialog box to create a new derived metric (requires OLAP Services license). Displays the report in grid view. Shows or hides banding on the report.

Enlarges or shrinks the report so that all data on the report fits normally in the columns and rows. Inc. and so on.Basic Reporting Guide Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy A Name Lock Row Headers Auto Fit to Contents Auto Fit to Window Object Browser Icon Description Persists the display of row headers when scrolling horizontally in a report. you can use the Report Editor in MicroStrategy Web to create new reports. (You can of course also access this editor if you have other sets of privileges. Shows or hides the Object Browser. MicroStrategy Web Report Editor interface If you have Web Professional privileges. MicroStrategy Web interface 411 . Enlarges or shrinks the report so that it fits on the entire window. Report Filter Shows or hides the Report Filter.) Use this section to familiarize yourself with the Report Editor © 2006 MicroStrategy. such as Administrator. View Filter Shows or hides the View Filter. Page-by Axis Shows or hides the Page-by area.

Inc. Finding your way around the MicroStrategy Web Report Editor Refer to the image above as you read about the various areas or panes in the Desktop Report Editor. ! 412 MicroStrategy Web interface .A Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide interface.) Where you can see a summary of all the objects you have included on your report. see Report designer role. for Designers. You can perform the following tasks within the appropriate Report Editor pane: • Object Browser pane: (left-hand side) Where you navigate through the project to locate objects to include in the report. The following image shows the Report Editor in Web. Report Objects pane: (This pane appears only if you have the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product. page 18 for details. See OLAP Services. Building Query Objects and Queries. page 190 in Chapter 7. you can also choose to navigate only through Report Objects: ! All Objects pane: Where you see the list of all the objects available in your project. If you have the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product. © 2006 MicroStrategy. with the sample Revenue Forecast report ready to be edited within it: For details on report designer privileges and the report designer role. In the Object Browser you can navigate to All Objects in the project.

view filters are applied to the overall result set after the SQL is executed and results are returned from the data source. See OLAP Services. View Filter pane: (This pane is only available if you have the MicroStrategy OLAP Services product. This can help improve report execution performance. page 392. For details on using the Report Objects pane. and shortcuts to an existing report filter. page 247. For details on using view filters. Simple filters can be conveniently created by dragging and dropping objects from the Object Browser into this pane to create a filter. see Designing reports that use OLAP Services. • Report Filter pane: (top right) Click Edit Report Filter to display the Report Filter and View Filter panes: ! Report Filter pane: Where you add filtering conditions to a report. page 392. ! • Page-by pane: (center right) Where you place subsets of your report results to be displayed as separate pages of the executed report. For details on creating filters. View filters do not modify the SQL for the report like normal report filters do. see Filtering data on a report: Filters. Inc. When the report is executed. Instead.Basic Reporting Guide Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy A There may be more objects in this pane than are displayed on the executed report. © 2006 MicroStrategy. the MicroStrategy Engine generates SQL that includes all the objects in this Report Objects pane. The Report Filter pane allows you to create a filter without having to open a separate object editor (the Filter Editor). metrics. see Grouping data by page. see Designing reports that use OLAP Services. MicroStrategy Web interface 413 . For details on adding page-by functionality to a report. not just the objects that are displayed in the report after it is executed.) Where you apply a special kind of filter to any object that is in the Report Objects pane. Filtering conditions can be made up of attributes. page 18 for details. advanced filter qualifications. because OLAP Services lets analysts quickly remove or add objects from this pane directly to the report template. page 79.

For details on templates.A Reporting Interfaces in MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide • Template pane: (bottom right) Where you define your report layouts by dragging and dropping objects from the Object Browser onto this report template pane. Inc. see Designing a report’s structure: Templates. 414 MicroStrategy Web interface © 2006 MicroStrategy. page 332. .

Customer. January. February. filter. attribute A data level defined by the system or project architect and associated with one or more columns in a data warehouse table. prompt. custom group. and March are elements of the attribute Month. Attributes include data classifications like Region.GLOSSARY application object MicroStrategy object used to provide analysis of and insight into relevant data. Inc. consolidation. Item. New York and Dallas are elements of the attribute City. See also: • • • • attribute element attribute form child attribute parent attribute attribute element A value of any of the attribute forms of an attribute. Application objects are developed in MicroStrategy Desktop and they are the building blocks for reports and documents. Order. For example. They provide a context for metric or factual data to be aggregated or filtered at a given level. Age. application object 415 . © 2006 MicroStrategy. and Year. City. metric. template. document. Application objects include these object types: report.

Categories generally correspond to the rows of a grid report. the set of data along the X-axis. and custom groups—along each axis. category In a graph. cache A special data store holding recently accessed information for quick future access. axis A vector along which data is displayed. Last Name. A cache stores results from the data warehouse separately for each report and can be used by new job requests that require the same data. whose execution is faster because they need not run against the database. Inc. consolidations. Column. There are three axes—Row. child attribute The lower-level attribute in an attribute relationship. Name. An example of a category is a bar in a bar graph. See also: • • parent attribute relationship 416 attribute form © 2006 MicroStrategy. Long Description.Glossary Basic Reporting Guide attribute form One of several columns associated with an attribute that are different aspects of the same thing. ID. he places template units—attributes. “Lower” refers to the attribute’s position within a hierarchy. This is normally done for frequently requested reports. Every attribute supports its own collection of forms. dimensions. and Abbreviation could all be forms of the attribute Customer. metrics. . See also: • • column row business intelligence A system that facilitates the analysis of volumes of complex (BI) system data by providing the ability to view data from multiple perspectives. When a report designer defines a template for a report. and Page. with respect to another attribute.

calculations on other metrics. drill A method of obtaining supplementary information after a report has been executed. 2) A copy of transaction data specifically structured for query. It is calculated by Intelligence Server. reporting. See also: • filter data warehouse 1) A database. See also: • • • • page-by pivot sort subtotal © 2006 MicroStrategy. The new data is retrieved by re-querying the Intelligent Cube or database at a different attribute or fact level. derived metric A metric based on data already available in a report. containing the historical data of an enterprise. See also: • • axis row conditionality Conditionality of a metric enables you to associate an existing filter object with the metric so that only data that meets the filter conditions is included in the calculation. on report data after it has been returned from the database. column 417 . typically very large.Basic Reporting Guide Glossary column 1) A one-dimensional vertical array of values in a report table. and analysis. Use a derived metric to perform column math. Inc. Used for decision support or business intelligence. not in the database. it organizes data and allows coordinated updates and loads. that is.

hierarchy A set of attributes defining a meaningful path for element browsing or drilling. or sales in dollars. metadata A repository whose data associates the tables and columns of a data warehouse with user-defined attributes and facts to enable the mapping of the business view. stored in a data warehouse. fact 1) A measurement value. For example. . viewing the list of months in a year. filter A MicroStrategy object that specifies the conditions that the data must meet to be included in the report results. A filter is normally implemented in the SQL WHERE clause. Inc. Using a filter on a report narrows the data to consider only the information that is relevant to answer your business question. 2) A schema object representing a column in a data warehouse table and containing basic or aggregated numbers—usually prices.Glossary Basic Reporting Guide element browsing Navigating through hierarchies of attribute elements. and needs to the underlying database structure. or inventory quantities in counts. terms. A filter is composed of at least one qualification. See also metric. 418 element browsing © 2006 MicroStrategy. often numeric and typically aggregatable. Multiple qualifications in a single filter are combined using logical operators. It can even be held in a different RDBMS. A metadata repository can reside on the same server as the data warehouse or on a different database server. since a report queries the database against all the data stored in the data warehouse. which is the actual condition that must be met for the data to be included on a report. Examples include "Region = Northeast" or "Revenue > $1 million".

facts. metrics. an object is the highest grouping level of information about one concept. the user can page through the cube. reports. metric 419 . The slice is characterized by the choice of elements on the Page axis. attributes. consolidations. with respect to another attribute. By varying the selection of elements. For example: sum(dollar_sales) or [Sales] . More concretely. “Higher” refers to the attribute’s position within a hierarchy. page-by Segmenting data in a grid report by placing available attributes. Since a grid is two-dimensional. used by the user to achieve the goal of specified data analysis. See also: • • • • drill pivot sort subtotal parent attribute The higher-level attribute in an attribute relationship with one or more children. or other metrics.Basic Reporting Guide Glossary metric 1) A business calculation defined by an expression built with functions. See also: • • child attribute relationship © 2006 MicroStrategy. including folders.[Cost] 2) The MicroStrategy object that contains the metric definition. an object is any item that can be selected and manipulated. and so on. facts. only a slice of the cube can be seen at any one time. and metrics on a third axis called the Page axis. object Conceptually. Inc. See also fact.

qualification The actual condition that must be met for data to be included on a report. and OR NOT. containing reports. The project object is specified when requesting the establishment of a session. For example. and functions. and then determine how to combine the qualifications using the logical operators AND. and hence the associated data. metadata repository. metrics. Qualifications are used in filters and custom groups. relationship An association specifying the nature of the connection between one attribute (the parent) and one or more other attributes (the children). . to reconfigure a grid report by interchanging row and column headers. A typical example with a filter is prompting the user to select a specific attribute on which to qualify. consolidations) on different axes. OR. and user community. as defined in (1). prompt MicroStrategy object that asks the user during report execution to provide an answer that completes the information. City is a child attribute of State.Glossary Basic Reporting Guide pivot To reconfigure data on a grid report by placing report objects (attributes. Inc. 2) An object containing the definition of a project. You can create multiple qualifications for a single filter or custom group. Also. metrics. See also: • 420 pivot parent attribute © 2006 MicroStrategy. filters. See also: • • • • drill page-by sort subtotal project 1) The highest-level intersection of a data warehouse. Subset of cross-tab. AND NOT. Examples include "Region = Northeast" or "Revenue > $1 million".

tables. operators. Shortcut objects provide quick access to commonly used objects. Inc. functions. See also: • • filter template report design The process of building reports from basic report components using the Report Editor in MicroStrategy Desktop or MicroStrategy Web. © 2006 MicroStrategy. and then present it in a visually pleasing manner. and transformations. analyze that data. that relates the information in the logical data model and physical warehouse schema to the MicroStrategy environment. hierarchies. These objects are developed in MicroStrategy Architect. and so forth. a report allows users to query for data. report 421 . metric. partition mappings. which can be accessed from MicroStrategy Desktop. Series generally correspond to the columns of a grid report. See also: • • axis column schema object A MicroStrategy object created. row The horizontal axis of a report. shortcut object A MicroStrategy object that represents a link to another MicroStrategy object such as a report. Series are represented as legend items in a graph. the set of data along the Y-axis.Basic Reporting Guide Glossary • child attribute report The central focus of any decision support investigation. Schema objects directly reflect the warehouse structure and include attributes. series In a graph. facts. filter. usually by a project designer.

subtotal A totaling operation performed for a portion of a result set. transformation metric An otherwise simple metric that takes the properties of the transformation applied to it. numeric ascending. metrics. custom groups. See also: • • • • drill page-by pivot sort template The data definition portion of the template consists of the group of objects (attribute. 422 sort © 2006 MicroStrategy.Glossary Basic Reporting Guide sort Arranging data according to some characteristic of the data itself (alphabetical descending. The layout and format of these objects are defined within the template's view definition. and so on) that defines the columns of data to be included in the result set. Inc. For example. a metric calculates total sales. Structured Query The query language standardized in 1986 by the American Language (SQL) National Standards Institute (ANSI) and used to request information from tables in a relational database and to manipulate the tables’ structure and data. and so forth). Add a transformation for last year and the metric now calculates last year’s total sales. See also: • • • • drill page-by pivot subtotal source system Any system or file that captures or holds data of interest. .

if revenue is greater than $200. © 2006 MicroStrategy. to highlight important data. Inc. threshold 423 . a threshold can automatically format that cell to have a blue background with bold type. For example.Basic Reporting Guide Glossary threshold Used to create conditional formatting for metric values.

Inc.Glossary Basic Reporting Guide 424 threshold © 2006 MicroStrategy. .

Inc. 425 . generally 154 text prompts 160 applying totals and subtotals 231 attribute defined on 111 adding to a report 341 alias 36 and metrics. See attribute prompt.INDEX A adding attributes to a report 341 filters to a report 346 metrics to a report 344 prompts to a filter 359 prompts to a metric 357 prompts to a report 351 usability features to a report 371 alias 35 attribute 36 consolidation 36 custom group 36 metric 36 Analytics Modules. 206 in a page-by field 80 join types 146 keeping when drilling 124 prompt. removing when drilling 124 viewing samples 207 attribute element list qualification 253 attribute element prompt defined on 316 answering 158 creating 317 example 316 attribute form qualification 258 attribute prompt defined on 312 © 2006 MicroStrategy. relationship 215 editing 386 example 111. See MicroStrategy Analytics Modules. analyzing data 65 answer requirements for prompts 297 answering attribute element prompts 157 attribute prompts 163 Big Decimal prompts 160 date prompts 160 hierarchy prompts 162 long prompts 160 metric prompts 167 numeric prompts 160 object prompts 158 prompts.

formatting 47 Break By in metric set qualification 267 bulk reports. metric defined on 220 values in a report 27 conditionality for metrics 220 consolidation adding to a report 381 alias 36 and drilling 116 creating attribute element 317 attribute prompts 313 attribute qualification filters 254 autostyles 63 documents. . Inc. changing order 95 categories in a graph report 57 cell defined on 10 blank or empty 34 formatting 34 changing graph colors 56 graph style metric joins 94 column alias 35 color banding 43 hiding 41 objects on. See MicroStrategy Analytics Modules. See threshold. Big Decimal prompt defined on 328 answering 160 creating 329 border of a report. typically 10 pivoting 84 swap data with rows 85 Command Manager and metric creation 247 components of a metric 210 of a prompt 296 compound metric defined on 226 and arithmetic operators 227 example 213 condition defined on 249 conditional formatting. about 389 drilling path 126 functions 233 metric joins 90 metric prompts 320 metric set qualifications 267 object prompts 324 objects 202.Index Basic Reporting Guide answering 163 creating 313 example 312 attribute qualification defined on 253 creating 254 examples 253 attribute-to-attribute qualification 292 audience for report creation 192 autostyle defined on 62 applying 62 creating 63 B banding 43 BIDK. exporting 22 C cache defined on 150 caching report data 151 calculating data 88 calculation. 204 page-by fields 81 426 © 2006 MicroStrategy.

example 124 methods 117 on a graph 119 427 . document. example 130 and thresholds 126 anywhere 122 behavior 121 disabling 121 down only 122 enabling 121. 122 example 116 keeping parent.Basic Reporting Guide Index prompts 299 relationship set qualifications 270 reports. shortcut objects 181 shortcut-to-a-filter qualifications 279 shortcut-to-a-report qualifications 276 thresholds 30 value prompts 329 creating reports and audience 192 and data sources 194 and saving time 195 best practices 192 examples 190. summary. showing 72 data source alternatives 395 and report creation 194 joining fact tables 89 refreshing report data 148 understanding 148 date prompt defined on 328 answering 160 creating 329 date qualification 262 default answers for prompts. See level. 196 cross-tabular report 11 custom expressions 292 custom group defined on 39 adding to a report 381 alias 36 and drilling 116 formatting 27 hierarchical or flat display 39 customizing drilling behavior 121 functions 247 metric number format 244 Report Details pane 108 D data analyzing 65 caching 150 calculating 88 © 2006 MicroStrategy. dimensionality. See creating reports. defining 297 derived metric defined on 19 Desktop. methods for 85 refreshing 148 source. 367 in Desktop 369 in Web 370 privileges required 190 quick report creation 181. See Report Services document. Inc. showing 72 filtering 104 grouping with page-by 79 outlining 73 pivoting 83 pivoting. drill map 378 drilling defined on 115 and page-by 130 and page-by. detail. See MicroStrategy Desktop. See data source.

joining with 428 operators 281 relationship filters 270 set qualifications 266 stand-alone vs. 248 imported elements 292 in SQL 247 qualification. creating 126 Report Data Options 121 troubleshooting 122 dynamic aggregation defined on 19 dynamic date 264 E editing attributes 386 filters 291 metrics 245 prompts 331 reports 384 embedded object 177 enabling drilling 122 evaluation order defined on 95 changing 95 example 95 exporting bulk reports 22 data 21 F fact 211 filter defined on 104. Inc. . series 57 styles. defined on 247 adding a prompt to 359 adding to a report 346 and report limits 87 attribute qualifications 253 based on dates 262 creating 249 diagram of 248 editing 291 examples 104. See graph style. © 2006 MicroStrategy. by a designer 375 reports 26 Freeform SQL 395 function defined on 213 creating with a wizard 233 custom plug-in 247 examples 213 in subtotal or grand total 231 non-group 227 used in metric definition 213 G graph categories 57 colors 56 creating 389 displaying numbers in 61 drilling on 119 examples 54 objects. view filter 107 filter definition prompt defined on 305 creating 307 example 305 Filter Editor 250 filtering data on a report 104 formatting cells 34 metrics 242 metrics.Index Basic Reporting Guide path. See graph objects. filter as part of report 252 types 251 viewing its definition 107 vs.

viewing 7 inner. relationship 215 J join attribute. metric 92 join type. for metric 90 viewing. metric 94 when to use. for metric 90 metric 90 outer. specifying 298 maximum values in a report. metric 89 joint element lists 292 L level defined on 115 example 115 metrics 246 of calculation for a metric 216 prompt 302 limits and report filters 87 example 86 maximum and minimum values 86 linked objects 177 logging in to MicroStrategy Desktop 2 MicroStrategy Web 3 long prompt defined on 328 answering 160 creating 329 H hierarchy defined on 110 examples 112. about 146 examples. metric 91 © 2006 MicroStrategy. 113 hierarchy prompt defined on 308 answering 162 creating example 308 HTML document 392 I imported filter elements 292 inner join for a metric 90 Insert Function Wizard 233 international support xxi M maximum number of prompt answers. specifying 86 menus in Desktop 402 metric defined on 208 adding a prompt to 357 adding to a report 344 alias 36 and attributes. Inc.Basic Reporting Guide Index understanding 53 undo and redo formatting 58 view 11 graph objects moving 58 placement 55 resizing 58 graph style changing 55 confirming your choice 378 examples 54 minimum requirements for 55 Grid Graph formatting 50 view 13 grid. 429 .

function 213 hiding a column 41 in a page-by field 80 in SQL 213 join. 211 example 211 metric join 89 changing 94 metric prompt defined on 319 answering 167 creating 320 example 319 metric set qualification 266 creating 267 metric-to-metric comparisons 292 MicroStrategy Analytics Modules 7 MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Developer Kit 7 MicroStrategy Desktop creating objects 204 folder list 398 interface 398 menus 402 Object Viewer 398 saving objects 205 Shortcut Bar 398 starting 2 toolbar icons 403 MicroStrategy OLAP Services about 18 and designing reports 392 and refreshing data 153 derived metrics 19 dynamic aggregation 19 view filters 18 MicroStrategy Tutorial 5 MicroStrategy Web interface 407 menus 407 starting 3 toolbar icons 409 minimum number of prompt answers.Index Basic Reporting Guide column aliases 247 components 210 compound. See metric prompt. See metric set qualification. See metric formula. level defined on 115. See compound metric. 215 number format in graphs 61 operators 219 prompt. specifying 86 430 © 2006 MicroStrategy. applying 231 transformation 223 type 208 viewing 209 VLDB properties 247 Metric Editor 209 metric formula defined on 210. See metric join. condition. ranking 93 saving 232 set qualification. See level. creating 229 customizing number format 244 definition defined on 210 derived 19 dimensionality. See conditional metric. subtotal. applying 231 threshold 31 total. Inc. . editing 245 example of level 115 expression defined on 210 formatting 242 formatting by a designer 375 formula. specifying 298 minimum values.

modifying for graph objects 58 prerequisites for creating reports 335 for projects 336 printing a report 19 privileges 5 for designing reports 190 for report creation 337 project defined on 199 prerequisites 336 prompt defined on 154 adding to a filter 359 adding to a metric 357 adding to a report 351 and scheduled reports 296 and security filters 295 and source objects 176 answer requirements 297 431 O object adding to a report. in compound metrics 227 in a metric calculation 219 in report limits 86 joining filter qualifications 281 OR example 283 OR NOT example 286 © 2006 MicroStrategy.Basic Reporting Guide Index moving graph objects 58 N null values 34 number format customizing 244 in graphs 61 numeric prompt defined on 328 answering 160 creating 329 order of evaluation. keeping when drilling 124 password 4 permissions 5 pivoting defined on 83 example 84 position. creating 197. opening a report 7 operator defined on 281 AND example 281 AND NOT example 288 arithmetic. 202. outer join for a metric 90 outline mode 73 outline of report data 76 output level and filters 271 in metric set qualification 267 P page-by defined on 79 and drilling 130 creating 81 example 79 removing 82 parent attribute. See MicroStrategy OLAP Services. 204 diagram of types 199 editors and wizards 203 linked 177 prompt. . See object prompt. See adding. saving 202. See also individual object names. Inc. See evaluation order. 204 object prompt defined on 322 answering 158 creating 324 example 322 OLAP Services.

alias 35 analysis. metric. value prompts. choose from all attributes in a hierarchy 308 choose from an attribute element list 316 components 296 creating 299 date prompts. 270 creating 270 removing page-by fields 82 report defined on 334 adding.Index Basic Reporting Guide answering 154 attribute element prompts. object 322 object prompts. See Big Decimal prompt. See text prompt. 432 . See object prompt. See value prompt. example 319 metric prompts. creating 329 Prompt Generation Wizard 300 prompt type about 301 choosing 303 prompted objects. answering 167 number of answers. properties 296 qualify on a metric 319 qualify on an attribute 312 saving a report with 170 stand-alone vs. default answers. defining 298 numeric prompts. value prompt. in scheduled reports 331 level prompt type 302 long prompts. See attribute prompt. See hierarchy prompt. See long prompt. reverting to original 177 Q qualification defined on 249 attribute-to-attribute 292 joining with operators 281 metric set 266 set relationship filter 270 shortcut-to-a-filter 278 shortcut-to-a-report defined on 273 Query Builder 395 quick sort 69 R rank metrics 93 redo graph formatting 58 refreshing data in a report 148 relationship filter 270 relationship set qualification 267. part of report or filter 304 system prompts 331 text prompts. Inc. attribute. attribute prompts. reverting to original 177 reports. title and description 298 types. See prompt type. metric prompts. See date prompt. defining 297 editing 331 examples 293 filter definition prompts 305 hierarchy prompts. See attribute element prompt. about xiv analyzing data in 65 borders 47 © 2006 MicroStrategy. See metric prompt. answering 163 Big Decimal prompts. See adding object name to. See numeric prompt.

scheduled. subtotal 100 types 10 values. typically 9 pivoting 84 swap data with columns 85 S sample data 5 saving metrics 232 objects 202. enabling 123 drilling. 366 with page-by fields 82 scheduled report with prompts 296.Basic Reporting Guide Index bulk exporting 22 caches 150 cells 10 columns 10 creating 334 creating. about xiii designing 367 details. See Report Details pane. Inc. 331 searching for data in a report 70 433 © 2006 MicroStrategy. See creating a report. See scheduled report. editing 384 examples 7 exporting 21 filtering 104 formatting ideas 26 graph report 11 grid 11 grid-graph 13 limits 86 objects 197 opening 7 prerequisites for creating 335 printing 19 prompts 170 quick sort 69 rows 9 samples and examples 7 saving 366 saving. . defined on 389 adding usability to 377 creating. about 389 row alias 35 color banding 43 objects on. cross-tabbed 11 data sources 148 data. See report data. design. 204 reports with page-by fields 82 reports with prompts 170 saving a report 120. keeping parent 126 report limits 87 report designer role defined on 190 Report Details pane customizing 108 viewing 108 Report Editor 337 access from Desktop 338 access from Web 340 Report Services document 389. searching for 70 Report Builder 183 report data searching for 70 sorting 66 Report Data Options aliasing options 38 drilling 121 drilling. See saving a report.

modifying for graph objects 58 smart total 240 sorting report data 66 SQL filter in WHERE clause 247 metric in SELECT clause 213 searching for strings 70 viewing for a report 13 writing your own 395 starting MicroStrategy Desktop 2 MicroStrategy Web 3 subtotal defined on 100 applying to a metric 231 displaying on a report 101 example 237 in a metric 237 removing 240 user-defined 247 support international xxi technical xxi system prompts 331 T tables. creating 181 shortcut qualification defined on 273 shortcut-to-a-filter qualification defined on 278 creating 279 example 278 shortcut-to-a-report qualification defined on 273 creating 276 example 274 simple metric.Index Basic Reporting Guide for SQL strings 70 security filter and prompts 295 security privileges 5 series in a graph report 57 set qualification defined on 266 relationship filter 270 shortcut object. creating 209 size. Inc. See MicroStrategy Tutorial. 59 usability features. . 29 title and description for prompts 298 toolbar icons in Desktop 403 in MicroStrategy Web 409 total 100 applying to a metric 231 example 237 in a metric 237 smart total 240 transformation defined on 223 transformation metric 223 Tutorial. joining for a metric 89 technical support xxi template defined on 332 diagram 333 selecting 333 text prompt defined on 328 answering 160 creating 329 threshold defined on 29 and drilling 126 creating 30 example 27. adding to a report 371 user-defined subtotals 247 V value prompt defined on 326 434 © 2006 MicroStrategy. U undo graph formatting 58.

435 . 107.Basic Reporting Guide Index creating 329 example 326 value. © 2006 MicroStrategy. regular filter 107 viewing a filter’s definition 107 a graph 11 grid report 7 metrics 209 Report Details pane 108 SQL 13 VLDB properties 247 W Web. See MicroStrategy Web. locating in a report 70 view filter defined on 18. 393 vs. Inc.

Index Basic Reporting Guide 436 © 2006 MicroStrategy. Inc. .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful